7013B-14B - Im - 23136-0110 LLZ-min PDF

Commercial - in - Confidence
NORMARC 7013B-7014B
Instrument Landing System
Instruction Manual
Park Air Systems AS Name Signature Date

PAS Author John Saugstad JSA (sign.) 27-Jun-03
PAS approved by Harald Sandernes HSA (sign.) 05-Dec-07
NORMARC 7013B-7014B Instruction Manual

23136/Rev.1.10/03-Dec-07
©2007 Park Air Systems AS
.
REVISION STATEMENT
Product Name NORMARC 7013B-7014B
Product Group Instrument Landing System
Manual Type Instruction Manual
Part number: 23136
Part revision: 1.10
Date: 03-Dec-07
File: 7013B-14B_im_23136-0110.pdf
Document part/Chapter Number Rev

Front page and preface, including table of con- *
tents
Chapter 1 General Description I1 2
Chapter 2 Technical Description I2 4
Chapter 3 Operation Instructions I3 4
Chapter 4 Periodic Maintenance I4 4
Chapter 5 Corrective Maintenance I5 6
Chapter 6 Parts Lists I6 3
Chapter 7 Installation and Initial Set-up I7 7
Chapter 8 Detailed Technical Description I8 6
Appendix A: Monitor and Maint. parameters IAPA 2
Appendix B: Far Field Monitors IAPB 2
Appendix C: Power Supply IAPC 2
Appendix D: RMM Software IAPD 8
* The revision status for the document front page and preface, including table of contents, is
identical to “Part revision”.
© Copyright 2007 Park Air Systems AS
The information contained herein is the property of Park Air Systems and may not be copied, used or disclosed in whole or in part except with the
prior written permission of Park Air Systems, or if it has been furnished under a contract as expressly authorised under that contract. The copyright
and the foregoing restrictions on copyright use and disclosure extend to all media in which this information may be preserved including magnetic
storage, punched card, paper tape, computer printout, visual display, etc.

23136/Rev.1.10/03-Dec-07
©2007 Park Air Systems AS Page i
RECORD OF CHANGES
Chg. No. Date Doc.part / Chapter Rev Description Acc.
by.
4131 19-Feb-04 Ch. 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, App. 2 Changed block diagrams and BGR
A, App. C menu tree from training course,
and App. D* *5 various smaller improvements,
added declaration of conformity
(CE)
4158 26-May-04 Ch.5 (Amendment 2) 3 Loop phase optimisation’s meas- BGR
urements tables are removed.
- 28-Jul-04 Ch. 2 and 8 2 and 3 ECR 1873: 2.1.3 - New Block BGR
Diagram. 2.1.3 and 8.1.1: Incor-
rect figure cross references cor-
rected.
4209 14-Jan-05 Ch. 2, 4, 5, 7 and 8 3, 3, 4, New drawings and text and a BGR
3 &4 general update for the last 6
months
4243 24-Jun-05 Ch. 6 3* Change Dummy Load DL2 and BGR
DL4 - Parts List and Figure 6-2
4260 05-Aug-05 Ch. 2, 6, 7 and 8 4, 3*, 4 RCA 1240E/F, CAT Status Sys- BGR
and 5 tem and Fibre optic line
4287 21-Feb-06 Ch. 3, 4, 5, 7 and 3, 4, 5, Improved and corrected descrip- BGR
Appendix D 5 and 6 tions. New release of RMM Soft-
ware
4332 17-Aug-06 DoC, Ch. 5 and 7 1.8, 6, New Declaration of Conformity BGR
6 and new drawings for RMM SW
4369, 02-Jul-07 First Aid, Ch.1, 3, 7, 8 1.9, 2, New text for First aid; 1.5.3 New BGR
4395 and Appendix B and D 4, 7, 6, table for R&TTE. New figures:
2 and 7 Fig. 3-13, 3-14 and 3-15.
Tables 7-13 and 7-14: New table
for DC-Loop alarm limits. New
text and Figure 8-8. New ch.
8.1.14 with Coaxial Connections.
Corrected Figure title B-4.
D.3.5.8: New tables for DIP
switches setting
4415 29-Nov-07 App. D (Amendment 3) 8 Added set-up information for TD- BGR
36 Modem
AMENDMENT INSTRUCTION:
Chapter Description Remove pages Insert pages

Title Page Change date and Rev. Rev. 1.9 Rev. 1.10
Status Change date and Rev. i, ii/Rev. 1.9 i, ii/Rev. 1.10
Appendix D Change App. D APD/Rev. 7 APD/Rev. 8
Instruction Manual NORMARC 7013B-7014B

23136/Rev.1.10/03-Dec-07
Page ii ©2007 Park Air Systems AS

23136/Rev.1.9/02-Jul-07
©2007 Park Air Systems AS Page iii
- Page intentionally blank -

23136/Rev.1.9/02-Jul-07
Page iv ©2007 Park Air Systems AS
REQUESTS OR ERRATA TO PARK AIR SYSTEMS
Send to:
Park Air Systems AS

P.O. Box 50 Manglerud
N - 0612 Oslo Fax | +47 2318 0210
Norway E-mail | oslo@no.parkairsystems.com
Document title | NORMARC 7013B-7014B Instruction Manual
Company name |
Attention |
Address |
Post Code |
Country |
Request / Error |
Signed |
Date |
Reservation: Park Air Systems AS reserves the right to make design

changes, additions to improvements in its
Products without obligation to install such in Products pre-
viously manufactured.
Limitations of use: The use of this manual is limited to the operation and
maintenance of the system stated in the Title Page. It shall
not be used for purposes of product manufacture.

23136/Rev.1.9/02-Jul-07
©2007 Park Air Systems AS Page v

23136/Rev.1.9/02-Jul-07
Page vi ©2007 Park Air Systems AS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. SECTION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION ........................................................ 1-1

1.1 Purpose and scope......................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Document overview ........................................................................................ 1-1
1.3 ILS Description ............................................................................................... 1-3
1.3.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................... 1-3
1.3.2 ILS Overview .................................................................................................. 1-3
1.3.3 Localizer Overview ......................................................................................... 1-3
1.3.4 Localizer Description ...................................................................................... 1-4
1.4 Product Type Numbers................................................................................... 1-5
1.5 Technical Specifications ................................................................................. 1-6
1.5.1 Signal Minimum Performance LLZ ................................................................. 1-6
1.5.2 Environmental Characteristics ....................................................................... 1-7
1.5.3 EMC, RF and Safety Characteristics ............................................................. 1-7
1.5.4 Mechanical Characteristics ........................................................................... 1-7
1.5.5 Power Supply ................................................................................................ 1-8
1.6 Physical Organization ..................................................................................... 1-8
1.6.1 Module and Assembly Location...................................................................... 1-8
1.6.2 Service Kit Assembly ...................................................................................... 1-8
1.6.3 Power Supply.................................................................................................. 1-8
1.7 System Description......................................................................................... 1-9
1.7.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 1-9
1.7.2 Physical Description ....................................................................................... 1-10
1.7.3 Monitors .......................................................................................................... 1-10
1.7.4 Transmitters.................................................................................................... 1-10
1.7.5 Transmitter Control ......................................................................................... 1-11
1.7.6 Remote Control............................................................................................... 1-11
1.7.7 Remote Monitoring System (RMS) ................................................................. 1-11
1.7.8 Remote Slave Panel ....................................................................................... 1-11
1.7.9 Remote Maintenance Monitoring (RMM)........................................................ 1-11
2. SECTION 2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................................... 2-1

2.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Monitors .......................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3 Transmitters.................................................................................................... 2-3
2.4 Transmitter Control ......................................................................................... 2-5
2.5 Remote Control............................................................................................... 2-7
2.6 Remote Monitoring System (RMS) ................................................................. 2-8
2.6.1 General Description ........................................................................................ 2-8
2.6.2 PC and Modem............................................................................................... 2-9
2.6.3 RMS Data bus ................................................................................................ 2-9
2.6.4 Maintenance Data Collection.......................................................................... 2-10
2.6.5 Storage Functions........................................................................................... 2-10
2.6.6 RMS Events.................................................................................................... 2-11
2.6.7 RMS Integrity Tests ........................................................................................ 2-14
2.7 Power Supply.................................................................................................. 2-16
3. SECTION 3 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS .................................................... 3-1

23136/Rev.1.9/02-Jul-07
©2007 Park Air Systems AS Page vii
3.1 Main Cabinet................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1.1 Power on/off.................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Local Control Operation.................................................................................. 3-2
3.1.3 Glossary.......................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.4 Pushbuttons.................................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.5 Switches/Switchlocks...................................................................................... 3-4
3.1.6 System Status Indications .............................................................................. 3-5
3.1.7 Local Keyboard/Display Operation ................................................................. 3-9
3.1.8 The RMS Front Panel ..................................................................................... 3-9
3.1.9 The menu structure......................................................................................... 3-10
3.1.10 Operating the different screens. ..................................................................... 3-11
3.1.11 The access levels. .......................................................................................... 3-12
3.1.12 Function listing................................................................................................ 3-13
3.1.13 The menu tree ................................................................................................ 3-14
3.2 Tower Equipment............................................................................................ 3-18
3.2.1 Remote Control Operation.............................................................................. 3-18
3.2.2 Glossary.......................................................................................................... 3-18
3.2.3 Pushbuttons.................................................................................................... 3-19
3.2.4 Switches/Switchlocks...................................................................................... 3-19
3.2.6 Remote Slave Operation ................................................................................ 3-23
3.2.7 Glossary.......................................................................................................... 3-23
3.2.8 Pushbuttons.................................................................................................... 3-24
3.2.10 Interlock Switch Operation.............................................................................. 3-25
3.3 Remote Maintenance and Monitoring Software.............................................. 3-25
3.3.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................... 3-25
3.3.2 System requirements...................................................................................... 3-26
3.3.3 User Manual ................................................................................................... 3-26
3.4 Startup / shutdown procedures....................................................................... 3-26
3.4.1 Startup ............................................................................................................ 3-26
3.4.2 Shutdown........................................................................................................ 3-29
4. SECTION 4 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ....................................................... 4-1

4.1 Periodic Maintenance Schedule ..................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 On-site Performance Checks.......................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Other On-Site Maintenance ............................................................................ 4-2
4.1.3 Off-Site Maintenance ...................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 Periodic Maintenance CAT I, II and III ............................................................ 4-2
4.2.1 Monthly inspections ........................................................................................ 4-2
4.2.2 Six Monthly inspections .................................................................................. 4-3
4.2.3 Annual inspections.......................................................................................... 4-5
5. SECTION 5 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE .................................................. 5-1

5.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Diagnostic functions........................................................................................ 5-1
5.2.1 General description......................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.2 Current data diagnostics................................................................................. 5-1
5.2.3 Alarm event diagnostics.................................................................................. 5-2
5.2.4 Manual fault diagnosis .................................................................................... 5-2
5.3 LRU change procedures................................................................................. 5-3
5.3.1 Replacing units ............................................................................................... 5-3

23136/Rev.1.9/02-Jul-07
Page viii ©2007 Park Air Systems AS
5.3.2 MF 1211/MF 1219 replacement...................................................................... 5-3

5.3.3 PS 1227 replacement ..................................................................................... 5-7
5.3.4 OS 1221 replacement..................................................................................... 5-7
5.3.5 MO 1212 replacement .................................................................................... 5-8
5.3.6 TCA 1218 replacement................................................................................... 5-8
5.3.7 RMA 1215....................................................................................................... 5-9
5.3.8 LF 1576 replacement...................................................................................... 5-10
5.3.9 Coaxial relay ................................................................................................... 5-11
5.3.10 LPA 1580/GPA 1581/GPA 1582 replacement ................................................ 5-11
5.3.11 Offset adjustment CSB ................................................................................... 5-13
5.3.12 Offset adjustment SBO (n/a for GP CLR transmitter) ..................................... 5-16
5.3.13 Calibrate internal power measurements ......................................................... 5-18
5.4 Detailed description of the automatic diagnostic algorithms........................... 5-19
5.4.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 5-19
5.4.2 Possible diagnostic solutions.......................................................................... 5-19
5.4.3 Current data diagnostics................................................................................. 5-20
5.4.4 Alarm event diagnostics.................................................................................. 5-24
6. SECTION 6 PARTS LIST .......................................................................... 6-1

6.1 Parts Lists ....................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 Explanation of Parts Lists Form...................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 Parts Lists. ................................................................................................ 6-2
6.1.3 Usable on code index ..................................................................................... 6-3
6.2 Figures ..................................................................................................... 6-4
7. SECTION 7 INSTALLATION AND INITIAL SET-UP ......................................... 7-1

7.1 Mechanical Installation ................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1 Mounting Kit MK 1343A .................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.2 Moving RF Connectors ................................................................................... 7-3
7.2 Electrical Installation ....................................................................................... 7-5
7.2.1 Connection Overview...................................................................................... 7-5
7.2.2 Power and Battery .......................................................................................... 7-6
7.2.3 RF Inputs ........................................................................................................ 7-9
7.2.4 RF Outputs ..................................................................................................... 7-10
7.2.5 DC Loop (Localizer only) ................................................................................ 7-11
7.2.6 Remote Control............................................................................................... 7-12
7.2.7 PC and Modem............................................................................................... 7-13
7.2.8 DME LLZ Ident syncronisation ...................................................................... 7-14
7.2.9 Analog Inputs.................................................................................................. 7-18
7.2.10 Digital Inputs and Outputs .............................................................................. 7-20
7.2.11 Battery Warning .............................................................................................. 7-22
7.2.12 IIC extension................................................................................................... 7-23
7.2.13 Remote control connections ........................................................................... 7-24
7.2.14 Automatic shutdown of GP ............................................................................. 7-26
7.2.15 Remote slave connection ............................................................................... 7-27
7.2.16 Interlock switch connection............................................................................. 7-28
7.2.17 Remote Control Auxiliary Channels................................................................ 7-29
7.2.18 Remote Control optocoupler outputs .............................................................. 7-33
7.2.19 MB 1575A configuration ................................................................................. 7-34
7.3 Tests and Adjustments ................................................................................... 7-35
7.3.1 Configuration Settings .................................................................................... 7-35
7.3.2 ILS Configuration ............................................................................................ 7-35

23136/Rev.1.9/02-Jul-07
©2007 Park Air Systems AS Page ix
7.3.3 Remote Ports Access Level Configuration ..................................................... 7-37

7.3.4 Remote Control Interface (CI 1210)................................................................ 7-37
7.3.5 Remote Control configuration ......................................................................... 7-38
7.4 Transmitter Setup ........................................................................................... 7-40
7.4.1 Transmitter setup............................................................................................ 7-40
7.4.2 RF output level................................................................................................ 7-41
7.4.3 LF Phase Check ............................................................................................. 7-42
7.4.4 SDM adjustment ............................................................................................. 7-42
7.4.5 DDM adjustment ............................................................................................. 7-43
7.4.6 CSB / SBO phase adjustment ........................................................................ 7-44
7.4.7 Course Sector adjustment .............................................................................. 7-46
7.4.8 Ident Morse code ............................................................................................ 7-46
7.4.9 Ident modulation adjustment........................................................................... 7-47
7.4.10 Flight Check value setting............................................................................... 7-47
7.5 Antenna System Adjustments......................................................................... 7-48
7.6 Monitor Alignment........................................................................................... 7-48
7.6.1 General ........................................................................................................... 7-48
7.6.2 RF Input Level Adjustment. ............................................................................ 7-49
7.6.3 AGC Time Adjustment .................................................................................... 7-50
7.6.4 SDM Adjustment............................................................................................. 7-50
7.6.5 DDM Adjustment............................................................................................. 7-50
7.7 Factory Default Configuration Settings ........................................................... 7-51
7.7.1 Cat I monitor LIMIT configuration ................................................................... 7-51
7.7.2 Description of the FFM EXE AL limits............................................................. 7-53
7.7.3 Description of the CL IDENT and CLR IDENT limits ...................................... 7-53
7.7.4 Cat II monitor LIMIT configuration .................................................................. 7-54
7.7.5 Cat III monitor LIMIT configuration ................................................................. 7-54
7.7.6 Executive Monitor delay configuration ............................................................ 7-54
7.7.7 Maintenance parameter configuration ............................................................ 7-55
7.7.8 Maintenance delay configuration .................................................................... 7-59
7.7.9 Morse code configuration ............................................................................... 7-59
7.8 Typical TX Adjustments values....................................................................... 7-60
7.9 User administration configuration ................................................................... 7-60
7.10 Frequency configuration strap settings........................................................... 7-60
7.10.1 OS 1221A strap settings for 2-frequency LLZ ................................................ 7-61
8. SECTION 8 DETAILED TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................... 8-1

8.1 Main Cabinet................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 MF 1211A Localizer Monitor Frontend ........................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 MO 1212A Monitor.......................................................................................... 8-5
8.1.3 TCA 1218 Transmitter Control Assembly ....................................................... 8-9
8.1.4 LF 1576A Low Frequency Generator ............................................................. 8-18
8.1.5 OS 1221A RF Oscillator ................................................................................. 8-22
8.1.6 LPA 1580A Localizer Power Amplifier Assembly ........................................... 8-24
8.1.7 Change-Over Relays ...................................................................................... 8-30
8.1.8 SC 898C Signal combiner (Hot Standby only)................................................ 8-31
8.1.9 PS 1227C Power Supply ................................................................................ 8-32
8.1.10 RMA 1215A RMS Assembly........................................................................... 8-33
8.1.11 CI 1210A External Connection Interface ........................................................ 8-36
8.1.12 BW 1566A Battery Warning (Hot Standby only) ............................................. 8-38
8.1.13 MB 1575A Monitor Section Motherboard........................................................ 8-40
8.1.14 Coaxial Cabling............................................................................................... 8-42

23136/Rev.1.9/02-Jul-07
Page x ©2007 Park Air Systems AS
8.2 Tower Equipment............................................................................................ 8-44

8.2.1 RCA 1240 Remote Control Assembly ............................................................ 8-44
8.2.2 MB 1346A Motherboard.................................................................................. 8-48
8.2.3 PS 635B Power Supply .................................................................................. 8-48
8.2.4 MB 1347A Motherboard.................................................................................. 8-48
8.2.5 SF 1344A / SP 1394A Slave Panel ................................................................ 8-49
8.2.6 IL 1379 / IL 1380 Interlock switch ................................................................... 8-50
8.2.7 Category Status System (Optional) ................................................................ 8-51
8.2.8 Meter Panel (Optional).................................................................................... 8-61
SECTION 9 APPENDIXES .......................................................................................... A-1
APPENDIX A.MONITOR AND MAINTENANCE PARAMETERS .......................................... A-1

A.1 Monitor Parameters ........................................................................................ A-1
A.2 Maintenance Parameters................................................................................ A-2
APPENDIX B.FAR FIELD MONITOR ............................................................................ B-1

B.1 System Description......................................................................................... B-1
B.1.1 Functional Description .................................................................................... B-1
B.1.2 Detailed Description FC1391.......................................................................... B-1
B.1.3 Detailed Description FI 1392 .......................................................................... B-4
B.1.4 Detailed Description NMP125A ...................................................................... B-6
B.2 Installation....................................................................................................... B-7
B.2.1 Mechanical and electrical installation ............................................................. B-7
B.2.2 Interfacing the NORMARC 7720 Far Field Monitor ........................................ B-7
B.2.3 Interfacing the NORMARC 3634 - Far Field Monitor Receiver Unit ............... B-8
APPENDIX C.POWER SUPPLY .................................................................................. C-1
APPENDIX D.WINDOWS RMM PROGRAM ................................................................. D-1

23136/Rev.1.9/02-Jul-07
©2007 Park Air Systems AS Page xi

23136/Rev.1.9/02-Jul-07
Page xii ©2007 Park Air Systems AS
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1-1 Typical ILS installation ............................................................................... 1-3

Figure 1-2 Localizer Block Diagram ............................................................................ 1-4
Figure 1-3 ILS Block Diagram ..................................................................................... 1-9
Figure 1-4 The NORMARC 7000B series RMM/RMS systems................................... 1-12
Figure 2-1 ILS Block Diagram ..................................................................................... 2-2
Figure 2-2 Monitor section Block Diagram .................................................................. 2-3
Figure 2-3 System Block Diagram of a Localizer/Glide Path course Transmitter........ 2-4
Figure 2-4 System Block Diagram - Localizer Clearance Transmitter ........................ 2-5
Figure 2-5 TCA 1218A/B Block Diagram..................................................................... 2-6
Figure 2-6 RCA 1240C/D Block Diagram .................................................................... 2-7
Figure 2-7 The RMM configuration.............................................................................. 2-9
Figure 2-8 The RMS Databus...................................................................................... 2-9
Figure 2-9 The IIC Serial Bus and ADC Channels ...................................................... 2-10
Figure 2-10 Power Supply Functional Diagram............................................................. 2-16
Figure 2-11 Power Supply Functional Diagram............................................................. 2-17
Figure 3-1 Power ON/OFF and GND Sockets Location .............................................. 3-1
Figure 3-2 LC 1217A/B front panel.............................................................................. 3-2
Figure 3-3 KD 1214A keyboard/display....................................................................... 3-9
Figure 3-4 Typical top-level LCD screen ..................................................................... 3-10
Figure 3-5 The main menu screen .............................................................................. 3-10
Figure 3-6 A typical readout screen: CL DDM............................................................. 3-11
Figure 3-7 A typical toggle screen: TX1 90 Hz on/off .................................................. 3-11
Figure 3-8 A typical input/store screen: CL DDM ........................................................ 3-12
Figure 3-9 A typical quick read screen: CL.................................................................. 3-12
Figure 3-10 An access denial screen: Switch in REMOTE position .............................. 3-12
Figure 3-11 Level 3 access screen................................................................................ 3-13
Figure 3-12 The top level main menu screen: User in level 3 access ........................... 3-13
Figure 3-13 The top levels of the menu tree (part 1) ..................................................... 3-15
Figure 3-16 RF 1242A/B front panel.............................................................................. 3-18
Figure 3-17 SF 1344A front panel ................................................................................. 3-23
Figure 4-1 SBO Waveforms ........................................................................................ 4-7
Figure 4-2 LF phase check.......................................................................................... 4-7
Figure 5-1 MF1211/MF 1219 adjustments points........................................................ 5-4
Figure 5-2 Loop Phase Tab......................................................................................... 5-13
Figure 5-3 Offset Tab .................................................................................................. 5-14
Figure 5-4 Before adjustment ..................................................................................... 5-15
Figure 5-5 After adjustment ......................................................................................... 5-15
Figure 5-6 Offset Tab .................................................................................................. 5-16
Figure 5-7 Before adjustment ..................................................................................... 5-17
Figure 5-8 After adjustment ......................................................................................... 5-17
Figure 5-9 Power Tab.................................................................................................. 5-18
Figure 5-10 Flow diagram for Monitor warning tests ..................................................... 5-23
Figure 5-11 Flow diagram for diagnosing a changeover-only alarm. ............................ 5-24
Figure 5-12 Flow diagram for diagnosing changeover/shutdown alarms. ..................... 5-25
Figure 6-1 NORMARC 7013B-7014B LLZ cabinet...................................................... 6-4

23136/Rev.1.9/02-Jul-07
©2007 Park Air Systems AS Page xiii
Figure 6-2 NORMARC 7013B-7014B LLZ cabinet, Rear View ................................... 6-5
Figure 6-3 NORMARC 70xxB LLZ & GP cabinet, wall mount side ............................. 6-6
Figure 7-1 NORMARC 70XXB required mounting space (top view) ........................... 7-1
Figure 7-2 NORMARC 70XXB mounted on wall with MK 1343A ................................ 7-2
Figure 7-3 Wall mount dimersions (MK 1343A)........................................................... 7-3
Figure 7-4 Moving RF connectors ............................................................................... 7-4
Figure 7-5 ILS main cabinet connection overview....................................................... 7-5
Figure 7-6 Power and Battery connection Cold Standby............................................. 7-7
Figure 7-7 Power and Battery connection Hot Standby .............................................. 7-8
Figure 7-8 RF input connections ................................................................................. 7-9
Figure 7-9 RF output connections ............................................................................... 7-10
Figure 7-10 DC loop connections .................................................................................. 7-11
Figure 7-11 Remote control connection ........................................................................ 7-12
Figure 7-12 PC and modem connections ...................................................................... 7-13
Figure 7-13 DME connections ....................................................................................... 7-14
Figure 7-14 LLZ master connections (recommended) .................................................. 7-15
Figure 7-15 LLZ master connections (alternative)......................................................... 7-16
Figure 7-16 Circuit Diagram, LLZ master ...................................................................... 7-16
Figure 7-17 DME master connections ........................................................................... 7-17
Figure 7-18 Circuit diagram, DME master ..................................................................... 7-17
Figure 7-19 Analog input connections ........................................................................... 7-18
Figure 7-20 Typical circuit diagram ............................................................................... 7-19
Figure 7-21 Digital input/output connections ................................................................. 7-20
Figure 7-22 Equivalent circuit diagrams ........................................................................ 7-21
Figure 7-23 Battery warning connections ...................................................................... 7-22
Figure 7-24 IIC extension .............................................................................................. 7-23
Figure 7-25 Remote control to ILS connection .............................................................. 7-24
Figure 7-26 Remote control power supply connections ................................................ 7-25
Figure 7-27 Automatic GP shutdown connection .......................................................... 7-26
Figure 7-28 Remote slave connection........................................................................... 7-27
Figure 7-29 Interlock switch connection ........................................................................ 7-28
Figure 7-30 Connector location, MB 1346 (Remote Control) ........................................ 7-30
Figure 7-31 Connector Location, MB 1575 (ILS Rack).................................................. 7-31
Figure 7-32 Typical circuit diagram, Remote Control End............................................. 7-32
Figure 7-33 Typical circuit diagram, ILS Rack End ....................................................... 7-32
Figure 7-34 Typical Remote Control Optocoupler output .............................................. 7-33
Figure 7-35 Transmitter Control strap platforms............................................................ 7-37
Figure 7-36 RF output level .......................................................................................... 7-41
Figure 7-37 Maintenance Measurements...................................................................... 7-41
Figure 7-38 LF phase CSB illustration........................................................................... 7-42
Figure 7-39 SDM Adjustment ........................................................................................ 7-42
Figure 7-40 DDM Adjustment ........................................................................................ 7-43
Figure 7-41 CSB/SBO Phase Adjustment (Transmitter settings) .................................. 7-44
Figure 7-42 CSB/SBO Phase Adjustment (flight check)................................................ 7-45
Figure 7-43 Course Sector Adjustment ......................................................................... 7-46
Figure 7-44 Flight Check value setting .......................................................................... 7-47
Figure 7-45 Adjustment points on Monitor Frontend MF12xx ....................................... 7-49
Figure 7-46 Alternative jumper settings of P2++ ........................................................... 7-49
Figure 8-1 MF 1211A Block Diagram (CL channel shown) ......................................... 8-4
Figure 8-2 MO 1212A Block Diagram.......................................................................... 8-8
Figure 8-3 TCA 1218 Block Diagram........................................................................... 8-17
Figure 8-4 Connection Diagram TCA 1218 ................................................................. 8-18

23136/Rev.1.9/02-Jul-07
Page xiv ©2007 Park Air Systems AS
Figure 8-5 LF 1576A Block Diagram ........................................................................... 8-21

Figure 8-6 OS 1221A Block Diagram .......................................................................... 8-22
Figure 8-7 LPA 1580A Assembly ............................................................................... 8-27
Figure 8-8 LPA 1580A CSB Block Diagram ................................................................ 8-28
Figure 8-9 LPA 1580A SBO Block Diagram ................................................................ 8-29
Figure 8-10 Change-over system Block Diagram.......................................................... 8-30
Figure 8-11 System Diagram standby TX CL/DS simulation......................................... 8-31
Figure 8-12 PS 1227 Block Diagram ............................................................................. 8-32
Figure 8-13 RMA 1215A Block Diagram ....................................................................... 8-33
Figure 8-14 Connection Diagram RMA 1215 ................................................................ 8-34
Figure 8-15 CI 1210A Block Diagram............................................................................ 8-37
Figure 8-16 BW 1566A Block Diagram.......................................................................... 8-38
Figure 8-17 Connection Diagram .................................................................................. 8-41
Figure 8-18 Coax cable connection............................................................................... 8-42
Figure 8-19 Additional Coax Connections Hot Standby ................................................ 8-43
Figure 8-20 Block Diagram RCA 1240 .......................................................................... 8-44
Figure 8-21 Interconnection Diagram RCA 1240 .......................................................... 8-45
Figure 8-22 Block Diagram NMP128A .......................................................................... 8-46
Figure 8-23 Interlock switch connections ...................................................................... 8-50
Figure 8-24 Cat Status system in equipment room ....................................................... 8-51
Figure 8-25 CP 1511A Cat Panel .................................................................................. 8-52
Figure 8-26 CF 1510A Block Diagram........................................................................... 8-53
Figure 8-27 MB 1509A seen from the back side ........................................................... 8-56
Figure B-1 NORMARC 7000B Block Diagram for FFM interface ................................ B-1
Figure B-2 FC 1391 Block Diagram ............................................................................. B-2
Figure B-3 Block Diagram FI 1392............................................................................... B-4
Figure B-4 Block Diagram NMP125A .......................................................................... B-6

23136/Rev.1.9/02-Jul-07
©2007 Park Air Systems AS Page xv

23136/Rev.1.9/02-Jul-07
Page xvi ©2007 Park Air Systems AS
LIST OF TABLES
Table 2-1 RMS Events List......................................................................................... 2-14

Table 4-1 Periodic Maintenance Checks.................................................................... 4-1
Table 4-2 Field Modulation check .............................................................................. 4-18
Table 4-3 Field DDM measurement ........................................................................... 4-18
Table 4-4 Monitor Integrity Test (Alternative 2) .......................................................... 4-19
Table 4-5 Transmitter waveform checks .................................................................... 4-19
Table 4-6 RF Frequency check .................................................................................. 4-19
Table 4-7 LF Frequency check................................................................................... 4-19
Table 4-8 CSB output power ...................................................................................... 4-20
Table 4-9 Monitor Alarm Limits check ........................................................................ 4-20
Table 4-10 Near Field Monitor Delay and 20 seconds inhibit....................................... 4-21
Table 4-11 Battery maintenance .................................................................................. 4-21
Table 4-12 Field modulation check .............................................................................. 4-21
Table 7-1 Setting ILS configuration platform U6 ........................................................ 7-35
Table 7-2 Setting RC link shutdown delay ................................................................. 7-36
Table 7-3 Setting RC Main select at changeover....................................................... 7-36
Table 7-4 Setting RC indication in Service Mode....................................................... 7-36
Table 7-5 Access level strap settings. Warning Configuration ................................... 7-37
Table 7-6 Remote Control Setup................................................................................ 7-37
Table 7-7 Aural warning configuration........................................................................ 7-38
Table 7-8 Warning reset (Silence).............................................................................. 7-38
Table 7-9 Buzzer ...................................................................................................... 7-39
Table 7-10 Telephone Line / RS 232 / TTL logic.......................................................... 7-39
Table 7-11 Optional straps ........................................................................................... 7-39
Table 7-12 Normal operating power level .................................................................... 7-41
Table 7-13 CAT I alarm and warning limits .................................................................. 7-52
Table 7-14 DC Loop alarm limits.................................................................................. 7-53
Table 7-15 Alarm and warning limits for Cat II equipment ........................................... 7-54
Table 7-16 Alarm and warning limits for Cat III equipment .......................................... 7-54
Table 7-17 Factory default delay values ...................................................................... 7-55
Table 7-18 Typical TX adjustment values .................................................................... 7-60
Table 7-19 OS 1221A Course frequency settings for 2-freq. LLZ ................................ 7-61
Table 7-20 OS 1221A Clearance frequency settings for 2-freq. LLZ ........................... 7-62
Table 8-1 MB 1575A plug-in module connectors ....................................................... 8-40
Table 8-2 CAT Status criteria. .................................................................................... 8-57
Table 8-3 Localizer downgrade criteria ...................................................................... 8-57
Table 8-4 FFM downgrade criteria ............................................................................. 8-58
Table 8-5 Glide Path downgrade criteria.................................................................... 8-58
Table 8-6 1 Pin-out MP1574 J1.................................................................................. 8-61
Table 8-7 Pin-out MP1574 J2..................................................................................... 8-61
Table 8-8 Pin-out MP1574 J3..................................................................................... 8-62
Table A-1 Monitor Alarm/Warning Parameters........................................................... A-1
Table A-2 Maintenance Parameters (Part 1) .............................................................. A-2
Table A-3 Maintenance Parameters (Part 2) .............................................................. A-3
Table A-4 User Defined Analog Inputs Maintenance Parameters .............................. A-4
Table A-5 User Defined Logical Inputs/Outputs Maintenance Parameters ................ A-4

23136/Rev.1.9/02-Jul-07
©2007 Park Air Systems AS Page xvii

23136/Rev.1.9/02-Jul-07
Page xviii ©2007 Park Air Systems AS
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
AC Alternating Current
ADC Analog to Digital Converter
AGC Automatic Gain Control
CL Course Line
CLR Clearance
COU Course
CPU Central Processing Unit
CS Course Sector
DAC Digital to Analog Converter
DC Direct Current
DDM Difference in Depth of Modulation
DF Difference Frequency
DL Dc Loop
DS Displacement Sensitivity
DSP Digital Signal Processor
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Progammable
Read Only Memory
EMC ElectroMagnetic Compatibility
EMI ElectroMagnetic Interference
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only
Memory
FFT Fast Fourier Transform
FIFO First-In-First-Out
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
GPA Glidepath Power amplifier Assembly
I/F InterFace
I²C Inter Integrated Circuit
IIC Same as I²C
ILS Instrument Landing System
LED Light Emitting Diode
LF Low Frequency
LLZ Localizer
LPA Localizer Power amplifier Assembly
LRU Line Replacable Unit
MCU Monitor Combiner Unit
NAV NAVigation signals
NF Near Field
PC Personal Computer
RAM Random Access Memory
RF Radio Frequency
RMM Remote Maintenance Monitor

23136/Rev.1.9/02-Jul-07
©2007 Park Air Systems AS Page xix
RMS Remote Monitoring System

ROM Read Only Memory
RTC Real Time Clock
SC Station Control
SDM Sum in Depth of Modulation
SPA Same Parameter Alarm
SRAM Static Random Access Memory
STB Standby
SW SoftWare
TRM TeRMinator
TX Transmitter

23136/Rev.1.9/02-Jul-07
Page xx ©2007 Park Air Systems AS
FIRST AID IN CASE OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
Artificial respiration (mouth-to-mouth) is the recommended technique for use in any case of
electrical shock. It is comparatively simple and produces the best and quickest results when
correctly applied.
Send for medical assistance if possible.
Start without delay but do not touch the victim until the circuit is broken.
1. Break the electrical circuit by switching OFF or, if not possible, PROTECT YOURSELF
with dry insulating material and pull the victim clear of the conductor.
2. Make a brief inspection of the mouth and throat and
ensure that they are clear of obvious obstruction
3. Place your hand on his forehead, and pinch his nostrils
together with the thumb and index finger of this hand.Let
this same hand exert pressure on his forehead to main-
tain the backward head tilt and maintain an open airway.
With your other hand, keep your fingertips on the bony
part of the lower jaw near the chin and lift
4. Take a deep breath and place your mouth (in an airtight
seal) around the casualty's mouth.If the injured person is
small, cover both his nose and mouth with your mouth,
sealing your lips against the skin of his face
5. After blowing, turn your head to watch for chest move-
ment, and allow him to exhale passively
6. If the chest does not rise, do the following steps below
and then attempt to ventilate again.
• Take corrective action immediately by re-establishing the airway. Make sure that
air is not leaking from around your mouth or out of the casualty's pinched nose
• Reattempt to ventilate
• If the chest still does not rise, take the necessary action to open an obstructed air-
way
NOTE
If the initial attempt to ventilate the casualty is unsuccessful, reposition the casualty's head
and repeat rescue breathing. Improper chin and head positioning is the most common cause
of difficulty with ventilation. If the casualty cannot be ventilated after repositioning the head,
proceed with foreign-body airway obstruction manoeuvres
7. Repeat the procedure 12 to 15 times per minute, till medical aid is arranged
CAUTIONARY NOTE
Do not give mouth-to-mouth resuscitation during CPR in the presence of toxins such as cya-
nide, hydrogen sulphide, corrosives and organo-phosphates. Ventilate the casualty by using
a facemask or bag/valve/mask assembly.

23136/Rev.1.9/02-Jul-07
©2007 Park Air Systems AS Page xxi
Avoid mouth-to-mouth resuscitation if there is possibility of transmission of infection between

the victim and the rescuer, such as HIV, Hepatitis-B, Tuberculosis, Shigellosis, Meningococcal
meningitis, Herpes simplex virus and Salmonella. Use an interposition airway device, which
must function effectively in both its resuscitation and protective roles, and be immediately
available at all times.

23136/Rev.1.9/02-Jul-07
Page xxii ©2007 Park Air Systems AS
WARNING - HEALTH HAZARD
Beryllium Oxide is used internally in the high frequency power transistors. It is used for heat
transfer between the transistor chip and casing and is fully enclosed in the transistor case. In
this form it is harmless. However, if the transistor casing is broken, the oxide may be exposed
and represent a health hazard if touched or inhaled.
Beryllium Oxide dust presents a health hazard unless adequate safety precautions are
taken.
THE HAZARD
The material is highly dangerous in dust form when it might be inhaled or enter a cut or an
area of skin irritation.
If dust is caused by chafing, filing or breakage and is inhaled, a single exposure lasting sec-
onds or minutes can cause injury to skin or muscular membranes severe enough to endanger
life or cause permanent injury. Particles penetrating the skin through wounds or abrasions are
liable to cause chronic ulcerations.
Symptoms of poisoning, indicated by respiratory troubles or cyanosis (grey or blue discolora-

tion of the skin), may develop within a week, or after a period extending to several years.
PRACTICAL PRECAUTIONS
Modules containing components with beryllium oxide are clearly marked on the outside.
These modules shall be handled as special waste when decommissioned.
Spare RF Power transistors, received in the manufacturer’s packing, are clearly identified by
attached information. They should be stored in the original packing and not mixed with other
items. The Beryllium Oxide is encapsulated and components are safe to handle for replace-
ment purposes. Care should be exercised in removing defective items to ensure that they do
not become physically damaged.
Components must not be:

1. Carried loosely in pocket, bag or container with other components where they may rub
together or break and disintegrate into dust
2. Heated excessively (normal soldering is quite safe)
3. Broken open for inspection or in any way scratched by tools
Defective and broken components must not be:

1. Disposed of in containers used for general refuse
2. Thrown into the sea unless the circumstances make it unavoidable, e.g. broken cath-
ode ray tubes
Disposal of components containing Beryllium Oxide is described in the next section.

23136/Rev.1.9/02-Jul-07
©2007 Park Air Systems AS Page xxiii
DISPOSAL
Defective components should be individually wrapped, clearly identified as «DEFEC-

TIVE BERYLLIUM OXIDE COMPONENTS» and returned for subsequent disposal. Such
components, securely packed and suitably identified, may also be returned directly to the
manufacturer when known.
Broken components should be individually wrapped and identified as «BROKEN

BERYLLIUM OXIDE COMPONENTS». They must NOT be sent through the post but must be
returned to a depot by hand.
Defective modules containing components with beryllium oxide should be returned for
repair and any defective RF transistors handled as defective components described above.
Modules that are not repaired should be identified as "Module containing components with
Beryllium Oxide" and handled as special waste.
MEDICAL PRECAUTIONS
If Beryllium Oxide is believed to be on, or to have entered the skin through cuts or abrasions,
the area should be thoroughly washed and treated by normal first-aid methods followed by
subsequent medical inspection.
A doctor should treat suspected inhalation of Beryllium Oxide dust as soon as possible, pref-
erably at a hospital.
WARNING ENERGY HAZARD
High levels of electrical energy are supplied by the AC/DC power supplies and distributed by
the 27VDC supply inside the cabinet. Be careful not to contact the connectors supplying the
27VDC, or any component connected to the 27V DC, with any metallic object while servicing
the cabinet.
Note that to fully remove 27VDC turn off both mains AC/DC power supplies/Chargers and iso-
late the standby batteries if connected.
Only authorized maintenance personnel shall be given access to and perform maintenance
on the cabinet.

23136/Rev.1.9/02-Jul-07
Page xxiv ©2007 Park Air Systems AS
PROTECTING ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT AGAINST
ELECTRO-STATIC DISCHARGE, ESD
This electronic equipment and its spare parts are built from semiconductor components which
are sensitive to ESD. The equipment may be damaged or suffer from reduced performance
and lifetime if improperly handled during servicing and transportation.
WARRANTY
To retain the Park Air Systems AS warranty the following precautions must be taken:
• All semiconductor components and modules containing semiconductors shall be han-
dled and transported as ESD-sensitive
HANDLING PROCEDURE
To achieve ESD-protection, the operator shall use a portable static-dissipative field kit contain-
ing dissipative mat, wrist strap and ground cord or equivalent protection connected to same
potential as the equipment, see picture.
• Connect the dissipative mat to the equipment via the
ground cord and connect the wrist strap cord to the
mat
• The operator must wear the wrist-strap before
modules are removed or components touched
• Anytime a module must be laid down, it should be
placed only on the grounded dissipative mat
• All electronic equipment must be properly reinserted
in the rack or protected by placing in ESD-shielding
bags or boxes before the ground cord, wrist strap
cord or wrist strap are removed
Nonconductive objects such as synthetic clothing, Styrofoam coffee cups, cigarette packs,
vinyl work order envelopes or common plastics shall be removed from the work area as they
may cause damage to semiconductor components.
TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE
Electronic equipment, spare part modules or faulty modules removed from the equipment, to
be returned for repair shall be stored and transported in ESD-shielding bags or equivalent.
The electrostatic shielding package shall not be opened without the operator and work area
being properly protected as stated above.

23136/Rev.1.9/02-Jul-07
©2007 Park Air Systems AS Page xxv
SHIPPING PRECAUTIONS
Do not ship the rack or subrack assemblies (i.e. transmitter sections) with heavy mod-
ules inserted. All encapsulated modules must be pulled out and packed separately before
shipping.
All modules must be packed in electrostatic conductive (ESD) bags or boxes before shipping.
Modules to be shipped for service must always be identified by module no. and serial
no. See section 1.4, Product Type Numbers for proper identification rules. Use the
assembly level as identifier if assembly consists of one or more modules.
REVISION NUMBERS
Modules used in the system, which have the same type of designation, might in particular
cases have different revision numbers.
This is due to the production of modules in different batches where changes have taken place
from one batch to the next.
New revisions of modules, always replace the old revisions.
Documentation of the latest revision is enclosed in the manual.
Please contact us if information on older revisions of modules are needed for servicing pur-
poses.

23136/Rev.1.9/02-Jul-07
Page xxvi ©2007 Park Air Systems AS
1. Section 1 General Information
1.1 Purpose and scope
The purpose of this document is to provide the reader with sufficient information to understand
how the NORMARC 7000B-series LLZ/GP operates and is maintained when used together
with the relevant Antenna System handbook. The handbook also contains equipment specific
information for installation; general installation information is given in the Installation hand-
book.
The handbook is written for personnel with a good prior knowledge of ILS, users should partic-
ipate in a NORMARC ILS training course to get the required training.
The handbook covers both the Cold Standby and Hot Standby version of he equipment.
Where relevant, paragraphs are marked cold standby only or hot standby only, or alternatively
by the NORMARC type number.
The corrective maintenance strategy supported is LRU (Line Replaceable Unit) replacement.
Fault isolation to LRU level is supported by the RMM system, minimizing downtime caused by
repairs.
Repair of LRUs require specialized training and equipment, and should be done by
Park Air Systems or other authorized repair facilities.
1.2 Document overview
Section 1 General Information (this section)
This section contains a general overview of this document, a general description of the ILS
system and a description of the Product Type number system.
Section 2 Technical description
This section gives a functional description of how the ILS rack operates.
Section 3 Operating Instructions
This section gives instructions for operating the system by the Remote and Local Controls,
and it gives an introduction to using the RMM software.
Section 4 Periodic Maintenance
This section contains periodic maintenance tasks and descriptions.
Section 5 Corrective Maintenance
This section contains procedures for locating and replacing faulty LRUs (modules).

23136-I1/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
©2007 Park Air Systems AS Page 1-1
Section 6 Part lists
This section contains part lists and part location figures.
Section 7 Installation and Initial Set-up
This section contains instructions for mechanical and electrical installation, configuration of
the equipment, and initial adjustment. The configuration and adjustment instructions can also
be used for maintenance purposes.
Section 8 Detailed Technical Description
This section contains detailed technical description and block diagrams for all the modules in
the rack and in the tower.
Section 9 Appendixes
This section contains the following appendixes:
Appendix A: Listing of all monitor and maintenance parameters.
Appendix B: Description of the optional Far Field Monitor system (LLZ only).
Appendix C: External Power Supplies.
Appendix D: User Handbook for the RMM Software.

23136-I1/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
Page 1-2 ©2007 Park Air Systems AS
1.3 ILS Description
This paragraph gives a description of a typical ILS installation and the NORMARC Localizer
system.
1.3.1 Introduction
This is an overview of a NORMARC 7000B ILS system.
1.3.2 ILS Overview
A complete Instrument Landing System comprises:

• A LOCALIZER SYSTEM, producing a radio course to furnish lateral guidance to the
airport runway
• A GLIDE PATH SYSTEM, producing a radio course to furnish vertical guidance down
the correct descent angle to the runway
• MARKER BEACONS, to provide accurate radio fixes along the approach course
The layout of a typical ILS airport installation is shown below.
Glide Path Localizer

330 MHz 110 MHz
Marker Beacon
75MHz 3°
HBK547-1
Figure 1-1 Typical ILS installation
1.3.3 Localizer Overview
The complete ILS Localizer system comprises:

• A LLZ transmitter/monitor cabinet
• An antenna distribution network
• A monitor network
• A LLZ antenna array
• Near-field monitor antenna

23136-I1/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
A block diagram is shown below:
LOCALIZER ANTENNA
ILS LOCALIZER ARRAY
TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER CSB CL
AND ANTENNA
SBO CL
MODULATOR DISTRIBU-
I and II CSB CLR* TION NETW.
SBO CLR*
ILS Localizer
REMOTE CL
MONITOR MONITOR
CONTROL I and II CLR*
NETWORK RUNWAY CL.
UNIT DS
NF
SLAVE
PANEL
24V
BATTERY
RMM
SYSTEM
MONITOR
POWER OUTPUT PROBE
SUPPLY
* CLR SIGNALS N/A on single-frequency equipment
MAINS INPUT HBK204-1

220V/110V AC
Figure 1-2 Localizer Block Diagram
1.3.4 Localizer Description
The antenna array of the ILS localizer transmitter is located on the extension of the centre line
of the instrument runway of an airfield, but is located far enough from the stop end of the run-
way to prevent it being a collision hazard. The localizer antenna radiates a field pattern
directed along the centre line of the runway towards the middle and outer markers. The
antenna also furnish information outside the front course area in the form of full fly-left or full
fly-right indications (CLEARANCE).
All localizer installations transmit a STATION IDENTIFICATION in Morse code at periodic

intervals. This is a 1020 Hz tone that is keyed to form the basic station identifier.
The localizer is designed to provide a signal at a minimum distance of 25 miles within +/- 10
degrees, and at a minimum distance of 17 nautical miles between +/- 10 and +/- 35 degrees
from the front course line. (Refer to ICAO Annex 10 Chapter 3.1.3.3.1).

23136-I1/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
1.4 Product Type Numbers
The NORMARC product numbering system is based on the following three levels:
• System
• Assembly
• Module
Systems have type numbers starting with NORMARC, for example NORMARC 7033. Sys-
tems consist of assemblies, modules and parts.
Assemblies have type numbers consisting of three letters, a three- or four- digit number and a
letter, for example RMA 1215A. RMA is an abbreviation of Remote Maintenance System
Assembly, 1215 is a running number, and the last letter is the variant designator. Assemblies
can consist of assemblies, modules and parts.
Modules have type numbers consisting of two letters, a three- or four- digit number and a let-
ter, for example MO 1212A. MO is an abbreviation of MOnitor, 1212 is a running number, and
the last letter is the variant designator. Modules consist of parts.

23136-I1/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
1.5 Technical Specifications
1.5.1 Signal Minimum Performance LLZ
Transmitter
Frequency range 108-112 MHz
Frequency tolerance + 0.002%
Output power (CSB) 5-25 W adjustable
Harmonic radiation 2.5 uW maximum
RF difference frequency (2-freq. only) 10 kHz + 2 kHz
Spurious 25 uW maximum
Output power stability + 0.2 dB
CSB/SBO stability + 0.3 dB / +-5°
Modulator
Modulation depth 90/150 Hz 20%
adjustable range 10-25%
SDM stability + 0.3% SDM
DDM stability + 0.1% DDM
Frequency tolerance 0.0
Total harmonic dist. (90/150 Hz) 1% maximum
Phase locking (90 Hz to 150 Hz) 5° maximum ref 150 Hz
SBO phase adjustment range + 180°
Identity Keyer
Modulation frequency 1020 Hz + 10 Hz
Modulation depth 5-15% adjustable
Distortion 6% Maximum
Speed of identification 7 Words/Min. approx.
Monitoring
Alarm Functions Range (*)
RF power reduction 1-5 dB
Change of nominal CL + 4-25 uA
Change of nominal DS from nominal value + 10-50 uA
Change of nominal CLR (2-freq only) + 10-60 uA
Change of nominal NF + 4-25 uA
Change of nominal SDM + 2-6% SDM
Difference frequency (2-freq. only) + 2-5 kHz from nominal
Total period of radiation out of tolerance 1-10 sec.
Additional NF time delay 0-20 sec.
Line break, ILS - Remote Control (disable
optional)
Identification lost or continuous (optional)
Monitor input levels:
Adjustment range, nominal level -5 to –34 dBm
AGC range for less than 1% change 5 dB
in SDM

23136-I1/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
Monitor stability at nominal levels:

RF power values + 0,2 dB
DDM values + 1 uA
SDM values + 0,5% SDM
Change of nominal CLR 40-75% of Alarm limit
Warning Functions:
RF power reduction 40-75% of Alarm limit
Change of nominal CL 40-75% of Alarm limit
Change of nominal DS 40-75% of Alarm limit
Change of nominal NF 40-75% of Alarm limit
Change of SDM 40-75% of Alarm limit
Difference frequency 40-75% of Alarm limit
Mains failure
Remote Control
Data Transmission Medium 2-wire line, 600 ohm
Data modulation serial, FSK
Transmitter level -10dBm + 2 dB
Receiver dynamic range -10dBm to -34dBm
* asymmetrical limits are possible.
1.5.2 Environmental Characteristics
Operating temperature -10 to +55 °C

Storage temperature -30 to +60 °C
1.5.3 EMC, RF and Safety Characteristics
Technical Compliance R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC

Article 3.1a Safety: EN 60065
EN 50392
Article 3.1b EMC: EN 301 489-1
EN 61000-6-2
EN 61000-6-3
Article 3.2 Radio: Reg TP SSB FL 005
Reg TP SSB FL 012
1.5.4 Mechanical Characteristics
Dimensions: (H x W x D)
ILS Rack: 1020x600x500 mm
Remote control: 129x71x170 mm
Slave panels: 129x41x170 mm
Weight: 90 kg –105 kg depending on model
The ILS rack is wall mounted. The remote control and slave panels fit a standard 3U (132mm)
high 19" subrack.

23136-I1/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
1.5.5 Power Supply
External supply:
Input voltage: 230V +15%/-20%,45-65 Hz or120V +15%/-20%, 45-65
Hz
Output voltage: 27,6V
Output current: 25A max
ILS cabinet
Input voltage 22-28V DC
Current consumption: 8A – 22A depending on configuration
Stand-by Battery 24V DC nominal, 85 Ah-140Ah valve regulated lead-
acid battery recommended
Cold standby equipment uses a single battery
Hot Standby equipment uses dual batteries
1.6 Physical Organization
1.6.1 Module and Assembly Location
Refer to Section 6 for module location drawings
1.6.2 Service Kit Assembly
The Service Kit Assembly SKA 1229B includes two different extension boards for mainte-
nance operations:
EB 1349A Extension Board - for use with the Power Supply PS 1227, Monitor
MO 1212A, RMS Assembly RMA 1215A, Transmitter Control Assem-
bly TCA 1218A/B and Low Frequency Generator LF 1576A plug-in
boards.
EB 1245A Extension Board with coax cables - for use with Monitor Frontend MF
1211A and Oscillator OS 1221A plug-in boards.
In addition, the following items are included:

• Static-dissipative work mat and wrist strap to ensure ESD-protected environment when
performing maintenance operations on the equipment
• Torque wrench, screw drivers etc.
1.6.3 Power Supply
Two External Power Supplies, operating at 230V/120V mains input and providing 27V at 25A,
are normally supplied with the equipment. In special cases, a single external power supply is
supplied.

23136-I1/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
1.7 System Description
This chapter gives a functional overview of the NORMARC 70xxB ILS systems.
1.7.1 Overview
The complete ILS electronic system is housed in a compact, wall mounted cabinet. The cabi-
net and the electronics, except for RF units, are common to the LLZ and GP systems.
Monitor
input Monitor
signals Transmitter
Remote
Control NAV
signals
External
out
sensors Changeover
RMS TX control
Relays
Comm.
ports
Data and
diagnostics
Monitor
input Transmitter
signals Monitor
HBK573-2
Figure 1-3 ILS Block Diagram
The ILS cabinets can be configured for Cat I, Cat II, or Cat III requirements with no basic
changes.
Eight models are available:
NORMARC 7011B Single frequency LLZ
NORMARC 7012B Single frequency LLZ with hot standby monitoring (Cat III)
NORMARC 7013B Two frequency LLZ
NORMARC 7014B Two frequency LLZ with hot standby monitoring (Cat III)
NORMARC 7031B Single frequency GP
NORMARC 7032B Single frequency GP with hot standby monitoring (Cat III)
NORMARC 7033B Two frequency GP
NORMARC 7034B Two frequency GP with hot standby monitoring (Cat III)
The system is based on modern technology with extensive Remote Monitoring and Mainte-
nance capabilities, and very high reliability and integrity. To meet this objective, the monitor
comparator and station control are based on digital hardware, while the RMS interface is
microprocessor based.

23136-I1/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
1.7.2 Physical Description
The cabinet contains two sections:

• The electronics card cage
• The transmitter / PA section including change-over relays
The electronics card cage contains the RF oscillators, the LF signal generators, the monitors,
the station control, the RMS processor, and the voltage regulators.
The transmitter / PA section contains the PA blocks including couplers etc. for each output
with the change-over relays and RF outputs mounted on top.
The cabinet is divided in two parts, with the rear part fixed to a wall, and the front part hinged
to give access to interior of the cabinet.
All external connections are made to the rear part of the cabinet.
1.7.3 Monitors
The ILS has duplicated monitors with inputs for Course Line (CL), Displacement Sensitivity
(DS), Near Field (NF), and Clearance (CLR) (Dual Freq. only). The signals are detected by
the input stage, and then digitized. In the next block they are filtered by a Fast Fourier Trans-
form performed by a signal processor. The results for each parameter is then compared with
stored limits in a digital hardware comparator.
Each of the two monitors consists of two modules. For Cat III use, Hot Standby monitoring can
be added by using one additional monitor and associated RF couplers and combiners.
The design of the monitors ensures a very high integrity due to the use of digital hardware for
the alarm comparators and a very simple Fast Fourier filtering with a signal processor. In addi-
tion, the monitor is checked by automatic self-tests.
The alarm limits are stored locally in EEPROM, and can be updated from the RMS processor,
with a separate hardware write protection to ensure that the integrity is not affected by the
RMS system.
1.7.4 Transmitters
The transmitters are duplicated, either single frequency or dual frequency. Each transmitter
consists of a RF oscillator, a LF generator, and one or two PA blocks (single or dual fre-
quency).
The RF oscillator uses a synthesizer for easy frequency changes and simple logistics. The
oscillator has two outputs for use in dual frequency systems.
The LF generator contains the circuits to generate CSB and SBO (90Hz and 150Hz) and key-
ing (1020Hz) modulating signals. It also contains the ident keyer / sequencer and interface for
DME master or slave keying. A digital signal processor generates all signals ensuring very
stable phase and amplitude relations between the modulation signals.

23136-I1/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
All modulation parameters, such as Modulation Balance, Modulation Sum, RF level, SBO
attenuation, SBO phase, Ident code and Ident modulation are controlled by this module. The
values are stored locally in EEPROM and can be updated from the RMS processor with hard-
ware write protection.
The same LF generator is used for single and dual frequency systems.
1.7.5 Transmitter Control
The transmitter control module controls the system dependent on alarms from the monitors
and inputs from the local control, the remote control and, optionally, the RMS. It also gener-
ates status information to the same modules. The local control and status indicators are a part
of the transmitter control module.
All functions in the transmitter control are based on digital hardware to ensure the highest
integrity.
1.7.6 Remote Control
The remote control is used in the tower or in the technical control room. It has indicators for
operating status as well as detailed warnings and an aural alarm device with reset. It can con-
trol equipment on/off and change-over, and has an Access Grant-switch to allow remote con-
trol from the RMS.
The Remote Control is connected to the ILS by one telephone pair cable.
1.7.7 Remote Monitoring System (RMS)
The RMS module contains the system microprocessor. It handles storage and read-out of
monitor parameters, measurements for maintenance and fault finding, and performs fault
analysis to isolate faults to line replaceable modules. It is also used to set monitor limits and
transmitter adjustments.
The RMS handles communication to local and remote RMM computers, and in addition it han-
dles a small display and keyboard for parameter setting and read-out.
1.7.8 Remote Slave Panel
The slave panel is connected to the remote control by a multipair wire. It is intended for use in
the control tower. It has indicators for normal / warning / alarm and has an aural alarm device.
in addition it can turn the equipment on and off, and has an aural alarm reset.
Optionally a slave panel with remote control functionality can be delivered.
1.7.9 Remote Maintenance Monitoring (RMM)
The NORMARC 7000B series has a built-in Remote Maintenance Monitoring system. This
system consists of the RMS, remote PC terminals with the RMM program installed, and the
local keyboard/display. Figure 1-4 illustrates the RMM/RMS systems.

23136-I1/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
RMM RMM RMM

program program program
Modem Modem
Modem Modem
Local Remote 1 Remote 2
Local
RMS
parameter
data bus
storages
RMS
hardware
Local
RMS Maintenance
measuring
core data bus
points
RMS system program
Local
Keyboard/
Display
NORMARC 70xx
RMM system HBK 598-2
Figure 1-4 The NORMARC 7000B series RMM/RMS systems
The centre of the RMS is a CPU with the RMS core program. The RMS collects measure-
ments and diagnostic data, and makes them available to the user. The collected information
allows easy and cost effective maintenance, fault finding and routine reporting. In addition,
system settings are distributed and parameter readings are collected via the RMS/CPU.

23136-I1/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
External personal computers are used for a user-friendly interface to the RMM system. The
equipment has three serial output ports, typically used to connect a local PC, a PC in the air-
port technical equipment room, and a modem for connection to a central maintenance facility.
The local keyboard/display allow readings and control through an LCD display and a seven-
button keypad. This gives access to the RMM functionality without the need for a PC.
1.7.9.1 RMM Access
Access to the RMM system is controlled by multiple hardware and software access controls.
One password is required for each access level, i.e. one password for level 1, two for level 2
and three for level 3. Optional hardware controls may inhibit writing in the upper access levels.
The operations that are permitted to a logged on user depend on the logon access level.
The NORMARC 7000B ILS defines four access levels:
Access Number Allowed operations

level of pass-
words
Level 1 1 Read-out of all measurements and all configuration data, except
user passwords.
Level 2 2 Level 1 operations + turning transmitters and LF signals on/off.
Level 3 3 Level 1 and 2 operations + setting all configuration data, except
user passwords.
MASTER 3 Level 1, 2 and 3 operations + setting/viewing users and pass-
words, setting the ILS real time clock.
Note that to logon at access level 2 or higher, more than one password must be entered. The
passwords must be separated with a single space.
The username and password(s) are case-insensitive.
To logon as MASTER, which is a special built-in administrative user, the user name "master"
and all three master passwords must be entered (logon at access levels 1 or 2 with the master
user is therefore not possible). The factory default master passwords are: MASTER1
MASTER2 MASTER3
To logon at other access levels a user account must be first be set up by the master user.
If the master user passwords have been lost, the Customer Service department can help with
resetting the master passwords.
Note that to logon at access level 2 or higher, straps on the TCA board must be set to enable
this. Refer to 9.3.3 for more information about this.

23136-I1/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
1.7.9.1.1 Local Keyboard/Display Functions
Through a menu-based interface all main commands, adjustments and monitor limits are
accessible from the front panel keypad and LCD display. In addition a quick-read function
gives read-out of all main monitor parameters at a glance.
1.7.9.2 Diagnostic functions
The system contains internal measuring points and diagnostic functions to isolate faults to
failed modules. The values measured are referred to as maintenance parameters. Please
refer to Appendix A.

23136-I1/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
2. Section 2 Technical Description
2.1 Introduction
The NORMARC 7000B-series Instrument Landing System is a fourth generation system fea-
turing extensive remote maintenance and monitoring features and systematic use of modern
electronic components and processors.
Careful analysis has guided the partitioning of the system into analog hardware, digital hard-
ware and software to meet the reliability and integrity objectives as well as easy maintenance
and low cost of ownership.
In the monitor, comparison between monitor measurements and stored monitor limits is per-
formed by digital hardware. Thus safety critical software is avoided in those functions. The fil-
tering functions are performed by a dedicated signal processor running a FFT algorithm, with
the signals sampled after base-band detection.
The transmitter/modulator uses a synthesizer as a RF source. In two-frequency systems a

common reference crystal is used, avoiding drift in difference frequency. The LF and ident sig-
nals and ident keying are generated and controlled by digital circuits.
Local and remote control, and change-over and shut-down functions are performed by digital
hardware.
Software is used for the remote maintenance and monitoring functions, including alarm and
parameter storage, diagnostic functions, transmitter adjustments and change of monitor limits.
Appropriate hardware protection is used to avoid that the software becomes safety critical.
Technology
Most of the modules in the NORMARC 7000-series ILS are based on surface mount compo-
nents on multi-layer boards. This reduces the number of modules, and gives very good EMC/
EMI performance. Most of the digital hardware is contained in field programmable gate arrays
(FPGA), giving very high reliability. The processors used are well proven Texas, Analog
Devices and Intel types. In the RF stages, modern RF power FET transistors are used.

23136-I2/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
Monitor 1 Transmitter 1
Monitor Monitor Monitor LF oscillator

input Frontend MO1212 LF1576
Transmitter
signals MF1211/MF1219
LPA/GPA
RF oscillator
OS1221
Remote
Control
NAV
External signals
Connection
sensors RMS TX control Changeover out
Interface
Comm. CI1210 RMA1215 TCA1218 Section
ports
Data and
diagnostics RF oscillator
OS1221
Monitor Transmitter
Monitor Monitor
Frontend LPA/GPA
input MO1212 LF oscillator
signals MF1211/MF1219
LF1576
Monitor 2 Transmitter 2
HBK 1275-1
Figure 2-1 ILS Block Diagram
Each block is described separately in section 8.
2.2 Monitors
The monitor section's main task is to generate alarms if a transmitter fails. The alarm signals
are interpreted by the station control section which decides whether to change transmitter or
to shut the ILS signals down. Warning information is treated by the RMS.
The input signals to the monitor are RF signals, CL, DS, NF, CLR(2 freq. only), from the
antenna system. In addition the DC loop detects failures in the antenna and an optional exter-
nal frontend may monitor alarm generating parameters from additional equipment (i.e. a far
field monitor). The outputs are alarm status to the transmitter control section, parameter val-
ues to the RMS and DC loop reference voltages to the antenna system.
The monitor chain consists of the Monitor Frontend module, MF 1211A in LLZ and MF 1219A
in GP, and the Monitor module MO 1212A. This chain is duplicated to increase reliability. In
hot standby configurations an additional chain monitors the standby transmitter. See the Fig-
ure 2-2 below.
The Monitor Frontend module is mainly an AM receiver which detects the baseband signals
and generates DC voltages proportional to the RF level. In addition a digital pulse train is gen-
erated, to tell the difference in frequency (DF) between the COU and CLR transmitters in two
frequency configurations.
The Monitor module digitizes the analog signals, filters all data by FFT and mean value calcu-
lations, and passes the parameters to the comparator. The comparator generates alarm sig-
nals if the parameters are outside the pre-programmed limits.

23136-I2/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
MONITOR FRONTEND 1 MONITOR 1

AM receiver DS_RF_LEVEL
DS_RF
DS_BASEBAND
Comp.
FIFO Alarm bus SC
AM receiver CL_RF_LEVEL A/D Digital
CL_RF MUX Filters
NAV CL_BASEBAND Alarm bus TRM
FIFO
Mon.1 Mixer Limit
DF Storage
RMS bus
AM receiver CLR_RF_LEVEL
CLR_RF DC loop
CLR_BASEBAND
AM receiver NF_RF_LEVEL
NF_RF
NF_BASEBAND
External Frontend 1
NAV Mon.2
MONITOR FRONTEND 2
External Frontend 2 MONITOR 2
NAV Mon.St.by
STANDBY MONITOR FRONTEND
STANDBY MONITOR
DC loop
HBK556-3
Figure 2-2 Monitor section Block Diagram
2.3 Transmitters
The transmitter section generates the ILS signal with the required RF power levels and modu-
lations levels. The section comprises two identical transmitters, TX 1 and TX 2, where one is
connected to the antenna, while the other is connected to dummy loads, acting as a back-up.
The reference signals in the transmitter section are RF signals from the oscillator OS 1221,
and LF modulation signals (90Hz and 150Hz) from the low frequency generator LF 1576. The
LF 1576 also generates the keyed 1020Hz signal for the LLZ Ident. System DC voltages
comes from the Power Supply board PS 1227.
In each transmitter, the RF oscillator has separate outputs for Course and Clearance. These
two channels are offset by 10 kHz for LLZ and 15 kHz for GP. The LF Generator also has
independent outputs for Course and Clearance.
The LPA 1580 Localizer Power Amplifier Assembly and the GPA 1581 Glidepath Course
Power Amplifier Assembly each contains two feedback controlled output amplifiers, one for
the CSB signal and one for the SBO signal. GPA 1582 contains one feedback controlled out-
put amplifier for GP clearance.
Each amplifier is controlled by a "Cartesian Loop" feedback. This employs separate I and Q
(in-phase and quadrature-phase) modulators, demodulators and integrator stages. The
demodulators are fed from a directional coupler in the amplifier output, and the I, Q feedback
loops keeps precise control of output amplitude and phase. The CSB to SBO RF phase is pre-
cisely controlled from 0-360º by the ratio between the SBO I and SBO Q modulating signals,
and the levels of the combined modulation signals accurately controls RF power, modulation
levels and CSB to SBO power ratio.

23136-I2/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
The Change Over section has relays to connect the CSB and SBO outputs from one transmit-
ter to the antenna while the other is connected to dummy loads. The relays are controlled by a
Coax-control signal.
The block diagrams are shown on the following pages.

I(CSB)
INTEGRATOR I,Q POWER

MODULATOR AMPLIFIER
Q(CSB)
50 OHM FOUR-PORT
CARRIER
SPLITTER COAXIAL CSB
RELAY
CSB
TEST
LF CSB from 2nd

GENERATOR I,Q DE- Transmitter
(LF1576A) MODULATOR
SBO ON/OFF
I(SBO)
I,Q RF SWITCH POWER
INTEGRATOR MODULATOR BUFFER
Q(SBO) AMPLIFIER
50 OHM
CARRIER FOUR-PORT
SPLITTER COAXIAL SBO
RELAY
SBO
TEST
SBO from 2nd

I,Q DE- Transmitter
MODULATOR
Course freq. carrier CARRIER

SPLITTER
CARRIER
SYNTH
(OS1221)
Clearance freq. carrier
To clearence transmitter
LOCALIZER, GLIDEPATH
HBK 1276-1 COURSE TRANSMITTER
Figure 2-3 System Block Diagram of a Localizer/Glide Path course Transmitter

23136-I2/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
I(CSB)
INTEGRATOR I,Q POWER

MODULATOR AMPLIFIER
Q(CSB)
50 OHM FOUR-PORT
CARRIER
SPLITTER COAXIAL CSB
RELAY
CSB
TEST
LF CSB from 2nd

GENERATOR I,Q DE- Transmitter
(LF1576A) MODULATOR
SBO ON/OFF
I(SBO)
I,Q RF SWITCH POWER
INTEGRATOR MODULATOR BUFFER
Q(SBO) AMPLIFIER
50 OHM
CARRIER FOUR-PORT
SPLITTER COAXIAL SBO
RELAY
SBO
TEST
SBO from 2nd

I,Q DE- Transmitter
MODULATOR
Course freq. carrier

To course transmitter
CARRIER
SYNTH
(OS1221)
Clearance freq. carrier CARRIER
SPLITTER
LOCALIZER
HBK 1277-1 CLEARENCE TRANSMITTER
Figure 2-4 System Block Diagram - Localizer Clearance Transmitter
2.4 Transmitter Control
The transmitter control section’s main purpose is to control the transmitters on/off state. This
is done based on alarm inputs from the monitors, inputs from remote control, inputs from local
keyboard (front panel for station control) and inputs from the RMM system.
The station control receives alarm information from the monitors. Based on the alarm status

23136-I2/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
and the current mode of operation, the station control decides if a changeover/shutdown
should occur. The station control unit also receives user/state inputs from remote control
(example: Interlock) and the RMM system (example: Warning lamp outputs). Configuration
selections on the TC 1216A board also affects the operation of the station control.
TC1216A Transmitter Control
STATION CONTROL
ALARM
DETECTION
AND ALARM
TX control bus
VOTING
STANDBY TX CONTROL
ALARM
REMOTE
Station control CONTROL
alarm bus INTERFACE
M1
M2 RC bus
CONTROL
STBM CONFIG AND
UART
RC i/f bus
RMS bus
LC1217A/B
LOCAL bus
Local Controls
Terminator
alarm bus with/without
M1 hot standby LEDs
TERMINATOR
M2
Terminator alarm
TERMINATOR
ALARM SHUTDOWN
DETECTION ALARM
UNIT
AND
VOTING
HBK543-3
Figure 2-5 TCA 1218A/B Block Diagram
The transmitter control assembly, TCA 1218A/B consists of the transmitter control (TC) mod-
ule TC 1216A and the local control (LC) front panel LC 1217A/B (the B-version is a front panel
designed for hot standby configuration). See Figure 2-5.
The main functions of the TCA 1218A/B are performed by the station control (SC) part of the
transmitter control (TC). The SC takes care of the normal operating tasks like turning transmit-
ters on/off based on various inputs that may affect the transmitter status. The SC also has a
RMS interface enabling the RMM system to read the status of the SC and to illuminate warn-
ing lamps etc.

23136-I2/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
The terminator (TRM) part of the TC takes over and shuts the ILS down if the SC is not able to
operate as expected. The TRM shuts down the power to the transmitters approximately 1 sec-
ond after an alarm situation or interlock state has occurred.
The remote control interface processes serial data from/to the remote control. This unit also
detects and reports faults in data transmission with remote control. The data from the remote
control are sent to both SC and TRM.
The Transmitter control unit displays the transmitter status of the ILS. It also provides a user
interface, enabling the user to perform basic operations on the ILS.
2.5 Remote Control
The remote control’s main purpose is to provide an interface to the ILS from the technical
equipment room and the tower at the airport.
The remote control provides the ILS with user inputs and selections. The unit also displays the
status of the ILS using LEDs.
The remote control system consists of an UART/line interface, RC 1241, a front panel, RF
1242A/B (B is a front panel for hot standby configuration) and a slave panel.
The remote control assembly, RCA 1240C/D, consists of the remote control (RC) module RC
1241B and the remote control front panel (RF) RF 1242A/B (the B-version is a front panel
designed for hot standby configuration). See Figure 2-6.
RC 1241
Telephone
line LINE CONTROL
Slave bus
INTERFACE AND Slave panel(s)
UART
RF 1242
Remote Control front panel

with/without hot standby
lamp indications
HBK544-3
Figure 2-6 RCA 1240C/D Block Diagram
The line interface in RC 1241B converts signals between standard serial data format and tele-
phone line signals both ways using a FSK modem (compatible with CCITT V.21).
The UART /control in RC 1241B performs serial/parallel conversion. Pushbutton, switch and
operational mode (interlock) status is sent from remote control to ILS. Transmitter status and
other information is received from the ILS.

23136-I2/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
The front panel RF 1242A/B contains the pushbuttons, switches and LEDs for the user.
The slave panel is an optional control panel with a limited set of functions/LEDs, designed for
use in the airport tower.
An alternative Remote Control Assembly RCA 1240E/F can be supplied in the same loca-
tions. This is basically identical to RCA 1240C/D and is described in 8.2.1.2
An optional MP 1574A Meter Panel can be installed with the Remote Control assembly con-
taining two elapsed time counters counting the time that the LLZ and GP equipment has been
transmitting (on air/Normal).
2.6 Remote Monitoring System (RMS)
2.6.1 General Description
The Remote Monitoring System consists of a CPU-board located inside the main cabinet, with
several means of collecting data from both inside and outside the equipment. The RMS also
constitutes the operator interface, offering up to three RS 232 interfaces, and the Local Key-
board/Display. The main tasks are:
• Collection of executive monitor parameters and maintenance parameters
• Generation of system warnings
• Maintaining historical storages of all data
• ‘Snap-shot’ of all monitor and maintenance data immediately before alarm occurrence
• Setting of alarm limits and tx parameters
• Fault isolation
• Controlling the Local Keyboard/Display
The RMS SW comprises a resident part located in the ILS. It communicates with the RMM PC
program via dedicated lines or a MODEM. The PC SW is the main operator interface with the
ILS.
Data collection is facilitated in 3 different ways: A parallel high speed data bus offering both
read and write operations, a IIC-standard serial bus, and a set of 24 different ADC channels.

23136-I2/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
MAIN CABINET
RS232 RS232 CI 1210A RMA 1215A

MODEM MODEM
LCD / Keyboard
Dial-up Remote 2
Serial Interface
or
leased-line
CPU
RS232 RS232
MODEM MODEM
Remote 1
Local RS232 RS232

Interface Circuitry
PC Local
data bus
serial bus
RMS
channels
Analog
IIC
Digital Analog Monitor
and Inputs Data
Analog and
Inputs System
Settings
HBK569-2
Figure 2-7 The RMM configuration
2.6.2 PC and Modem
The main operator interface is locally or remotely connected personal computers, running
dedicated SW and communicating with the main cabinet resident SW via a dedicated proto-
col. The system facilitates three channels for PC connections, two of which can be used for
remote PC via modems and leased-line or dial-up telephone lines. All three PC’s can be
logged on simultaneously, but only one of them can have write access at a given point in time.
2.6.3 RMS Data bus
The main operation of the RMS parallel data bus is continuously to collect data from the Mon-
itor MO 1212. Additional functions are setting of monitor alarm limits and delays on the MO
1212, setting of TX-parameters on LF-generator LF 1576, and reading of system status from
the TX Control Assembly TCA 1218. Writing of warning status to the TCA 1218 is also done
via the RMS databus.
M O 1 2 1 2 A M O 1 2 1 2 A M O 1 2 1 2 A L F 1 5 7 6 A L F 1 5 7 6 A
M O N 1 M O N 2 S T B M O N T X 1 T X 2 T C A 1 2 1 8 A /B
R M S D a ta b u s
R M A 1 2 1 5 A
H B K 1 2 7 9 -1
Figure 2-8 The RMS Databus

23136-I2/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
2.6.4 Maintenance Data Collection
In order to facilitate fault isolation and presentation, several analog and digital measuring
points are distributed throughout the system. These points are primarily accessed via the IIC
serial bus. In addition, 24 ADC-channels are read directly into the RMA 1215 board.
L P A 1 5 8 0 / L P A 1 5 8 0 / L P A 1 5 8 0 / L P A 1 5 8 0 /
L F 1 5 7 6 A L F 1 5 7 6 A O S 1 2 2 1 A /B O S 1 2 2 1 A /B G P A 1 5 8 1 A G P A 1 5 8 2 A G P A 1 5 8 1 A G P A 1 5 8 2 A
T X 1 T X 2 T X 1 T X 2 T X 1 C O U T X 1 C L R T X 2 C O U T X 2 C L R
IIC s e r ia l b u s
R M S b u s
R M A 1 2 1 5 A C I 1 2 1 0 A
A D C c h a n n e ls
M F 1 2 1 1 A M F 1 2 1 1 A M F 1 2 1 1 A M O 1 2 1 2 A M O 1 2 1 2 A M O 1 2 1 2 A P S 1 2 2 7 B # 1 P S 1 2 2 7 B # 2
/M F 1 2 1 9 A /M F 1 2 1 9 A /M F 1 2 1 9 A M O N 1 M O N 2 S T B M O N
M O N 1 M O N 2 S T B M O N
H B K 1 2 8 0 -1
Figure 2-9 The IIC Serial Bus and ADC Channels
The IIC serial bus collects digital status information from MF 1211/19, MO 1212, LF 1576, OS
1221 and the CI 1210 connection interface card. 6 of these are user configurable inputs/out-
puts. The LF 1576 boards control one addional IIC bus each. These serial buses are used for
data collection and control of TX1 and TX2.
The ADC-channels are mainly used to measure power amplifier current consumptions, as well
as system voltages. These measurements are obtained from the Power Supply boards PS
1227. In addition system current consumption, as well as several user configurable inputs, are
measured on the CI 1210 board.
2.6.5 Storage Functions
The ILS has battery backed RAM in the RMS subsystem (RMA 1215) board that is used to
store historical data. Four different types of historical data is stored:
Medium time periodic storage: One sample of all monitor and maintenance parameters stored
periodically at user specified intervals (see Medium time periodic settings). The storage con-
tains the last 96 samples.
Long time periodic storage: For every day through a 180 days period, the mean value and
standard deviation of all monitor and analogue maintenance parameters are stored.
Warning storage: One sample of all monitor and maintenance parameters at the instant when
a warning LED is activated. The 25 last warnings are stored.
Alarm storage: Samples of all monitor and maintenance parameters for a period starting from
30s before an alarm occurred and ending with the actual alarm sample. The last seven alarms
are stored in the ILS. Two alarms will be stored in the ILS for each alarm condition that results
in a transmitter changeover that is followed by a shutdown.

23136-I2/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
Event storage: Stores the last 300 major operational events, including user logins and logouts,
TX on/off operations, alarms and warnings, monitor parameter changes and changes in sys-
tem status.
2.6.6 RMS Events
The following table lists the events generated by the RMS software.
Event text Event user Description

Access grant [OFF|ON] Remote The access grant switch was operated.
Auto ChgOver to [TX1|TX2] System A transmitter changeover was performed due to
alarms on monitor parameters. Note: only generated
when the equipment is in service and auto mode.
Auto ShtDown frm [TX1|TX2] System A transmitter shutdown was performed due to
alarms on monitor parameters. Note: only generated
when the equipment is in service and auto mode.
Batt. warning [off] System The system has started or stopped operating from
batteries. The Warning historical storage can be
downloaded to see which battery charger caused
the event.
This event is only generated when the equipment is
remote and auto mode.
ChangeOver to [TX1|TX2] Remote A transmitter changeover was performed from the
remote control.
ChangeOver to [TX1|TX2] System A transmitter changeover was performed due to
monitor alarms. The event also contains which mon-
itor parameters that were causing the changeover. A
log of measurements taken up to 30 seconds before
the event can be downloaded from the ILS (alarm
storage).
This event will only be generated when the service
LED is inactive.
Data recovery failed System The RMS was unable to interpret the historical data
stored in the battery backed RAM on RM1213 due to
a checksum error.
Disagr. warning [off] System Monitor 1 and 2 disagrees about which parameters
are in warning state. The Warning historical storage
can be downloaded to see which parameter was
causing the event.
Ident. warning [off] System A monitor 1 and 2 ident parameter has entered or
left warning state. The Warning historical storage
can be downloaded to see which parameter was
causing the event.
Interlock Shutdown System The transmitters were turned off due to an interlock
off command from the remote control unit.

23136-I2/Rev.4/02-Jul-07

Interlock TurnOn System The transmitters were turned on due to an interlock
on command from the remote control unit. Note that
this event occurs 20 seconds after the interlock on
command was received.
Interlocked [OFF|ON] Remote The interlock input on the remote control unit
changed state.
Intgrt OK,turned OFF System The transmitters were turned off after a successful
integrity check.
Intgrt test FAILED System This event reports that at least one integrity test per-
formed by the RMS has failed. It is always gener-
ated after one or more “IntTst: ...” event. See below.
Intgrt test ok System If none of the integrity tests fails, this event is gener-
ated.
Intgrt tst cancelled System The integrity tests were in progress but could not be
executed. This can occur if the user turns the equip-
ment on again after less than 30 seconds.
IntTst: 27V not off System The RMS verifies that the 27V power supply input on
each power amplifier assembly is below 2 volt.
IntTst: No RF alarm System The RMS verifies that monitor 1 and 2 reports alarm
status on the CL RF and the CLR RF monitor
parameters 30 seconds after the turn-off command.
IntTst: OSC not off System The RMS verifies that the COU and CLR output
level maintenance measurements on the OS boards
are below the warning limit.
IntTst: TXFB not 0 System The TXFB[3:0] are four internal signals on the TC
board. The signals are the feedback of signals used
for turning the RF oscillators on and off. The RMS
verifies that these signals are zero.
IntTst: Mon dly fail System The RMS verifies that the transmitter control has
detected alarm from the monitors after a configura-
ble time after the turn-off command.
Invalid RTC time System An invalid date or time was read from the RTC clock
on RM1213 or an IIC comm. error occurred while
reading.
Login failed System Denotes a failure to log on to the RMS.
[Remote1|Remote2]
Login lev. [1|2|3|M] (logged on The user has logged on.
[Local|Remote1|Remote2] user)
Logout (logged on The user has logged out normally.
[Local|Remote1|Remote2] user)
Lost RC Shutdown System The transmitters were turned off because no data
was received from the remote control unit.
Maint. warning [off] System A maintenance parameter has entered or left warn-
ing state. The Warning historical storage can be
downloaded to see which parameter was causing
the event.
No connect logout (logged on The user has been logged out because the RMS did
user) not receive keep-alive messages.

23136-I2/Rev.4/02-Jul-07

Param. warning [off] System A monitor 1 and 2 parameter has entered or left
warning state. The Warning historical storage can be
the event.
Powered off System Denotes the time when RMS was last stopped. Gen-
erated when the RMS starts up by using the last
timestamp written by the RMS to the battery backed
RAM on RM1213.
Powered on System Generated when the RMS starts up. This event may
be generated if the watchdog unit or a user resets
the RMS without removing power.
RC connection [lost|OK] Remote Denotes a change in the reception of data from the
remote control unit.
RMS upgr. to v[x.x] System The RMS has been upgraded to a new version.
Service [ON|OFF] System Service mode state was changed due to a switch
change.
ShutDown from [TX1|TX2] System A shutdown of the transmitter that was on-air was
performed due to monitor alarms. The event also
contains which monitor parameters that were caus-
ing the changeover. A log of measurements taken
up to 30 seconds before the event can be down-
loaded from the ILS (alarm storage).
This event will only be generated when the service
LED is inactive.
Standby alarm System An alarm occurred on the standby transmitter.
Stb para warning [off] System A standby monitor parameter has entered or left
warning state. The Warning historical storage can be
the event.
STO xxxxx (logged on Denotes that the parameter that follows ìSTOì has
user) been updated by the logged on user.
Switch [AUTO|MANUAL] Local The auto/manual switch was operated.
Switch [LOCAL|REMOTE] Local The local/remote switch was operated.
Switch forced logout (logged on A switch change caused the user to be logged out.
user)
Switch INT OVR [OFF|ON] Local The interlock override switch was operated.
Switch WRT PROT [OFF|ON] Local The write protect switch was operated.
System Intgrt FAIL! System The integrity check that is performed when the
transmitters are turned off when the ILS is in auto
mode failed. Failure means that the TC1216 did not
receive the expected measurements from the moni-
tors.
Term. ShutDown System The Terminator block on TC1216 turned the trans-
mitters off.

23136-I2/Rev.4/02-Jul-07

Term.Intlck ShutDown System The Terminator block on TC1216 turned the trans-
mitters off after an interlock off command was
received from the remote control unit.
Turned [OFF|ON] Remote The transmitters were turned off or on from the
Warn: Newer EEPROM System A higher EEPROM version number than the version
number used by the RMS was read from the EEP-
ROM on RM1213. This normally means that a
newer RMS than the current one has previously
been inserted on the current RM1213.
Table 2-1 RMS Events List
2.6.7 RMS Integrity Tests
After each turn-off of the equipment when the equipment is not in manual mode, the RMS soft-
ware on the RMA 1215 performs the following integrity tests. All tests, except test 5, are per-
formed 30 seconds after the turn-off command. Test 5 is performed a configurable time after
the turn-off command (see description below).
Test 1: RF OSCILLATOR OUTPUTS
The RMS verifies that the COU and CLR output level maintenance measurements on the OS
boards are below the warning limit.
Text in event list in case the test fails: “IntTst: OSC not off”
Test 2: LPA/GPA 27V POWER SUPPLY
The RMS verifies that the 27V power supply input on each power amplifier assembly is below
2 volt.
Text in event list in case the test fails: “IntTst: 27V not off”
Test 3: MONITOR RF ALARM STATUS (Text in event list)
The RMS verifies that monitor 1 and 2 reports alarm status on the CL RF and the CLR RF
monitor parameters 30 seconds after the turn-off command.
Text in event list in case the test fails: “IntTst: No RF alarm”
Test 4: TXFB
The TXFB[3:0] are four internal signals on the TC board. The signals are the feedback of sig-
nals used for turning the RF oscillators on and off.
Text in event list in case the test fails: “IntTst: TXFB not 0”)

23136-I2/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
Test 5: MONITOR ALARM DELAY
The RMS verifies that the transmitter control has detected alarm from the monitors after a
configurable time after the turn-off command.
The time is configured in the Monitor settings window, on the “Integrity test” tab:
Text in event list in case the test fails: “IntTst: Mon dly fail”
Additional test result reporting:

• If any of the above tests fails the following event will also be stored in the event list:
“Intgrt test FAILED”
• If none of the tests fails the event “Intgrt test ok” will be stored
• The RMS generates the event “Intgrt tst cancelled” if the integrity test is not executed.
This can occur if the user turns the equipment on again after less than 30 seconds
If the parameter warning LED has been configured to show Integrety Failure (ILS settings –
General Setting – System Options tab – “Signal integrety failure on Param LED”) and an “Int-
grt test FAILED” occur, the only way to reset the LED is to turn the power of the system off and
back on again.

23136-I2/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
2.7 Power Supply
The system uses External Power Supplies, operating at 230V/120V mains input and providing
27V at 25A each.
The cold stand-by models (NORMARC 7011B/13B/31B/33B) uses either one supply or two
supplies connected in parallel. In addition one backup battery set may be connected to ensure
no break operation in case of a mains failure.
MAIN CABINET
Terminator
Alarm PS1227-1 MODULE CONNECTIONS
V27_CSB_COU_1 CSB COU
A
LPA 1580/GPA 1581
V27_SBO_COU_1
A SBO COU
TX1
V27_CSB_CLR_1 CSB CLR
A
V27_SBO_CLR_1 LPA 1580/GPA 1582
A SBO CLR
DC V15P
MF 121xA OS 1221x
DC V MO 1212A CI 1210A
CI 1210A DC V15N
RMA 1215A TCA 1218A
DC
V LF 1576A
Main DC VDD
Battery Warning LPA 1580/GPA 1581/82
Cabinet DC
V
Switch
DC V8P5P
DC
MF 121xA
V OS 1221A
AC LPA 1580/GPA 1581/82
PS1227-2
DC A
DC
+ DC
- V
DC
DC V
DC
A
DC
V
DC
DC V
A
LPA 1580/GPA 1581
V27_SBO_COU_2
A SBO COU
TX2
A
LPA 1580/GPA 1582
V27_SBO_CLR_2
A SBO CLR
HBK 1281-1
Figure 2-10 Power Supply Functional Diagram
The hot-standby models (NORMARC 7012B/14B/32B/34B) uses two supplies, each supply-
ing power to one transmitter and one PS 1227 module. In addition two battery sets, one for
each power supply, may be connected to ensure no break operation in case of a mains failure.

23136-I2/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
MAIN CABINET
Terminator
BW 1566 Alarm PS1227-1 MODULE CONNECTIONS
A
LPA 1580/GPA 1581
Low Battery V27_SBO_COU_1
A SBO COU
logic
TX1
A
V27_SBO_CLR_1 LPA 1580/GPA 1582
AC
A SBO CLR
DC A V15P
DC
MF 121xA OS 1221x
+ DC V MO 1212A CI 1210A
- DC V15N
RMA 1215A TCA 1218A
DC
Main
V LF 1576A
DC VDD LPA 1580/GPA 1581/82
Cabinet DC
A Switch V
DC V8P5P
DC
MF 121xA
V OS 1221A
CI 1210A LPA 1580/GPA 1581/82
PS1227-2
Battery Warning DC
DC
V
DC
DC V
AC DC
DC
DC A V
DC
+ DC V
- V27_CSB_COU_2 CSB COU
A
LPA 1580/GPA 1581
V27_SBO_COU_2
A SBO COU
TX2
A V27_CSB_CLR_2 CSB CLR
A
LPA 1580/GPA 1582
V27_SBO_CLR_2
A SBO CLR
HBK 1282-1
Figure 2-11 Power Supply Functional Diagram
The 27V is regulated down to ±15V, 8.5V and 5V. The transmitter power amplifiers are fed
directly from the 27V supply, while the rest of the system uses the regulated voltages.
Current measurements are done on the power supply, the battery and each power amplifier.
Each regulated voltage is measured in the PS 1227 module. The results are presented to the
user through the RMS system.
When the ILS signals are shut down, the power supply to the power amplifiers are actually
turned off by relays. This is controlled by the terminator alarm signal from the station control
section.
The backup battery is protected against deep discharge with a protection circuit. This circuit
disconnects the battery when the voltage drops below 22V.
A battery warning is given through the RMS system when the primary power supply (supplies)
fails.

23136-I2/Rev.4/02-Jul-07

23136-I2/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
3. Section 3 Operating Instructions
3.1 Main Cabinet
3.1.1 Power on/off
The power ON/OFF switches are located on front of the main cabinet. Adjacent to the
switches are GND sockets for connecting wrist strap to ensure ESD-protected environment
when performing maintenance operations.
HBK548-1
GND SOCKETS POWER ON/OFF
Figure 3-1 Power ON/OFF and GND Sockets Location
NOTE:
The upper switch removes power from PS1 and TX1. The lower switch removes power from PS2
and TX2. To fully remove power turn off the mains power supplies/battery chargers and isolate
the batteries.

23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
3.1.2 Local Control Operation
H o t s ta n d b y m o d e ls o n ly
T X 1 T X 2
C O U R S E
P A R A M S E R V IC E S T A N D
B Y
D IS A G R
A L A R M C L R
B A T T
ID E N T
W A R N IN G T X T O A IR
M A IN T
S T B Y N O R M A L M A IN
O N / C H A N G E T X 1 T X 2
O F F O V E R
L A M P T E S T
L O C A L M A N U A L
IN T E R L O C K W R IT E
R E M O T E A U T O
O V E R R ID E P R O T E C T
H B K 5 5 2 -3
Figure 3-2 LC 1217A/B front panel
3.1.3 Glossary
Changeover The transition from a normal ILS «on» state (Tx to Air = main select
and active main transmitters on air) to a normal ILS «standby on»
state (Tx to Air not equal to main select, and standby transmitters
active on air).
Shutdown The transition from any ILS state to a normal ILS «off» state (Tx to Air
= main select and no active transmitters).
Automatic When the ILS is in automatic mode of operation, any detected

alarm(s) will lead to either CHANGEOVER or SHUTDOWN.
Manual When the ILS is in manual mode of operation, the ILS state will not
change if alarm(s) are detected.

23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
Interlock When an ILS is in active interlock mode (the interlock signal is an input
to the remote control), the ILS will turn off all active transmitters and
not allow them to be turned on before the interlock condition is
removed. This signal overrides local/auto mode of operation, but not
local/manual mode of operation.
3.1.4 Pushbuttons
ON/OFF
STBY NORMAL
Used to:
• Toggle the ILS transmitters on/off ON/
OFF
Valid when:
HBK603-1
• The LOCAL/REMOTE switch must be in LOCAL position,
and
• The interlock signal is not active if the ILS is configured for interlock
CHANGEOVER
Used to: ON/

OFF
CHANGE
OVER
• Toggle the coax relay and transmitters between

TX1/TX2 as the active transmitter(s)
HBK 604-1
Valid when:
• The LOCAL/REMOTE switch is in LOCAL position, and
• The MANUAL/AUTO switch is in AUTO position, if the ILS is “ON”, or
• The MANUAL/AUTO switch is in MANUAL position, if the ILS is “OFF”
MAIN SELECT
Used to: MAIN
• Toggle between TX1/TX2 as the main transmitter TX1 TX2
Valid when:
HBK605-1
• The LOCAL/REMOTE switch is in LOCAL position
COURSE TX1/TX2
TX1 TX2
Used to: COURSE
• Toggle the COURSE TX1/TX2 on/off

CLR
HBK606-1

23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
Valid when:
• LOCAL/REMOTE switch is in LOCAL position, and
• MANUAL/AUTO switch is in MANUAL position, and
• The interlock signal is active if the ILS is configured for interlock
CLeaRance TX1/TX2
Used to:
• Used to toggle the CLEARANCE TX1/TX2 on/off
Valid when:
• CLEARANCE transmitters are present, and
• LOCAL/REMOTE switch is in LOCAL position, and
• MANUAL/AUTO switch is in MANUAL position, and
• The interlock signal is active if the ILS is configured for interlock
3.1.5 Switches/Switchlocks
LOCAL / REMOTE
LOCAL
Used to:
• Select between LOCAL and REMOTE mode of operation. REMOTE
mode of operation will inhibit use of the local push-buttons (as described
REMOTE
above) and the use of the local serial communication port for entering
RMS access level 2 and 3. LOCAL mode of operation will inhibit use of HBK609-1
the remote control pushbuttons (ON/OFF, CHANGEOVER) and the use
of the remote serial communication ports for entering RMS access level 2 and 3. Local
mode will cause a service condition at equipment and alarm at Remote Control
Valid when:
• Always
MANUAL / AUTO
MANUAL
Used to:
• Select between AUTOMATIC and MANUAL mode of operation. Setting
this switch in the manual position will cause a service condition at equip-
AUTO
ment and alarm at Remote Control
HBK610-1
Valid when:
• The LOCAL/REMOTE switch is in LOCAL position

23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
WRITE PROTECT
Used to:
• Prevent changing of alarm limits and other ILS parameter adjust-
ments. Setting this switchlock in vertical/horizontal position will
WRITE
prevent/not prevent entering of access level 3 PROTECT
HBK611-1
Valid when:
• Always
INTERLOCK OVERRIDE
Used to:
• Override the interlock input to allow testing in AUTO mode. Setting
this switchlock in vertical/horizontal position will prevent/not pre-
vent the user from using the local panel pushbuttons (ON/OFF, INTERLOCK
CHANGEOVER and the individual TX on/off keys) OVERRIDE
HBK612-1
Valid when:
• The LOCAL/REMOTE switch is in LOCAL position, and
• The MANUAL/AUTO switch is in MANUAL position
3.1.6 System Status Indications
Service
PARAM SERVICE
Used to: DISAGR

ALARM
BATT
• Indicate that the ILS is currently in SERVICE mode of opera-
IDENT
tion. This will also set the remote control to alarm state WARNING
MAINT
Activated by:
STBY NORMAL
HBK608-1
• EXTERNAL SERVICE line forced low (by LF1576A set in ser-

vice condition), or
• RMS in access level 2 or 3, or
• The LOCAL/REMOTE switch is in LOCAL position, or
• The MANUAL/AUTO switch is in MANUAL position, or
• MANUAL mode entered from RMS, or
• Access grant switch on the Remote Control in grant position
• Interlock override switch in horizontal position
• Mismatch between the WRITE PROTECT switch and configuration strap setting on U6
(strap position 6-15)

23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
ALARM
PARAM SERVICE
Used to: DISAGR

ALARM
BATT
• Indicate that the ILS has detected an alarm condition
IDENT
WARNING
Activated by:
MAINT
STBY NORMAL
• One or more alarms present HBK613-1
WARNING
PARAM SERVICE
Used to: DISAGR

ALARM
• Indicate that the ILS has detected one or more warning condi-
BATT
tions
IDENT
WARNING
MAINT
Activated by: STBY

HBK614-1
NORMAL
• Warning condition(s) detected by RMS
NORMAL
PARAM SERVICE
Used to: DISAGR

ALARM
BATT
• Indicate that no alarm conditions are detected by the ILS
IDENT
WARNING
MAINT
Activated by:
STBY NORMAL
• No alarms present HBK615-1
STB ALARM (Hot Standby only)

SERVICE STAND
BY
Used to: ALARM
• Indicate that the ILS has detected an alarm condition on the

WARNING
standby transmitter. Disabled when the ILS is not configured
for hot standby NORMAL
HBK635-1
Activated by:
• Hot standby configuration and alarm(s) detected on the standby transmitter
STB WARNING (Hot Standby only)

SERVICE STAND
BY
Used to: ALARM
• Indicate that the ILS has detected one or more warning condi-
tions on the standby transmitter. Disabled when the ILS is not
WARNING
configured for hot standby NORMAL
HBK636-1
Activated by:
• Hot standby configuration and one or more warnings detected by RMS for the standby
transmitter

23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
STB NORMAL (Hot Standby only)

SERVICE STAND
BY
Used to: ALARM
• Indicate that no alarm conditions are detected by the ILS on

the standby transmitter. Disabled when the ILS is not config-
WARNING
ured for hot standby NORMAL
HBK637-1
Activated by:
• Hot standby configuration and no alarm(s) detected on the standby transmitter
PARAMeter Warning
Used to:
• Indicate that there are one or more monitor parameter warnings present. The warnings
from the monitor 1/monitor 2 are voted before displayed
Activated by:
• One or more monitor parameters outside the warning limits
Monitor DISAGRee
Used to:
• Indicate that monitor 1 and monitor 2 disagrees on which parameters that are in alarm
state
Activated by:
• Difference in monitor 1/monitor 2 alarm detection
BATTery Warning
Used to:
• Indicate that the ILS is running using the 27V battery
Activated by:
• Loss of mains for charging the 27V battery
IDENT Warning
Used to:
• Indicate that the ident is faulty for LLZ
Activated by:
• Loss of ident Morse coding for LLZ
• Ident continuous for LLZ

23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
MAINTenance Warning
Used to:
• Indicate that one or more of the maintenance parameter warnings detected
Activated by:
• One or more maintenance parameters faulty or outside limits
STandBY transmitter on air
Used to:
• Indicate that coax position directs the standby transmitters to the antenna and the
main transmitters to the dummy load
Activated by:
• Coax position differs from transmitter main select
TX to Air TX1/TX2
Used to: TX TO AIR
• Indicate the position of the coax relay HBK616-2
Activated by:
• Coax relay position
MAIN TX1/TX2
MAIN
Used to:
TX1 TX2
• Indicate which transmitter that is defined as main
Activated by: HBK617-1
• Main select position
COUrse TX1/TX2
TX1 TX2
Used to: COURSE
• Indicate the status of the TX1 and TX2 Course transmitters. If illu- CLR
minated the transmitter is on HBK606-1
Activated by:
• Transmitter «on»
CLeaRance TX1/TX2
Used to:
• Indicate the status of the TX1 and TX2 Clearance transmitters. If illuminated the trans-
mitter is on

23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
Activated by:
• Transmitter «on»
NOTE: The TX1 and TX2 LEDs will remain on for up to 10 seconds with CAT I alarm delays. when the
ILS is turned off in AUTO mode. This is because the TX Control performs a monitor integrity
check. If the check fails the LEDs will stay on for 20-30 seconds, and an “integrity fail” event is
placed in the RMS event list. In MANUAL mode the LEDs are turned Off immediately, and no
integrity check is made.
3.1.7 Local Keyboard/Display Operation
ESC PREV NEXT ENTER
QUICK
- + READ
HBK550-2
Figure 3-3 KD 1214A keyboard/display
3.1.8 The RMS Front Panel
The front panel menu system includes a 20 x 4 character LCD and seven push-buttons. The
buttons are used for navigating in the menus displayed on the LCD and to control/adjust vari-
ous parameters.
A typical top-level LCD screen is shown in Figure 3-4. This is the screen that is displayed
when the ILS is powered on. This screen displays the following information.

23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
NORMARC 7013B-7014B
[LLZ selected]
[REMOTE][AUTO]
[RC OK]
Figure 3-4 Typical top-level LCD screen
Line: Description:
1 NORMARC ILS type description or, optionally, a user specified station identification. The sta-
tion identification can be entered via the RMM software.
2 If the ILS is configured for interlock operation, this line shows the status of the interlock input
on the remote control unit, or “interlock override” if interlock has been overridden. The dis-
played text will be “LLZ/GP deselected” or “LLZ/GP selected depending on whether the inter-
lock input is respectively active or not.
3 Shows the status of the LOCAL/REMOTE switch and the auto/manual state of the ILS. Note
that this state not necessarily is the same as the AUTO/MANUAL switch position (the ILS
may be set in manual mode with this switch or via the RMM software by logging at access
level 2 or higher).
4 The last line shows one or two fields, the Remote Control link status (“RC OK” or “RC err”)
and “Acc. grant” if remote RMMaccess is granted from the remote control unit.
Pressing ESC when the top-level LCD screen is displayed will bring up the main menu screen,
which is described in the next section.
>Read syst para L1

Local settings L2
Syst settings L3
Figure 3-5 The main menu screen
3.1.9 The menu structure
The menu is organized as a top-down tree-structure, where the main branches corresponds to
three access levels:
1. Level 1: Basic readout functions
2. Level 2: Test and control functions
3. Level 3: System configuration and adjustment functions (requires entering a four char-
acter password)
Figure 3-5 shows the layout of the main menu screen.

23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
3.1.10 Operating the different screens.
The menu system consists of five basic screen types; menu-screens, readout-screens, tog-
gle-screens, input/storing-screens, and the quick read screens.
3.1.10.1 The menu screen
The menu screen is controlled by the key-buttons: <PREV> <NEXT> <ENTER> and <ESC>.
The menu options are formatted as a long list where each option holds one character line. If a
menu screen includes more than four options, a small arrow-indicator will be displayed in the
lower-right corner. This informs the user that more than four menu options are available. The
blinking arrow cursor left to the menu-text is controlled by the <NEXT> and <PREV> keys.
The <ENTER> key activates the menu options left to the arrow-cursor.
The <ESC> key brings the user one menu-level upwards or back in the menu-tree-struc-
ture.The menu scrolls down if the user pushes the <NEXT> key when the arrow-cursor is at
the lower line and the arrow indicator is displayed in the lower-right corner. The menu will in
the same way scroll upwards by pushing the <PREV>-key in a corresponding situation.
3.1.10.2 The readout screen
The readout screens display the various monitor and maintenance parameter readings. The
screens are entered by stepping through the menu options. The <ESC> key brings the user
back to the last menu-screen again. The parameter readings are continuously updated.
CL readout M1 M2
DDM 0.1 0.1
Al U +1.5 +1.5
Wa U -1.5 -1.5
Figure 3-6 A typical readout screen: CL DDM
3.1.10.3 The toggle screens
The toggle screens offer the user to choose between two or more options. The options text is
enclosed by two blinking square-brackets. The plus «+» and minus «-» keys step through the
various options. The <ENTER> key activates the chosen toggle-option. The <ESC> keys
leaves the screen without activating any of the options.
TX 1 90 Hz on/off
[90 Hz tone on]
Figure 3-7 A typical toggle screen: TX1 90 Hz on/off
3.1.10.4 Input/Store screen
The user can change the various parameter alarm and warning settings in the input/storing-
screens. A virtual cursor is controlled by the <PREV> and <NEXT> keys. An input field

23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
number will blink if the cursor is moved to the correct position. The blinking limit values can
now be changed by pushing the plus «+» and minus «-» keys. If the input field is digital, the
valid options will be «False» and «True» when the plus «+» and minus «-» keys are pushed.
When all the input numbers in the screen are changed to the preferred new values, the cursor
must be moved to the (UPD)-field in the upper left corner. When the cursor is placed at this
(UPD)-field, the brackets will start blinking. The <ENTER> key will now store the new values
on the screen in the ILS. The <ESC> key leaves the screen unchanged
CL <UPD> M1 M2
DDM 0.1 0.1
Al U +1.5 +1.5
Wa U -1.5 -1.5
Figure 3-8 A typical input/store screen: CL DDM
3.1.10.5 The quick read screens
The quick read screens are access by pushing the <QUICK READ> key. The key toggles
between the original menu tree and the quick read screens. The <QUICK READ> button can
be pushed at all times, not changing the original menu-screens. The quick read screens
include only the basic monitor readings. The <PREV> and <NEXT> keys step through the
quick read screens.
CL %DDM %SDM RFv

M1 0.1 40.0 3.0
M2 0.1 40.0 3.0
Figure 3-9 A typical quick read screen: CL
3.1.11 The access levels.
The level 3 menu options must be entered by typing a 4 character password. The level 2
menu can be entered as an ordinary menu-option.
3.1.11.1 Level 2
To enter the level 2 menu option, the LOCAL/REMOTE front panel switch must be in the
LOCAL position. The user is denied access if the switch is not correctly set.
Local switch on
Front panel in
REMOTE position
Press <ESC>
Figure 3-10 An access denial screen: Switch in REMOTE position

23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
3.1.11.2 Level 3
To enter the level 3 menu option, the LOCAL/REMOTE front panel switch must be in the
LOCAL position. In addition the WRITE PROTECT switch must be in the horizontal position.
The user must key a 4 character password to enter level 3 access. The access-screen is oper-
ated similarly to an input/store-screen. The blinking cursor is moved by the <PREV> and
<NEXT> keys. A blinking input-field is changed by the plus «+» and minus «-» keys.
When the correct password is entered, the cursor must be moved to the <level 3 access>-
field. The brackets will then start blinking. The <ENTER> key will now bring the user to the
level 3 options. The <ESC> key leaves the screen back to the main menu.
LEVEL ACCESS 3
M M
M M
<Level 3 access>
Figure 3-11 Level 3 access screen
3.1.11.3 Leaving the access levels
If the user enters level 3, an extra menu line, reading “Leave level 3”, is added in the main
menu screen. The user can enter this menu option to leave access level 3, but remain at level
2.
To leave access level 2 the LOCAL/REMOTE switch must be changed to REMOTE.
Note that access level 3 is also left when the front panel switches are changed to an illegal
position. (e.g. switch in REMOTE position, or write protect in vertical position.
>Read syst para L1

Syst tests L2
Syst settings L3
Leave level 3
Figure 3-12 The top level main menu screen: User in level 3 access
3.1.12 Function listing
The menu system includes the following functionality.
3.1.12.1 Level 1
Readout of all the monitor values, warning and alarm limits.
Readout of all the maintenance values and warning limits.
Readout of all the delays.
Readout of all the TX1 and TX2 configurations.
Selecting between %DDM and uA unit for DDM readouts and alarm limit setting.

23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
3.1.12.2 Level 2
Ident. configurations with Morse signal settings to normal, continuous, TST or off on TX1/TX2.
Local Morse speaker on/off on the transmitters.
TX1 and TX2: test-signal 90 Hz or 150 Hz dominance on/off.
TX1 and TX2: 90/150 Hz on/off.
Communications.
3.1.12.3 Level 3
This menu contains the same choices as the Level 1 menu, but in addition to performing rea-
douts allows the user to configure all delays and alarm/warning limits.
3.1.13 The menu tree
The top levels of the menu tree is shown in Figure 3-13, Figure 3-14 and Figure 3-15

23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
The menu tree
NORMARC 7013B-7014B
Read system para L1

System tests L2
System settings L3
NOTE : The chart does not show all the

sub-menus, due to the parameters L3 Page 3
have similar menus. L1
Some options are only available on
L2 Page 2
specific variants of the system.
Mon. parameters
Maint. Val. Lim.
Charger meas.
System delays
TX CONFIGURATION
Select DDM unit
Mon. 1&2 alarm par DC supplies Ok Charger meas. Mon1 delays Select DDM unit
Mon. 1&2 warn. Par TX1 COU Ok VOLT(V) CURR(A) Mon2 delays TX1 configuration
STB Mon. alarm para. TX1 CLR Ok CHRG1 26.1 5.1 STB Mon delays TX2 configuration
[ % DDM ]
STB Mon. warn. Para. TX2 COU Ok CHRG2 26.1 5.0 Maint delays
TX2 CLR Ok FFM delays
TX Control Ok
INTERNAL CL Ok
FFM 1 Ok
FFM 2 Ok Mon 1 COU RF
CL CL RMS Ok Gen : 1.0 COU SBO ATT
DS DS Monitor 1 Ok NF : 10.0 COU SBO PH
CLR CLR Monitor 2 Ok Ident : 30.0 COU DDM
NF NF STB Monitor Ok COU SDM
EXT EXT Mon frontend 1 Ok COU 1020Hz LEVEL
Diff. Frequency Diff. Frequency Mon frontend 2 Ok CLR RF
DC-loops DC-loops STB frontend Ok CLR SBO ATT
LF generator 1 Ok CLR SBO PH
LF generator 2 Ok CLR DDM
CL DDM CL DDM Oscillator 1 Ok CLR SDM
CL SDM CL SDM Oscillator 2 Ok CLR 1020Hz LEVEL
CL RF-level CL RF-level COU DDM TEST 1
CL Ident CL Ident COU DDM TEST 2
CL Nominal CL Nominal CLR DDM TEST 1
CLR DDM TEST 2
COU SBO NARROW
Figure 3-13 The top levels of the menu tree (part 1)

COU SBO WIDE
+5 Ok RC link status Ok
uA M1 M2 CL M1 M2 STS ACT Ok Eprom par error Ok
Al U : +11.0 +11.0 uA : 0.0 0.0 TX1 configuration
DSP PRO Ok Integrity check Ok
Al L : -11.0 -11.0 Al U +11.0 +11.0 COU RF
DSP ERROR Ok
CL Wa: 75% 75% Al L -11.0 -11.0 DIAG RST Ok
Value 16.8 dBV
SYNC ERROR Ok
+15Volt Ok
CL M1 M2 -15 Volt Ok RC link
TX1 configuration
SDM : 40.0% 40.0% COU DDM
Al U +4.0% +4.0% Value : High
Al L -4.0% -4.0% Normal : High
Value 0.00
+5.0 volt
Curr. : High
HBK 1302/1-2
Normal : High
Page 3-15
Instruction Manual
23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
Page 3-16
Instruction Manual
23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
L3
L2
LF Test Modes
Communication
Reset Hist. Storage
Bitrate Local port RESET

TX1 Test Modes
Bitrate Remote1 pa HISTORY STORAGE
TX2 Test Modes
Bitrate Remote2 pa
Ident Speaker
Init modem [ Reset Storage ]
IDENT mode
CL TEST Ident speaker Set botrate Local
DS TEST
SBO 90 stub [ Ident off ] [ 9600 ]
150 Hz on/off
90 Hz on/off
TX1 IDENT mode TX1 90Hz on/off

[ Ident normal ] [ 90Hz tone on ]

sub-menus, due to the parameters
TX1 CL TEST
have similar menus.
[ NORMAL ] Some options are only available on
specific variants of the system. HBK 1302/2-2
NORMARC 7013B-7014B

NORMARC 7013B-7014B

L3
sub-menus, due to the parameters
LEVEL ACCESS 3 have similar menus.

m m Some options are only available on
m m specific variants of the system.
<level3 access>
Mon. parameters
Maint. Val. Lim.
Charger meas.
System delays
TX CONFIGURATION
Select DDM unit
DC supplies Ok Charger meas. Mon1 delays

Mon. 1&2 alarm par Select DDM unit
TX1 COU Ok VOLT(V) CURR(A) Mon2 delays TX1 configuration
Mon. 1&2 warn. Par TX1 CLR Ok CHRG1 26.1 5.1 TX2 configuration
STB Mon delays [ % DDM ]
STB Mon. alarm para. TX2 COU Ok CHRG2 26.1 5.0 Maint delays
STB Mon. warn. Para. TX2 CLR Ok FFM delays
TX Control Ok
INTERNAL CL Ok
FFM 1 Ok COU RF
FFM 2 Ok COU SBO ATT
RMS Ok COU SBO PH
Monitor 1 Ok COU DDM
CL CL <UPD> Mon 1
Monitor 2 Ok COU SDM
DS DS Gen : 1.0
STB Monitor Ok COU 1020Hz LEVEL
CLR CLR NF : 10.0
Mon frontend 1 Ok CLR RF
NF NF Ident : 30.0
Mon frontend 2 Ok CLR SBO ATT
EXT EXT
STB frontend Ok CLR SBO PH
Diff. Frequency Diff. Frequency
LF generator 1 Ok CLR DDM
DC-loops DC-loops
LF generator 2 Ok CLR SDM
Oscillator 1 Ok CLR 1020Hz LEVEL
Oscillator 2 Ok COU DDM TEST 1
COU DDM TEST 2
CL DDM CL DDM CLR DDM TEST 1
CL SDM CL SDM CLR DDM TEST 2
CL RF-level CL RF-level COU SBO NARROW

CL Ident CL Ident COU SBO WIDE
CL Nominal CL Nominal +5 Ok RC link status Ok
STS ACT Ok Eprom par error Ok TX1 configuration <UPD>
DSP PRO Ok Integrity check Ok COU RF
DSP ERROR Ok
DIAG RST Ok
uA <UPD> M1 M2 CL <UPD> M1 M2 Value 16.8 dBV
SYNC ERROR Ok
Al U : +11.0 +11.0 uA : 0.0 0.0 +15Volt Ok
Al L : -11.0 -11.0 Al U +11.0 +11.0 -15 Volt Ok TX1 configuration <UPD>
CL Wa: 75% 75% Al L -11.0 -11.0 <UPD> RC link COU DDM
Value : High Value 0.00
CL <UPD> M1 M2 Normal : High HBK 1302/3-2
SDM : 40.0% 40.0% <UPD> +5.0 volt
Al U +4.0% +4.0%
Al L -4.0% -4.0% Curr. : High
Normal : High
Page 3-17
Instruction Manual
23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
3.2 Tower Equipment
3.2.1 Remote Control Operation
NORMARC ILS
SILENCE
P ARAM
STAND
ALARM
DISAGR BY
B AT T
WARNING
IDENT
MAINT
NORMAL
STBY
ON/ CHANGE
OFF OVER
RMM
ACCESS GRANT DENY
HBK 567-2
Figure 3-16 RF 1242A/B front panel
3.2.2 Glossary
INTERLOCK When an ILS is in active interlock mode (the interlock signal is an input
removed. This signal overrides manual mode of operation.

23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
3.2.3 Pushbuttons
ON/OFF
Used to:
• Toggle the ILS on/off
Valid when:
• The LOCAL/REMOTE switch must be in REMOTE position, and
CHANGE OVER
Used to:
• Toggle the coax relay and transmitters between TX1/TX2 as the active transmitter(s)
Valid when:
• The LOCAL/REMOTE switch on the ILS is in REMOTE position, and
• The ILS is «on» when he MANUAL/AUTO switch is in AUTO position
SILENCE
Used to:
• Turn off the audio alarm on the remote control (caused by remote status change from
NORMAL to ALARM). Also used for lamp test (all lamps are illuminated when this
push-button is held down)
Valid when:
• Always
3.2.4 Switches/Switchlocks
GRANT/DENY
Used to:
• Give access grant (access level 2/3) for RMS control of the ILS when the switch is in
GRANT position. NOTE! This switch may be override by configuration straps on U6 on
TC1216A (strap position 7-14). When this switch is in the DENY position no RMS
access (at access level 2/3) is allowed
Valid when:
• Always

23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
ALARM
Used to:
Activated by:
• One or more alarms present on the ILS, or
• Communication failure with ILS
WARNING
Used to:
• Indicate that the ILS has detected one or more warning conditions
Activated by:
NORMAL
Used to:
• Indicate by blinking that the ILS is on when it should be interlocked off
Activated by:
• No alarms present, and
• Communication with ILS is OK
• Blinking: ILS is on when the RC interlock input is off
STB ALARM
Used to:
• Indicate that the ILS has detected an alarm condition on the standby transmitter. Dis-
abled when the ILS is not configured for hot standby
Activated by:
• Hot standby configuration and alarm(s) detected on the standby transmitter
STB WARNING
Used to:
• Indicate that the ILS has detected one or more warning conditions on the standby
transmitter. Disabled when the ILS is not configured for hot standby

23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
Activated by:
• Hot standby configuration and one or more warnings detected by RMS for the standby
transmitter
STB NORMAL
Used to:
• Indicate that no alarm conditions are detected by the ILS on the standby transmitter.
Disabled when the ILS is not configured for hot standby
Activated by:
• Hot standby configuration and no alarm(s) detected on the standby transmitter
PARAMeter warning
Used to:
• Indicate that there are one or more monitor parameter warnings present
Activated by:
• One or more monitor parameters outside the warning limits
monitor DISAGRee
Used to:
• Indicate that there are one or more monitor parameter warnings present. The warnings
from the monitor 1/monitor 2 are voted before displayed
Activated by:
• Difference in monitor 1/monitor 2 alarm detection
BATTery warning
Used to:
• Indicate that the ILS is running using the 27V battery
Activated by:
• Loss of mains for charging the 27V battery
IDENT warning
Used to:
• Indicate that the ident is faulty for LLZ
Activated by:
• Loss of ident Morse coding for LLZ

23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
MAINTenance warning
Used to:
• Indicate that one or more of the maintenance parameter warnings detected
Activated by:
• One or more maintenance parameters faulty or outside limits
STandBY transmitter on air
Used to:
• Indicate that coax position directs the standby transmitters to the antenna and the
main transmitters to the dummy load
Activated by:
• Coax position differs from transmitter main select
Alarm buzzer
Used to:
• Indicate that a transition from NORMAL to ALARM has occurred. Reset by pressing
SILENCE push-button
Activated by:
• Remote control state transition from NORMAL to ALARM
ACCESS
Used to:
• Indicate that access level 2/3 has been granted for RMS control
Activated by:
• Grant/Deny switchlock is in GRANT position

23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
3.2.6 Remote Slave Operation
NORMARC ILS
SILENCE
ALARM
WARNING
NORMAL
ON/
OFF
HBK 599-2
Figure 3-17 SF 1344A front panel
3.2.7 Glossary
INTERLOCK When an ILS is in active interlock mode (the interlock signal is an input
removed. This signal overrides manual mode of operation.

23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
3.2.8 Pushbuttons
ON/OFF
Used to:
• Toggle the ILS on/off
Valid when:
• The LOCAL/REMOTE switch must be in REMOTE position, and
SILENCE
Used to:
• Turn off the audio alarm on the slave panel (generated by remote control). Also used
for lamp test (all lamps are illuminated when this push-button is held down)
Valid when:
• Always
ALARM
Used to:
Activated by:
• One or more alarms present on the ILS, or
• Communication failure with ILS
WARNING
Used to:
• Indicate that the ILS has detected one or more warning conditions
Activated by:
NORMAL
Used to:
• Indicate by blinking that the ILS is on when it should be interlocked off

23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
Activated by:
• No alarms present, and
• Communication with ILS is OK
• Blinking: ILS is on when the RC interlock input is off
3.2.10 Interlock Switch Operation
The interlock function is used when mutual exclusive operation on different ILS systems is
required. An active interlock for a station shall prevent transmission of ILS signals. The inter-
lock signal is connected to the remote control RC1241 and transmitted to the ILS through the
remote control connection.
The interlock function on the ILS is enabled/disabled from configuration settings on the
TC1216A. The rest of this chapter describes an ILS configured for interlock.
When an active ILS receives an active interlock signal, the ILS performs a shutdown. If the
interlock signal is deactivated, the ILS will automatically be turned on after a 20 second delay
period.
For maintenance purposes, an interlock override function has been implemented. This func-
tion makes it possible to operate the ILS locally in manual mode with an active interlock sig-
nal. To activate the interlock override function the following conditions must be met:
• LOCAL/REMOTE switch must be in LOCAL position,
• AUTO/MANUAL switch must be in MANUAL position and
• INTERLOCK OVERRIDE switchlock must be set in horizontal position
The remote control will always be set in ALARM state when the interlock override function is
activated.
3.3 Remote Maintenance and Monitoring Software
3.3.1 Introduction
The NORMARC 7000 RMM is a Microsoft Windows based application that provides access
to all the data and functions made available by the ILS remote monitoring subsystem.
By connecting to the ILS remote monitoring subsystem, the software lets the user do
the following:
• View the current status and measurements done by the ILS
• Configure ILS monitor and transmitter settings
• View reports that shows the current operational status and configuration of an ILS
• Download historical data from the ILS and browse through individual data sets
• Download and view events to see the operational history of the ILS

23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
• Connect to the ILS with a null modem cable (direct), dial-up connection or leased line
connection
The RMM software starting with version 2.0 supports both the NORMARC 70xxB series and
the NORMARC 7000 series ILS.
3.3.2 System requirements
3.3.2.1 Minimum hardware requirements:

• Intel Pentium II 266 MHz processor
• 64 MB for Windows 98/98SE/ME and Windows NT, 128 MB for Windows 2000/XP.
The software may work with less RAM than this, depending on the hardware configu-
ration
• Hard disk space: About 20 MB excluding historical data storage/database (require-
ment may increase depending on how much ILS measurements one wants to store)
3.3.2.2 Operating system/software requirements:

• Microsoft Windows 98, 98SE, ME, Windows NT 4.0 with Service Pack 4 or later, Win-
dows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional
• Microsoft Internet Explorer version 4.01 SP1 or newer must be installed if the operat-
ing system is Windows NT. The version of Internet Explorer that comes with Windows
98/98SE/ME and Windows 2000/XP is ok
3.3.3 User Manual
Please refer to Appendix D for the user manual.
3.4 Startup / shutdown procedures
3.4.1 Startup
This section provides a step-by-step check list for starting the ILS from power-off and verifying
that it is in a normal operating state.
Refer to (Figure 3.1) and (Figure 3.2) for switch and indicator locations and orientation.
Location Item Action Indications
1) Initial Conditions
Alongside battery Battery fuses Verify OFF (none)
Below Main Cabinet AC power supplies Verify OFF Power indicator not illumi-
nated
Main Cabinet - top Power switches Verify OFF (0) System is powered off.
Local Control Panel LOCAL/REMOTE Verify / set to (none)
switch LOCAL

23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07

Local Control Panel MANUAL/AUTO Verify / set to MAN- (none)
switch UAL
Local Control Panel WRITE PROTECT Verify / set to vertical (none)
switch position
Local Control Panel INTERLOCK Verify / set to vertical (none)
OVERRIDE switch position
2) Startup sequence
Below ILS cabinet AC power supplies Set to ON Power indicator illuminated
Alongside battery Battery fuses Set to ON (none)
Main Cabinet (top) Power switches Set to ON (1) System will power up.
Local Keyboard/Display RMS LCD screen Verify ILS is not [SELECTED]
interlocked off
NOTE: If equipment is interlocked off and it is desired to start the system, secure permission to oper-
ate the ILS before proceeding. Then, set the INTERLOCK OVERRIDE switch to the horizontal posi-
tion.
Local Control Panel ON/OFF switch Press Transmitter TX1 COURSE
and CLR lamp(s) will illumi-
nate
3) Normal Indications (during normal operation): Tx1 main , Tx1 to Air

Local Control Panel NORMAL lamp Verify lamp illumi- Green light
nated
Local Control Panel SERVICE lamp Verify lamp illumi- Red light
nated (due to
LOCAL mode of
operation and
INTERLOCK
OVERRIDE if appli-
cable)
Local Control Panel ALARM lamp Verify lamp off (no light)
Local Control Panel Main WARNING Verify lamp off (no light)
lamp
Local Control Panel Individual warning Verify lamps off (no light)
lamps (six)
Local Control Panel MAIN lamp Verify that TX1 lamp Green light
is illuminated
Local Control Panel TX to Air lamp Verify that TX1 lamp Green light
is illuminated
Local Control Panel TX1 Course lamp Verify that TX1 Green light
COURSE lamp is
illuminated
Local Control TX2 Course lamp Verify that TX2 Cold Standby: No light
COURSE lamp is Hot Standby: Green light
illuminated .
Local Control TX1 Clearance lamp Verify that TX1 CLR Green light.
lamp is illuminated

23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07

Local Control TX2 Clearance lamp Verify that TX2 CLR Cold Standby: No light
lamp is illuminated Hot Standby: Green light
Local Keyboard/Display LCD screen, first Verify Equipment “Normarc 70XXB” or local
line name name if set.
Local Keyboard/Display LCD screen, sec- Verify interlock sta- Either blank line, “LLZ
ond line tus SELECTED” or “Interlock
Override” if interlock has
been manually overridden.
Local Keyboard/Display LCD screen, third Verify system switch “LOCAL” and “MANUAL”.
line status
Local Keyboard/Display LCD screen, fourth Verify remote control “RC OK”.
line connection
4) Tests and verification

Local Control Panel LAMP TEST button Press momentarily All lamps on.
Local Control Panel CHANGEOVER but- Press Verify that TX to Air changes
ton from TX1 to TX2.
Verify that no alarms or warn-
ings other than STBY are
present.
Local Control Panel CHANGEOVER but- Press Verify that TX to Air and trans-
ton mitter indicators return to orig-
inal state.
Local Control Panel MANUAL/AUTO Set to AUTO Verify that LCD third line
switch reads “LOCAL” and “AUTO”.
Local Control Panel LOCAL/REMOTE Set to REMOTE Verify that LCD third line
switch reads “REMOTE” and
“AUTO”.
Verify that transmitters remain
on.
Local Control Panel INTERLOCK Set to vertical posi- Verify that either:
OVERRIDE switch tion No interlock: LCD second line
blank, SERVICE lamp off and
transmitters remain ON.
Interlock, system selected:
LCD second line reads “LLZ
SELECTED”, SERVICE lamp
off and transmitters remain
ON.
Interlock, system deselected:
LCD second line reads “LLZ
DESELECTED”, transmitters
go off and SERVICE lamp off.
5) Final check
To verify system in normal status before leaving site, perform the following checks:
Local Control Panel INTERLOCK Verify vertical posi-
OVERRIDE switch tion
Local Control Panel LOCAL/REMOTE Verify REMOTE
switch position

23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07

Local Control Panel MANUAL/AUTO Verify AUTO posi-
switch tion
Local Control Panel WRITE PROTECT Verify vertical posi-
switch tion
Local Control Panel SERVICE lamp Verify off (no light)
Local Control Panel ALARM lamp Verify off (no light)
Local Control Panel Main WARNING Verify off (no light)
lamp
Local Control Panel NORMAL lamp Verify on Green
Local Control Panel Individual warning Verify off (no light)
lamps (six)
Local Control Panel Main lamp Verify TX1 on Green
Local Control Panel TX to air lamp Verify TX1 selected Green
Local Control Panel TX1 COURSE lamp Verify on Green
Local Control Panel TX2 COURSE lamp Verify on Cold Standby: No light
Hot Standby: Green light
Local Control Panel TX1 CLR lamp Verify on Green
Local Control Panel TX2 CLR lamp Verify on Cold Standby: No light
Hot Standby: Green light
3.4.2 Shutdown
1) Normal shutdown
Local Control Panel MANUAL/AUTO Set to MANUAL Service lamp on (red)
switch
Local Control Panel ON/OFF switch Press Transmitters off; alarm and
warning lamps on.
Main cabinet top Main power Set to off (0) System will power off.
switches
Below main cabinet AC Power Supply Switches set to OFF Power indicator off
2) Emergency shutdown
Main cabinet top Main power Set to off (0) System will power off.
switches
Note: No harm will be done to the ILS system if the emergency shutdown procedure is used instead
of normal shutdown. It is nevertheless advisable to follow the normal shutdown procedure if
possible.
CAUTION: If the main power is turned off at the shelter circuit breaker panel, the ILS can con-
tinue to operate on battery power. The locally installed circuit breaker for battery power must
be turned OFF to disable battery operation. The main power switches at the top of the cabinet
remove both battery and AC-supplied power from the system, but do not remove the 27 VDC
from the ILS cabinet.

23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07

23136-I3/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
4. Section 4 Periodic Maintenance
4.1 Periodic Maintenance Schedule
This section describes the performance checks that must be conducted in order to ensure a
safe operation of the ILS equipment, as well as where to find the proper adjustment proce-
dures.
NOTE: The content of and period between procedures given below are Park Air Systems recommenda-
tions under a normal operational environment. The responsible Authority may have require-
ments that replaces, modifies or comes in addition to the procedures given below.
4.1.1 On-site Performance Checks
Checks and procedures listed in Table 4-1 are required following initial installation, following
modification, or when corrective maintenance is performed, prior to returning the equipment to
service. Standards and tolerances for the procedure are listed in Table 4-1. The applicable
setup and test procedure is listed for convenient reference. Since most performance checks
in Section 6 are referenced to maintenance procedures, the section containing the mainte-
nance procedure is listed here.
Performance check and maintenance intervals may be adjusted in accordance with the user’s
policies.
Performance Check Tolerance or Criteria for Maintenance/ Perform-

acceptable performance ance Check Procedure
Monthly
Observe and record monitor data No alarms or warnings 4.2.1.2
Observe Maintenance Parameters No alarms or warnings 4.2.1.2
Field DDM Measurements As established for facility 4.2.1.1
Course Structure along runway (CatIII) As established for facility 4.2.1.4
Six Monthly
TX Parameters and DC supply Recordings As established at installa- 4.2.1.2
tion and flight inspection
Monitor Integrity Check Changeover/Shutdown 4.2.2.2 or 4.2.2.3
Annual
RF Frequency Check 4.2.3.1 4.2.3.1
LF Frequency Check 4.2.3.2 4.2.3.2
Transmitter Waveforms Check As indicated 4.2.3.3
CSB Output Power As established for facility 4.2.3.4
Monitor Alarm Limits Check As established for facility 4.2.3.5 or 4.2.3.6
Near Field Monitor Delay As set ±2 sec. 4.2.3.7
20 seconds inhibit -0 +2 sec 4.2.3.8
Battery Maintenance Per battery specifications 4.2.3.9
Harmonic Content 90 and 150 Hz 2 per cent 4.2.3.10
Final Check Visual Inspection 4.2.3.11
Table 4-1 Periodic Maintenance Checks

23136-I4/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
4.1.2 Other On-Site Maintenance
Clean and inspect equipment, inspect batteries for corrosion, cracks, and other deterioration,
check and tighten RF and battery connections as required.
Check any installed environmental sensors and other equipment connected to user analog or
digital inputs for proper operation.
Check operation of interlocks, if installed. Check operation of remote controls if installed.
4.1.3 Off-Site Maintenance
All module and circuit board repair is to be performed off site, at the factory or authorized
repair depot. No modules are user-serviceable.
4.2 Periodic Maintenance CAT I, II and III
IMPORTANT:
No adjustments / alignments shall be done during a Periodic Maintenance.
The parameters should be recorded and compared with their nominal values only.
Over some time, the parameters may change due to natural variations. Variations of less than
50% of their alarm limits, are considered normal. If a parameter is changing more than 50% of
it's alarm limit, it is likely due to a discrepancy / degeneration of a module, cable etc. In this
case, the reason for the discrepancy should be searched for. If the result calls for changing a
module, rephasing of cables etc., a flight check is often required to verify that parameters are
inside operating tolerances.
All maintenance instruction items apply to CAT I and CAT II installations except where
(CAT III only) is denoted.
All instruction items apply to CAT III installations.
4.2.1 Monthly inspections
Test equipment
• ILS Field Test Set / NAV Analyzer with portable antenna
• PC with RMM software and printer
4.2.1.1 Field modulation measurements
Note: For Cat III installations this routine presumes that a FFM system is installed.
On the established reference marks for Course Line (THR CL), Sector Width (THR 90)) and
(THR 150) carry out modulation measurements, record the values in Table 4-1.

23136-I4/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
4.2.1.2 Monitor Parameters recordings
Use File/View report to generate a report of all measured values and settings. Print or save as
required.
• Tx2 to antenna. (Executed by tower personnel if ILS is not taken out of service.)
4.2.1.3 Field DDM measurements (optional procedure)
Using the Field Test Set carry out DDM measurements versus azimuth angles according to
established marks in the near field area of the antenna array.
Record in Table 4-3. Also record Tx1 or Tx2 used.
4.2.1.4 Course Structure along runway (CAT III only)
Measure and record the course alignment structure using a vehicle equipped with the Field
Test Set and antenna from the threshold to point E.
For details including output time constants refer to Manual on Testing of Radio Navigation
Aids Volume II paragraph 4.2.2.1.
4.2.2 Six Monthly inspections
Test equipment
• Oscilloscope
• Stop watch
• PC with RMM and printer
4.2.2.1 Tx Parameters and DC Power supply recordings.
Use File/View report to generate a report of all measured values and settings. Print or save as
required.
Tx1 to antenna. Tx2 active to dummy load.
Compare values with previous recordings.
4.2.2.2 Monitor Integrity Check (Alternative 1)
Can be performed from a remote location if Level 2 access is allowed from a remote RMM PC
or the remote control is configured for combined Main Select/Change-over)
4.2.2.2.1 Check Tx1 Main
Turn the Auto/Manual switch to Auto.
Tx1 shall be selected as main and shall be radiating. The RMM shall be connected and shall

23136-I4/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
display the Event List.
Push the On-Off button to turn off the equipment. Observe the Event List. The events "Turned
OFF" and approximately 30 sec. later "Intgrt test ok" shall occur.
If the test fails the text "Intgrt test FAILED" will occur.
4.2.2.2.2 Check Tx2 Main
Tx2 shall be selected as main and shall be radiating. Otherwise, repeat the procedure in
6.1.9.1
4.2.2.2.3 Store or print result
Use File/View Report/Event History Report to print or store the test result.
4.2.2.3 Monitor Integrity Check (Alternative 2)
4.2.2.3.1 False radiation time Tx1 Main
Equipment in mode AUTO. Main Select Tx1. Tx 1 on.

• Remove the CL monitor cable from the monitor input
• Note the time elapsed*) from the signal was removed until Tx2 was shut off
• Record in Table 4-4 line a) the measured delay time from cable removal until the
standby transmitter has switched off. Check that the equipment carries out a
changeover to Tx 2 before shutoff. Record in Table 4-4 line b)
• Open Maintenance measurements window
• Check that Course Transmitter 1, +27V CSB and +27V SBO parameters are 0V
• Check that Clearence Transmitter 1, +27V CSB and +27V SBO parameters are 0V
Reconnect the monitor cable.
4.2.2.3.2 False radiation time Tx2 Main
Equipment in mode AUTO. Main Select Tx2. Tx 2 on.

• Remove the CL monitor cable from the monitor input
• Note the time elapsed*) from the signal was removed until Tx1 was shut off. Check
that the equipment carries out a changeover to Tx 1 before shutoff
• Record in Table 4-4 line d) the measured delay time from cable removal until the
standby transmitter has switched off. Check that the equipment carries out a
changeover to Tx 1 before shutoff. Record in Table 4-4 line e)
• Open Maintenance measurements window
• Check that Course Transmitter 2, +27V CSB and +27V SBO parameters are 0V
• Check that Clearence Transmitter 2, +27V CSB and +27V SBO parameters are 0V

23136-I4/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
Reconnect the monitor cable.
Note:*) Near immediate change if short delays are used.
4.2.3 Annual inspections
Test Equipment
• PC including NM 7000 RMM program
• ILS Field Test Set/ NAV Analyzer, including attenuator 20 dB or 30 dB
• Oscilloscope
• Frequency counter 10 Hz to 350 MHz
• RF Signal generator including calibrated ILS modulation
• Digital voltmeter
• Wattmeter with probe covering 108 - 112 MHz, 30 watts
• Stop watch
4.2.3.1 RF Frequency check.
Set the AUTOMATIC/MANUAL switch to MANUAL and REMOTE/LOCAL to LOCAL.
4.2.3.1.1 Course Transmitter Frequency
Switch on Course Tx1.

• Connect the Frequency Counter to CSB Cou test connector in the Change Over Sec-
tion via a 50 ohm test cable. (Use 50 ohm input port of the counter)
• If necessary switch off the 90 Hz and 150 Hz modulation through the Local Display
and Keyboard or the RMM Program
Nominal frequency: (Channel frequency + 5kHz) ±0.002%
Repeat the measurements for Course Tx2.
Record the frequency readings in Table 4-6.
4.2.3.1.2 Clearance Transmitter Frequency
Switch on Clearance Tx1.

• Connect the Frequency Counter to CSB CLR test connector in the Change Over Sec-
tion via a 50 ohm test cable. (Use 50 ohm input port of the counter)
• If necessary switch off the 90 Hz and 150 Hz modulation through the Local Display
and Keyboard or the RMM Program
Nominal frequency: (Channel frequency - 5kHz) ±0.002%

23136-I4/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
Repeat the measurements for Clearance Tx2.
4.2.3.2 LF Frequency check.
90/150/1020 Hz MODULATION FREQUENCY checks

• Connect the Frequency Counter to CSB test connector on Course Tx1 Section via a
50 ohm test cable. (Use high impedance input port of counter)
• Turn off the 90 Hz modulation and the ident (1020Hz) modulation for Course Tx1
through the Local Display and Keyboard or the RMM Program
• Read the 150 Hz frequency. Tolerance ±0.05 Hz
• Turn the 90 Hz modulation on and turn 150 Hz modulation off through the Local Dis-
play and Keyboard or the RMM Program
• Turn off the 90 Hz modulation and the 150 Hz modulation and set the Ident modulation
to continuous through the Local Display and Keyboard or the RMM Program
Repeat the test for Course Tx2.
4.2.3.3 Transmitter waveforms checks.
Carry out the tests outlined in paragraphs 4.2.3.3.1 to 4.2.3.3.5 for Cou Tx2, CLR Tx1 and
CLR Tx2. Record the results of the outlined tests in Table 4-5.
4.2.3.3.1 SBO waveform checks.

• Connect the Oscilloscope to SBO test connector on Course Tx1 Section via 50 ohm
test cable
• Set Oscilloscope input mode to DC
• Check that the waveform resembles the graph below, left
For best signal resolution on the scope, it is advisable to set the oscilloscope in double sweep
rate and FREE RUN trigger mode (“kissing pattern” mode). The two halves of the 30 Hz wave-
form will then overlap and look like one waveform when perfect power balance is achieved.

23136-I4/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
DEMODULATOR DC OFFSET APPROXI-

DEMODULATED SBO: NORMAL MATELY 5% OF PEAK VOLTAGE
Figure 4-1 SBO Waveforms
4.2.3.3.2 CSB waveform check. LF phase

• Connect the Oscilloscope to CSB test connector on Course Tx1 Section via 50 ohm
test cable
• Set the Oscilloscope input mode to DC
Look for the intermediate peaks of the CSB demodulated waveform. Check that the waveform
resembles the graph below (left). The intermediate waveform peaks shall have the same max-
imum and minimum level, indicating 90/150 Hz zero phase start.
DEMODULATED CSB: NORMAL DEMODULATED CSB: 10° LF PHASE ERROR
Figure 4-2 LF phase check
4.2.3.3.3 DDM and SDM check.
Switch on Tx1.
• Connect the Field Test Set to the CSB Cou test connector on the Change Over Section
through a 20 or 30 dB attenuator

23136-I4/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
• Use a double shielded 50 ohm coaxial test cable. On the Field Test Set read DDM.
The nominal reading should be 0.0% DDM
• On the Field Test Set read SDM. The nominal reading should be 40.0%, or the same
as the previous reading/ commissioned value
4.2.3.3.4 Ident modulation check.
Switch on Tx1.
• Connect the Field Test Set to the CSB Cou test connector on the Change Over Section
through a 20 or 30 dB attenuator
• From the local panel/display or from the RMM program set Cou Ident modulation to
CONTINUOUS
• Use a double shielded 50 ohm coaxial test cable. On the Field Test Set read IDENT
MOD. The nominal reading should be 10% MOD, alternatively the same value as pre-
vious recording. (If voice modulation is applied the Ident modulation shall be 5% mod-
ulation depth.)
4.2.3.3.5 Voice modulation check. (If voice ident is used).
Switch on Tx1.
• Connect the Oscilloscope to CSB test connector on Course Tx1 Section via 50 ohm
test cable
• From the local panel/display connect the audible transducer by command “Set ident
speaker”
• Listen to the voice message and check that the waveform has a peak amplitude
approximately six times the Ident waveform peak amplitude seen on the oscilloscope
4.2.3.4 CSB output power.
a) Course Tx CSB. Switch off the transmitters. Select Tx1 as Main Tx

• Insert the power meter into the Course CSB output path of the Cabinet. Switch on Tx1.
Read and record the Tx1 power in Table 4-8
• Change over to Tx2. Read and record the Tx2 power in Table 4-8
b) Clearance Tx CSB. Switch off the transmitters. Select Tx1 as Main Tx.
• Insert the power meter into the Clearance CSB output path of the Cabinet. Switch on
Tx1. Read and record the Tx1 power in Table 4-8
• Change over to Tx2. Read and record the Tx2 power in Table 4-8
4.2.3.5 Monitor Alarm Limit checks (Alternative 1)
This procedure uses the transmitter as the signal source. The values in the "Flight check" win-
dow must have been set to values that shall give alarms previously, preferably during commis-
sioning of the equipment.

23136-I4/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
Set the AUTOMATIC/MANUAL switch to MANUAL and REMOTE/LOCAL to LOCAL.
Log on with the RMM program in level 2.
Open the "Flight check" window and select the Tx tab for the transmitter on air. Then select
the "Alarm limit check" tab.
4.2.3.5.1 CL DDM
Connect a Portable ILS Test Instrument to the test connector "CSB COU".
Select "CL test signal 1" (90Hz dominance). Check that a CL alarm is generated, and verify
that the test instrument reading is within ±1 µA (±0.1%DDM) of the monitor reading.
Repeat with "CL test signal 2"
Return to "CL test off"
4.2.3.5.2 DS DDM
Select "DS test Narrow". Check that a DS alarm is generated, and note the monitor reading.
Disconnect the DS monitor cable from the feed-through connector in the rear cabinet, and
connect a Portable ILS Test Instrument to the DS Monitor input. Verify that the test instrument
reading is within ±2 µA (±0.2%DDM) of the monitor reading. Use the formula (DS DDM + DS
DDM nominal – CL DDM) to get the actual DDM value. Reconnect the DS monitor cable.
Repeat with "DS test Wide".
Return to "DS test off".
4.2.3.5.3 CLR DDM
Select "CLR test Wide". Check that a CLR alarm is generated, and note the monitor reading.
Disconnect the CLR monitor cable from the feed-through connector in the rear cabinet, and
connect a Portable ILS Test Instrument to the CLR Monitor input. Verify that the test instru-
ment reading is within ±2 µA (±0.2%DDM) of the monitor reading. Use the formula (CLR DDM
+ CLR DDM nominal) to get the actual DDM value. Reconnect the CLR monitor cable.
Return to "CLR test off".
4.2.3.5.4 CL RF alarm
Select "Test RF attenuation" "COU". Check that a CL RF alarm is generated. Deselect "COU"
4.2.3.5.5 CLR RF alarm
Select "Test RF attenuation" "CLR". Check that a CLR RF alarm is generated. Deselect "CLR"

23136-I4/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
4.2.3.6 Monitor Alarm Limit checks. (Alternative 2) (CAT III)
After completion and recording of the alarm parameters into Table 4-9, compare and check
that the values are the same as in the previous records.
External RF Signal Generator applied as signal source.
Set the AUTOMATIC/MANUAL switch to MANUAL, the REMOTE/LOCAL to LOCAL and

MAIN SELECT to Tx1.
Switch on Course Tx1 and Clearance Tx1.
Check Monitor 1 first.
4.2.3.6.1 CL DDM ALARM
Apply a test signal from the RF Signal Generator to the CL input connector in the back of the
cabinet.(Disconnect first the signal cable from the Monitor network). Adjust the signal to the
same RF level and frequency as the normal signal applied to the monitor.
Modulation shall be: 0.0% DDM, 40.0% SDM.
Verify modulation setting (DDM, SDM) by checking the test signal with the Field Test Set.
Use the Local Display and Keyboard or the RMM Program to display the measured values
for CL DDM.
• Change DDM from the generator slowly towards 150 Hz dominance until a point where
the letter A (indicates that monitor has an ALARM for the displayed parameter) is
shown beside the measured parameter for Monitor 1
• Check the new generator DDM value with the Field Test Set
• Record in Table 4-9 line a)
• Record in Table 4-9 line aa)
Repeat the procedure for Monitor 2.
4.2.3.6.2 CL SDM ALARM
The test setup is the same as in 4.2.3.6.1
for CL SDM
• Increase SDM from the generator slowly until a point where the letter A (indicates that
monitor has an ALARM for the displayed parameter) is shown beside the measured

23136-I4/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
parameter for Monitor 1

• Check the new generator SDM value with the Field Test Set
• Record in Table 4-9 line b)
• Decrease SDM from the generator slowly until a point where the letter A (indicates that
• Record in Table 4-9 line bb)
4.2.3.6.3 CL RF ALARM
for CL SDM.
• Decrease slowly RF level on the generator until a point where the letter A (indicates
that monitor has an ALARM for the displayed parameter) is shown beside the mea-
sured parameter for Monitor 1
• Record the RF level reading at alarm point in Table 4-9 line c)
4.2.3.6.4 DS DDM ALARM
Apply a test signal from the RF Signal Generator to the DS input connector in the back of the
Modulation shall be: 15.5%DDM, 40.0%SDM.
for DS DDM.
• Increase DDM from the generator slowly above nominal value until a point where the
letter A (indicates that monitor has an ALARM for the displayed parameter) is shown
beside the measured parameter for Monitor 1
• Record in Table 4-9 line d)
• Decrease DDM from the generator slowly below nominal value until a point where the

23136-I4/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
• Record in Table 4-9 line dd)
4.2.3.6.5 NF DDM ALARM
Apply a test signal from the RF Signal Generator to the NF input connector in the back of the
cabinet.(Disconnect first the signal cable from the Near Field Antenna). Adjust the signal to
the same RF level and frequency as the normal signal applied to the monitor.
for NF DDM
• Record in Table 4-9 line e)
• Record in Table 4-9 line ee)
4.2.3.6.6 CLR DDM ALARM
Apply a test signal from the RF Signal Generator to the CLR input connector in the back of the
Modulation shall be: Same as commissioned values DDM and SDM from CLR output of Mon-
itor network.
for CLR DDM.
• Increase DDM from the generator slowly from nominal value until a point where the let-
ter A (indicates that monitor has an ALARM for the displayed parameter) is shown

23136-I4/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
• Record in Table 4-9 line f)

• Decrease DDM from the generator slowly from nominal value until a point where the
• Record in Table 4-9 line ff)
4.2.3.6.7 CLR SDM ALARM
for CLR SDM.
• Record in Table 4-9 line g)
• Record in Table 4-9 line gg)
4.2.3.6.8 CLR RF ALARM
Use the Local Display and Keyboard or the RMM Program to display the measured values for
CL SDM.
sured parameter for Monitor 1
• The nominal level reduction should be 1 dB
• Record the RF reading at alarm point in Table 4-9 line h)
4.2.3.6.9 STB CL DDM ALARM (CAT III only)
Apply a test signal from the RF Signal Generator to the STB CL input connector in the

23136-I4/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
change-over section. Adjust the signal to the same RF level and frequency as the normal sig-
nal applied to the monitor.
for STB CL DDM.
• Increase DDM from the generator slowly above nominal value until a point where the
beside the measured parameter for STB MON
• Record in Table 4-9 line if)
• Decrease DDM from the generator slowly below nominal value until a point where the
beside the measured parameter for STB MON
• Record in Table 4-9 line iiff)
4.2.3.6.10 STB CL SDM ALARM (CAT III only)
for STB CL SDM
parameter for STB MON
• Record in Table 4-9 line jjg)
parameter for STB MON
• Record in Table 4-9 line jjgg)
4.2.3.6.11 STB CL RF ALARM (CAT III only)
for STB CL RF.

23136-I4/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
sured parameter for STB MON

• Record the RF level reading at alarm point in Table 4-9 line kh)
4.2.3.6.12 STB DS DMM ALARM (CAT III only)
Apply a test signal from the RF Signal Generator to the STB DS input connector in the back of
the cabinet. Adjust the signal to the same RF level and frequency as the normal signal applied
to the monitor.
Modulation shall be: 157,5%DDM, 40.0%SDM.
for DS DDM.
shown beside the measured parameter for STB MON
• Record in Table 4-9 line lii)
shown beside the measured parameter for STB MON
• Record in Table 4-9 line llii)
4.2.3.6.13 STB CLR DDM ALARM (CAT III only)
Apply a test signal from the RF Signal Generator to the STB CLR input connector in the
back of the cabinet. Adjust the signal to the same RF level and frequency as the normal sig-
nal applied to the monitor.
for CL DDM.
shown beside the measured parameter for Standby monitor
• Record in Table 4-9 line m)
shown beside the measured parameter for Standby monitor

23136-I4/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
• Record in Table 4-9 line mm)
4.2.3.6.14 STB CLR SDM ALARM (CAT III only)
for STB CLR SDM
parameter for Standby monitor
• Record in Table 4-9 line n)
parameter for Standby monitor
• Record in Table 4-9 line nn)
STB CLR RF ALARM (CAT III only)
for STB CL RF.
sured parameter for Standby monitor
• Record the RF level reading at alarm point in Table 4-9 line o)
4.2.3.7 Near Field Monitor delay
Set the AUTOMATIC/MANUAL switch to AUTOMATIC, the REMOTE/LOCAL to LOCAL and

MAIN SELECT to Tx1.
Switch on Course Tx1 and Clearance Tx1.
System Status Indications should be NORMAL and SERVICE
Make an alarm by removing the NF cable to the Cabinet. After the specified delay, the trans-
mitter shall change to Tx2, then after the same time lapse Tx2 shall shut down.
Record in Table 4-1 line a) the measured delay time from cable removal until the standby
transmitter has switched off.

23136-I4/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
4.2.3.8 20 seconds inhibit
After shutdown check that an immediate attempted restart of a transmitter is inhibited at least
20 seconds from the time the standby Tx is shut off.
Record in Table 4-1 line b) the measured time lapse from the standby transmitter has switched
off until the main transmitter is again radiating to the antenna.
4.2.3.9 Battery maintenance
For Hot Standby equipment, check both battery banks.
Check with digital voltmeter that the voltage across the battery terminals is approximately 26.6
Vdc. Record in Table 4-1 line a) the measured voltage.
Switch off the mains 220 V. After approximately 10 minutes battery operation with transmitter
to air check that the voltage across the battery terminals is not less than 23 V. Record in Table
4-1 line b) the voltage.
Switch back to mains 220 V. After 24 hours check that the battery terminal voltage is again
back approximately 26.6 Vdc. Record in Table 4-1 line c) the voltage. The 26,6 V can be mon-
itored from the RMM facility.
4.2.3.10 Harmonic content 90 and 150 Hz
Due to the construction principle of the LF tone generator, such checks (Annex 10 3.1.3.5.3 d/
e and 3.1.5.5.2 d/e) are done as apart of the System Test in the factory, and are not required
by the equipment manufacturer as a Periodic Maintenance.
However, if such checks are required by the authority, the harmonic content is then measured
for each transmitter. A detector and a wave analyzer can be used. The detected signal is feed-
ing the wave analyzer from which a value is obtained on a root mean square (RMS) calcula-
tion basis. Other instruments as distortion factor meter or NAV Analyzer can be used.
4.2.3.11 Final check LLZ
Check that all electrical contacts and connectors are not loose.
Carry out a visual check outside and inside of the equipment.
Check that all switches and keys are in NORMAL position.
Check that the System lamp status is NORMAL after the switches AUTO/MANUAL and
REMOTE ON/OFF are in AUTO and ON respectively.

23136-I4/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
Date
Tx1/Tx2
Azimuth %DDM %SDM %DDM %SDM %DDM %SDM %DDM %SDM
TRH CL
TRH 90 Hz
TRH 150 Hz
Table 4-2 Field Modulation check
Date
Tx1/Tx2
Azimuth % DDM % DDM % DDM % DDM % DDM % DDM % DDM % DDM % DDM
35°
30°
25°
20°
15°
10°
5°
4°
3°
2°
1°
0°
1°
2°
3°
4°
5°
10°
15°
20°
25°
30°
35°
Table 4-3 Field DDM measurement

23136-I4/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
a) General alarm delay Tx1 - Tx2 sec

b) Changeover carried out
c) PA 27V level
d) General alarm delay Tx1 - Tx2 sec
e) Changeover carried out
f) PA 27V level
Table 4-4 Monitor Integrity Test (Alternative 2)
Date
Cou Tx1 Cou Tx2 CLR Tx1 CLR Tx2
a) SBO waveform check (ok) . .
b) CSB/LF phase check (ok) . .
c) DDM check Cou (%DDM) . .
d) SDM check Cou (%SDM) . .
e) Course ident mod (%) . .
Table 4-5 Transmitter waveform checks
Date Tx1 Tx2

a) Course transmitter frequency MHz
b) Clearance transmitter frequency MHz
Table 4-6 RF Frequency check
Date
Tx1 Tx2
150 Hz frequency Hz
90 Hz-Frequency Hz
Ident (1020 Hz) Fre- Hz
quency
Table 4-7 LF Frequency check

23136-I4/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
Date Tx1 Tx2

a) Course transmitter output power W
b) Clearance transmitter output power W
Table 4-8 CSB output power
Date
Mon1/Mon2 M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2
Text Parameter Unit
ref.
a) CL DDM Alarm 150 µA/%DDM
aa) CL DDM alarm 90 µA/%DDM
b) CL SDM alarm high %
bb) CL SDM alarm low %
c) CL RF alarm dB
d) DS DDM alarm wide µA/%DDM
dd) DS DDM alarm narrow µA/%DDM
e) NF DDM alarm 150 µA/%DDM
ee) NF DDM alarm 90 µA/%DDM
f) CLR DDM alarm 150 µA/%DDM
ff) CLR DDM alarm 90 µA/%DDM
g) CLR SDM alarm high %
gg) CLR SDM alarm low %
h) CLR RF alarm dB
STB MON STB MON STB MON STB MON STB MON
if) STB CL DDM alarm 150 µA/%DDM
iiff) STB CL DDM alarm 90 µA/%DDM
jg) STB CL SDM alarm high %
jjgg) STB CL SDM alarm low %
kh) STB CL RF alarm dB
li) STB DS DDM alarm wide µA/%DDM
llii) STB DS DDM alarm narrow µA/%DDM
m) STB CLR DDM alarm 150 µA/%DDM
mm) STB CLR DDM alarm 90 µA/%DDM
n) STB CLR SDM alarm high %
nn) STB CLR SDM alarm low %
o) STB CLR RF alarm dB
if) to oii) Hot Standby only

Table 4-9 Monitor Alarm Limits check

23136-I4/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
Date
a) Near Field Monitor Delay sec
b) 20 seconds inhibit sec
Table 4-10 Near Field Monitor Delay and 20 seconds inhibit
Date
a) Battery terminal voltage volts
b) Battery terminal voltage volts
c) Battery terminal voltage volts
Table 4-11 Battery maintenance
Date
Tx1/Tx2
Azimuth %DDM %SDM %DDM %SDM %DDM %SDM %DDM %SDM
TRH CL
TRH 90 Hz
TRH 150 Hz
Table 4-12 Field modulation check

23136-I4/Rev.4/02-Jul-07

23136-I4/Rev.4/02-Jul-07
5. Section 5 Corrective Maintenance
5.1 Overview
This section contains procedures for locating and replacing faulty Line Replaceable Units
(LRU).
5.2 Diagnostic functions
5.2.1 General description
If the LLZ or GP fails, the RMM software should be used to locate the faulty LRU.
The RMM software can perform two types of diagnostic tests based on the measurements
made available by the embedded RMS software in the NORMARC 7000B cabinet:
1. “Current data diagnostics”. The diagnose is here based on live data received from an
connected ILS rack or based on historical data sets (snap shots) of measurements
previously stored to disk
2. Alarm event diagnostics”. This diagnostics function attempts to report the cause of a
transmitter changeover or a changeover/shutdown situation. The diagnose is based on
a particular alarm event in the event list and the corresponding measurements in an
alarm storage that will be downloaded from the rack
The diagnostic tests are based on passive reading of various measurement points inside the
NORMARC 70XXB cabinet and the data from the executive monitors. No special signals need
to be injected for the algorithms to work (although the transmitters must be turned on).
The operator needs to be logged in at access level 1 to perform a Current data diagnostics
and an Alarm event diagnostics. Since only access level 1 is required, the diagnostics tests
can therefore be performed locally or from a remote location using a modem connection.
5.2.2 Current data diagnostics
The Current data diagnostics is invoked by selecting the ILS | Current data diagnostics menu
item in the RMM software.
There are two typical cases in which the current data diagnostics function may be used:
1. On an operative ILS system, on which a warning situation is indicated. In this case the
current data diagnostics can be used to quickly find the cause of the warning without
taking the system out of service
2. In manual mode after a transmitter changeover or shutdown situation (monitor alarm).
The system can then be set to transmit on air, and the current data diagnostics used to
locate the module that is causing the monitor alarms
For detailed information about the algorithms used in the automatic Current data diagnostics,
refer to Section 5.4.3.

23136-I5/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
5.2.3 Alarm event diagnostics
The RMS subsystem in the NORMARC 7000B cabinet continuously reads data sets from
monitor 1, 2 and the standby monitor. The last 30 seconds of data are stored in an internal ring
buffer. This buffer is partitioned in groups with different sampling periods:
• For the last 2 seconds, 10 data sets are stored each second for monitor 1 and 2.
Standby monitor data sets are stored at ¼ of this frequency
• For the last 10 seconds, one data set is stored each second
• For the last 30 seconds, monitor 1, 2, standby and maintenance data are stored every
5th second
When a changeover or shutdown alarm occurs the RMS does the following:
1. Stores the ring buffer with the last 30 seconds of monitor and maintenance data from
before the alarm in an internal alarm storage buffer. This buffer resides in non-volatile
RAM
2. Places an changeover or shutdown alarm event in the event list. This event includes
alarm state information for each monitor-channel. This information is used by the RMM
software for diagnosing the alarm event
The RMS keeps the seven most recent alarm storage buffers. A changeover-only situation fills
one alarm storage buffer, while a changeover with subsequent shutdown situation uses two
alarm storage buffers.
No alarm storage buffers will be saved if the equipment is in service mode when the alarm
occurs. (Service mode is activated by any of the following switches: Local, Manual, Write Pro-
tect disable, Interlock Override and the Access Grant enable switch on the Remote Control.)
The data in the buffers can be downloaded by the RMM software when a user initiates an
alarm event diagnostics (if the data is not already downloaded), and used in the diagnostic
algorithms described in the following sections.
The operator initiates an alarm event diagnostics by first selecting a changeover or shutdown
alarm in the Event List and then selects the “Event diagnostics” button.
Once the alarm storage has been downloaded it is also possible to display the individual sam-
ples. This method can be used, in addition to the automatic diagnostic function, to find the
cause of changeover or shutdown alarms.
For information on how to download and display historical data see Appendix D.
For detailed information about the algorithms used in the automatic Alarm event diagnostics,
refer to Section 5.4.4.
5.2.4 Manual fault diagnosis
Should the automatic diagnostic functions fail or give misleading results, manual diagnosis
using external measurement equipment can be performed.

23136-I5/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
5.3 LRU change procedures
5.3.1 Replacing units
When replacing any faulty module(s), please follow this procedure:

• Make sure the ILS configuration file from the last flight check is available if one of the
following boards need to be replaced: MO 1212, LF 1576, or RMA 1215
• Make a print report of the monitor and maintenance values to document what the key
parameters were before the faulty module(s) was/were changed
• Power down the system
• Make sure you are wearing an ESD chain that is connected to either the ILS cabinet or
some other grounded point
• Replace the faulty module
• Power up the system
• Perform necessary adjustments for the unit in question; please refer to Section 5.3.2-
5.3.10
• Check the Monitor and Maintenance parameters, make a new printout and compare
with the printed report made when the system was operating normally
Due to the complexity of the boards and the major use of SMD components we do not recom-
mend trying to repair modules at site unless specially skilled personnel with extensive experi-
ence in repair techniques and the necessary repair equipment is present.
The ILS cabinet is modularly built up to make it possible to change smaller parts of the system
at a relatively low cost.
5.3.2 MF 1211/MF 1219 replacement
PREPARATIONS:
Power down system. Remove old unit. Check the settings of the step attenuators on the old
unit. Set the attenuators on the new board to the same settings, and place the new unit on an
extender board.
ADJUSTMENT (DS-CHANNEL):
Pre-check. Check that all monitor inputs from MCU are correct. (Use field meas-
urement instrument NORMARC 3710/7710). Make a note of the val-
ues.
RF-level. . Set R338 in middle position. Set strap fields S++ on connector P2 and
adjust R338 until TP23 reads 240mV. Adjust RF potentiometer R342
on front of MF 1211 card until DS RF level reads exactly 3,0 volts.
AGC Time. Adjust AGC timing pot R49 until DC value measured at TP1 are the
same with transmitters on and off.

23136-I5/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
SDM. Adjust SDM pot R48 until the DS SDM reading is the same as the
value measured with the 3710/7710.
DDM. Check that the DS DDM reading is the same as with 3710/7710 (Nom-
inal Value may be set in RMM program to give a DDM screen read-out
of 0%).
DDM Adjustment
Note: Adjustment is only required in connection with calibration or when the MON1 DDM is different
from MON2 DDM
Adjustment Procedure:
• Power down the system, and place the MF12xx card on an extender board. Power up
the system again
• Turn on the transmitters (Course and Clearance).
• Tweak potentiometers (they are located behind the 4 holes in the protection cover
close the red locking-arm. See the picture below) until monitor reads correct DDM
• Repeat the SDM adjustment and recheck that the DDM is correct. If necessary repeat
the DDM / SDM adjustment until both parameter readings are correct
Figure 5-1 MF1211/MF 1219 adjustments points

23136-I5/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
ADJUSTMENT (CLR-CHANNEL):
ues.
RF-level. Set R1338 in middle position. Set strap fields S++ on connector P1002
and adjust R1338 until TP1023 reads 240mV. Adjust RF potentiometer
R1342 on front of MF12119 card until CLR RF level reads exactly 3,0
volts. AGC.
AGC Time. Adjust AGC timing pot R1049 until DC value measured at TP 2 is the
SDM. Adjust SDM pot R1048 until the CLR SDM reading is the same as the
values measured with the 3710/7710.
DDM. Check that the CLR DDM readings are the same as with 3710/7710
(Nominal Value may be set in RMM program to give a DDM screen
readout of 0%).
DDM Adjustment
from MON2 DDM
the system again
See Figure 5-1
ADJUSTMENT (CL CHANNEL):
ues.
RF-level. . Set R2338 in middle position. Set strap fields S++ on connector P2002
R2342 on front of MF 1211 card until RF level reads exactly 3,0 volts.
AGC Time. Adjust AGC timing pot R2049 until DC values measured at TP 3 is the

23136-I5/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
SDM. Adjust SDM pot R2048 until the CL SDM readings is the same as the
DDM. . Check that the CL DDM readings are the same as with 3710/7710.
DDM Adjustment
from MON2 DDM
the system again
See Figure 5-1
ADJUSTMENT (NF CHANNEL):
ues.
RF-level. . Set R3338 in middle position. Set strap fields S++ on connector P3002
R3342 on front of MF 1211 card until NF RF level reads exactly 3,0
volts.
AGC Time. Adjust AGC timing pot R3049 until the DC value measured at TP4 are
the same with transmitters on and off.
SDM. Adjust SDM pot R3048 until the NF SDM readings is the same as the
DDM . Check that the NF DDM reading is the same as with 3710/7710.
DDM Adjustment
from MON2 DDM
the system again

23136-I5/Rev.6/02-Jul-07

See Figure 5-1
CHECK:
Power down system. Remove the extension card and place the MF 1211 inside cabinet. Turn
transmitters on.
Monitor. Use RMM software to check monitor readings for all four channels. RF
level should now be 3.0V, SDM 40% and DDM 0,0%. It might be nec-
essary to make small adjustments to the RF Level with potentiometers
R342 (DS), R1342 (CLR), R2342 (CL) and R3342 (NF).
Maintenance. Use RMM software to check maintenance values for MF 1211 card.
There shall be no warnings (if the transmitters are on).
5.3.3 PS 1227 replacement
PREPARATIONS:
Power down system. Remove old unit and place the new unit in the vacant slot.
ADJUSTMENT:
No adjustments are necessary.
CHECK:
System: Remove the other PS 1227 unit. Power up the system. Turn transmit-
ters on and set the correct transmitter to air (Transmitter 1 to check
Powersupply 1). Check the monitor readings to verify correct transmit-
ter behaviour.
Maintenance: Power down the ILS, re-insert the other PS 1227 unit, and power up
again. Check the RMM maintenance readings of the PS 1227 system
voltages; check both power supplies.
5.3.4 OS 1221 replacement
PREPARATIONS:
Power down system. Remove old unit. Write down the strap settings of the old OS 1221A
(LLZ) or 1221B (GP) card and make sure the new card is identically configured. Please refer
to 9.7.1 to verify the frequency selection.

23136-I5/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
ADJUSTMENT:
The frequency of the RF output signal is normally factory adjusted. To adjust the frequency,
power down the ILS, place the OS 1221 card on an extender board and adjust by fine-tuning
the capacitor C1. Turn off 90, 150 and 1020 Hz modulation tones from RMM software. Meas-
ure the RF frequency at the CSB outlet at the front of the ILS cabinet.
Adjust until frequency is less than 1 kHz from operating frequency. Trimmer C1 adjusts course
and clearance frequencies simultaneously.
CHECK:
Power down the system and place the card inside cabinet.
Maintenance. Check the maintenance parameters for the OS 1221 unit.
5.3.5 MO 1212 replacement
PREPARATIONS:
• Power down system. Remove old unit
• Compare the version numbers of the removable EPROM on the card. Make sure the
new unit contains the same or newer EPROM software version
• Place the new card in the vacant slot
ADJUSTMENT:
1. Use RMM software to upload configuration to the replaced monitor board
2. Check that the CL, DS, NF and CLR measurements in the RMM software are the
same as before the replacement. Adjust the channel gains on the corresponding mon-
itor frontend board if any discrepancies are seen
CHECK:
Verify monitor limits with an external ILS generator, as described in Section 4.
Monitor. Make sure the ILS is operating in normal state (transmitters on) and
check that all parameters are normal.
Maintenance. Check the maintenance parameters for the MO 1212 unit.
Final. Make a printout of the monitor values (Print Report) and settings.
Compare with previous report taken before the board was replaced.
Check that the alarm limits and delays are the same as before.
5.3.6 TCA 1218 replacement
PREPARATIONS:
Power down system. Remove old unit.

23136-I5/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
ADJUSTMENT:
Make sure that all configuration straps (U6 and U13) are set as on the previous module. The
best way to do this is to exchange the U6 and U13 component platforms.
Compare the version numbers of the EPROM- and FPGA units on the board. Make sure the
new unit contains the same EPROM and FPGA versions.
CHECK:
Start up: Check that the ILS front panel display shows the correct equipment
setting (e.g. NORMARC 7013B Two-frequency Localizer).
Maintenance: Check the maintenance parameters for the TCA 1218 unit.
Front Panel: Set the local/remote switch in local position and the auto/manual
switch in manual position. Check that it is possible to turn transmitters
on/off and perform a changeover.
Integrity test: Turn main transmitter(s) on. Set the auto/manual switch in auto posi-
tion. Use RMM software to switch off the 90 Hz tones of both main
transmitters. Observe that a changeover, and after a while a shutdown
takes place.
For more extensive integrity testing of the monitors, please refer to Section 4.
5.3.7 RMA 1215
5.3.7.1 RMA 1215 Battery replacement
Battery replacement may lead to loss of the historical information (alarm log, medium time log,
long time log and event list) stored in the cabinet. The real time clock of the cabinet may also
be lost.
NO CRITICAL SETTINGS/CONFIGURATIONS ARE LOST.
To avoid loss of any historical information download this to the computer BEFORE changing
the battery.
If the battery is changed in less than 15 sec. loss of historical information and real time clock is
normally avoided.
PREPARATIONS:
Download all historical information (Alarm log, medium and long time log.). The events from
the cabinet are automatically downloaded when you connect to the cabinet.
Get hold of a new battery. Power down the system. Pull out the RMA 1215 module. Change
battery.

23136-I5/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
ADJUSTMENT:
After power up, log in as MASTER and check the real time clock of the cabinet [ILS settings –
General... – Date/time]. If necessary change the time.
Warning Lithium Battery Safety Hazard
Cabinet contains a Lithium Battery coin type CR2032 located on board RM 1213. Replace
only with CR2032 type battery and install with + pole facing out as marked on battery holder.
Following precautions for Safe Handling and Use of Lithium Batteries should be noted:
• Do not disassemble, crush, expose to fire or high temperatures/sunlight
• Do not short or install with incorrect polarity
• Dispose in accordance with appropriate regulations. Lithium button cell batteries such
as CR2032 contains so little lithium that it can normally be disposed of in the normal
municipal waste stream
5.3.7.2 RMA 1215 Module replacement
PREPARATIONS:
Power down system. Remove old unit. Compare the version numbers of the removable RMS
EPROM on the board. Make sure the new unit contains the same or newer EPROM software
version.
Insert jumpers S1 to connect to battery. If already inserted - change battery.
ADJUSTMENT:
• Use RMM software to upload configuration to RMA 1215
• The following settings are not stored in the configuration file and must be manually
updated: ILS Date/time, Modem configuration, User configuration, Lamp mappings
and Medium storage sample interval
• If the version number of the RMS EPROM is lower than 13, it is necessary to upload
configuration to monitor 1, 2 and standby monitor if present. Note that if this is done it
is also necessary to perform a monitor limits test as described in Section 4
CHECK:
Maintenance. Check the maintenance parameters for the RMA 1215 unit.
5.3.8 LF 1576 replacement
PREPARATIONS:
Power down system. Remove old unit and place the new unit on an extender board.

23136-I5/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
ADJUSTMENT:
Turn on transmitters. It is important to use RMM software to upload LF 1576-configuration to

ILS. When the LF-configuration has been correctly uploaded, only minor adjustments should
be necessary. (Follow the procedure in Section 5 to re-adjust both/all transmitters.)
CHECK:
Maintenance. Check the maintenance parameters for the replaced LF 1576 board.
Transmitters. Check waveforms as described in Sections 5 and 7 for all transmitters.
5.3.9 Coaxial relay
PREPARATIONS:
Remove old unit and mount new unit in the cabinet.
ADJUSTMENT:
None.
CHECK:
Set the equipment in LOCAL and MANUAL. Set MAIN SELECT and TX TO AIR to TX1. Turn
on TX1 COURSE and TX1 CLEARANCE (if applicable) by the TX1 pushbuttons. Leave TX2
off. Verify that the monitor 1 and monitor 2 readings for CL, DS and CLR are normal. Turn off
the transmitters.
Set MAIN SELECT and TX TO AIR to TX2. Turn on TX2 COURSE and TX2 CLEARANCE (if
applicable) by the TX2 pushbuttons. Leave TX1 off. Verify that the monitor 1 and monitor 2
readings for CL, DS and CLR are normal. Turn off the transmitters. Set the equipment to
AUTO and REMOTE.
5.3.10 LPA 1580/GPA 1581/GPA 1582 replacement
PREPARATIONS:
Power down system. Remove old unit and place the new unit in cabinet.
ADJUSTMENT:
Turn on transmitters. Follow the procedure below to check/re-adjust the transmitters.
CHECK:
Check waveforms as described here and in Section 7.

23136-I5/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
5.3.10.1 Adjustment of the I Q ILS transmitter
Field adjustment of the transmitter may normally only be necessary in the following situations:
• Installing a new system
• Changing channel frequency of existing system
• Replacing a faulty unit
The following procedure describes how the LPA/GPA modules should be checked/aligned if a
major discrepancy is observed. It may be necessary to carry out the procedure during the
installation phase of a new installation, if the channel frequency of the system is being
changed or when a replacement module is put into the system.
At the end of the procedure there is also a description describing how to set system parame-
ters as DDM, SDM CSB/SBO phase even if these parameter adjustment really are system
adjustments and will normally be done during antenna system alignment.
5.3.10.2 Detailed alignment of LPA/GPA module.
All adjustments is to be accessed via the RMM program logged in as level 3 user or higher.
The alignments are to be carried out both for CSB and for SBO. The parameters to read and
adjust for the SBO transmitter are given in brackets after the CSB parameter.
5.3.10.3 List of external test instruments.
DDM-meter / PIR
RF-power meter
LF-oscilloscope
5.3.10.4 Loop phase optimisation
Explanation:
Provide optimal (symmetrical) operating point for the phase/amplitude feedback signal into the
Error Amplifier.
Open Transmitter settings window. Select PA Adj. tab. Select Transmitter TXx COU. Select
Loop phase tab. Click Enable test mode.

23136-I5/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
HBK 1407-1
Figure 5-2 Loop Phase Tab
Observe Demodulator CSB/SBO angle measurements, they shall be -135° ±10°.
If the angle range is outside the range, adjust the value for CSB (SBO) Loop until the angle is
within the range given in the adjustment range
For adjustment double click on CSB (SBO) Loop Phase or select the parameter by clicking on
it and then click the Edit button.
Deactivate the Enable Test mode.
5.3.11 Offset adjustment CSB
Explanation:
Cancel demodulator dc offsets, i.e. provide zero dc output signal with no rf input signal to the
demodulator. In the SBO transmitter set a balanced SBO signal.
Connect a LF oscilloscope to CSB BNC test connector on TXx. Observe the normal demodu-
lated CSB waveform.

23136-I5/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
CSB
5
CSB
4
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
Select Offset tab. Click Enable test mode. Click on I-signal radio button. Observe feedback
message: Q off.
1. Select Tx
3. Observe
2. Activate
4. Adjust
HBK 1409-1
Figure 5-3 Offset Tab
Observe on the scope that the normal CSB waveform has changed to a lower level single
tone demodulated pattern. (Expand the scope level).

23136-I5/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
CSB: 90 Hz off and DC Offset
4,5
3,5
2,5
1,5
0,5
0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
Figure 5-4 Before adjustment

CSB: 90 Hz off
4,5
3,5
2,5
1,5
0,5
0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
Figure 5-5 After adjustment
If the peak values levels are not equal, double click on CSB OFFSET I and adjust the value
until the peak levels are equal. Close the adjustments window.
Click on Q-signal radio button. Observe that text changes to I-Off. If the peak values levels are
not equal, double click on CSB OFFSET Q and adjust the value until the peak levels are
equal. Close the adjustments window.

23136-I5/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
5.3.12 Offset adjustment SBO (n/a for GP CLR transmitter)
Explanation:
Cancel demodulator dc offsets, i.e. provide zero dc output signal with no rf input signal to the
demodulator. In the SBO transmitter set a balanced SBO signal.
Move the oscilloscope to the SBO BNC test connector. Observe the normal demodulated
SBO waveform.
SBO: Normal signal
0
0 0,005 0,01 0,015 0,02 0,025 0,03 0,035
Select Offset tab. Click Enable test mode. Click on I-signal radio button. Observe feedback
message: Q off.
1. Select Tx
3. Observe
2. Activate
4. Adjust
HBK 1410-1
Figure 5-6 Offset Tab

23136-I5/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
Observe on the scope that the SBO waveform has decreased in level.
SBO: DC Offset Error
0
0 0,005 0,01 0,015 0,02 0,025 0,03 0,035
Figure 5-7 Before adjustment
SBO: Normal signal
0
0 0,005 0,01 0,015 0,02 0,025 0,03 0,035
Figure 5-8 After adjustment
Look for the smallest level peaks. If the peak values levels are not equal, double click on SBO
OFFSET I and adjust the value until the peak levels are equal. Close the adjustments window.
Click on Q-signal radio button. Observe that text changes to I-Off. If the peak values levels are
not equal, double click on SBO OFFSET Q and adjust the value until the peak levels are
equal. Close the adjustments window.
Deactivate the Enable Test mode.

23136-I5/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
5.3.13 Calibrate internal power measurements
Connect a calibrated power meter to the CSB (SBO) output of the Cabinet. Switch on TXx to
air.
Select Power tab. If the displayed value differs from the external power meter value, adjust
CSB forward Power (SBO forward Power) scaling factor.
1. Select Tx
2. Observe
3. Adjust
HBK 1404-1
Figure 5-9 Power Tab

23136-I5/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
5.4 Detailed description of the automatic diagnostic algorithms
5.4.1 Overview
The following sections begins with a description of the diagnostic solutions that may be
reported by the software, then continues with detailed descriptions of the Current data diag-
nostics and the Alarm event diagnostics function.
5.4.2 Possible diagnostic solutions
The following table lists and describes the diagnostic solutions that may be reported by the
diagnostic functions in the RMM software.
Diagnostic solution Description

MONITOR 1 Monitor 1 (MO1212) (LRU)
MONITOR 2 Monitor 2 (MO1212) (LRU)
STDBY MON Standby monitor (MO1212) (LRU)
LF GENERATOR 1 LF generator 1 (LF1576) (LRU)
LF GENERATOR 2 LF generator 2 (LF1576) (LRU)
MONITOR FRONTEND 1 Monitor frontend 1 (MF1211/19) (LRU)
MONITOR FRONTEND 2 Monitor frontend 2 (MF1211/19) (LRU)
MONITOR FRONTEND STANDBY Standby monitor frontend (MF1211/19) (LRU)
OSCILLATOR 1 Oscillator 1 (OS1221) (LRU)
OSCILLATOR 2 Oscillator 2 (OS1221) (LRU)
LPA/GPA TX1 COURSE LPA/GPA TX1 COURSE (LRU)
LPA/GPA TX1 CLEARANCE LPA/GPA TX1 CLEARANCE (LRU)
LPA/GPA TX2 COURSE LPA/GPA TX2 COURSE (LRU)
LPA/GPA TX2 CLEARANCE LPA/GPA TX2 CLEARANCE (LRU)
RMS BOARD RMS board (RMA1215) (LRU)
POWER SUPPLY 1 Power supply 1 (PS1227) (LRU)
POWER SUPPLY 2 Power supply 2 (PS1227) (LRU)
EXTERNAL POWER External power.
EXTERNAL FACTOR An external factor influencing monitor measurements.
COMMON CABLING Cabling or any part of the system that is common for
the transmitters or monitor system, e.g. antenna ele-
ment, cable, distribution- or monitoring networks.
TX CONTROL TX control board (TCA1218) (LRU)
REMOTE CONTROL Remote control unit (RCA1240) (LRU) or its commu-
nication link.
ANTENNA SYSTEM Antenna system.
USER INPUT User defined input on CI1210 is in warning state.
UNABLE TO ISOLATE The diagnostic function was unable to determine a
possible faulty module.

23136-I5/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
5.4.3 Current data diagnostics
The following sub-sections describes the tests performed by the RMM software for current
data diagnostics. All diagnostic solutions detected are recorded and presented to the opera-
tor. If a diagnostic solution is found to be the result of more than one test, the solution that is
the result of most tests will be listed first.
5.4.3.1 I2C read error on any board implies a failure on that board
If a board is reported with “ERROR” status there is probably a fault on this board. “ERROR”
indicates that the RMS does not detect valid I2C-bus acknowledge signals from the board
when attempting to read its maintenance data. All boards, except the TX Control board, in the
NORMARC 70XXB cabinet have an I2C-interface to the RMS board.
Note: If several boards are indicated with “ERROR” status, the problem may be a faulty I2C interface
on the RMS board, or any of the boards may have a “stuck-at” error on the I2C bus signals. If
both the COU and CLR transmitters are instructed with “ERROR” status, the problem may be a
faulty I2C interface or RMS bus communication with the corresponding LF generator board.
5.4.3.2 Maintenance parameter warnings
5.4.3.2.1 External power supply tests
DIAGNOSTIC ALGORITHM:
If there is a maintenance warning indication on the external power module, there is a problem
with the 27V power supply, the battery chargers or the system is on battery operation.
5.4.3.2.2 Power supply 1 and 2 tests
1. If there is a maintenance warning indication on power supply 1 and not on power sup-
ply 2, or vice versa, there is a fault on the power supply which has the warning
2. If there is a maintenance warning on both power supply boards AND not on the exter-
nal power module both power supplies are faulty

23136-I5/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
5.4.3.2.3 Maintenance warnings without follow-errors
A maintenance warning on a board listed in the following table indicates that there is a fault on
that board.
Board
LF generator 1 or 2
Oscillator 1 or 2
RMS board
Monitor 1 or 2
TX Control board
User defined inputs
5.4.3.2.4 Power amplifier tests
Warnings on a PA implies PA failure if there is no warning or error on the corresponding OS or

LF.
DESCRIPTION:
The algorithm assumes that a warning indication on any of the measurements on a PA means
there is a failure on this PA, if the corresponding OS and LF have no maintenance warning
indications. (A fault on the OS and LF may cause a warning on the PA.)
5.4.3.2.5 Monitor 1 and 2 frontend tests
Warning on monitor frontend 1 implies monitor frontend 1 failure if there is no warning on mon-
itor frontend 2 and vice versa.
DESCRIPTION:
The maintenance measurements from the monitor frontend boards will be affected by the
monitor input signals, i.e. the diagnostic algorithm can not use these measurements alone to
reliably diagnose fault on the monitor frontend boards. The algorithm assumes that both fron-
tends are fed the same input signals. If a maintenance warning then exists on one, but not
both of the boards, this board is assumed to be faulty. If maintenance warnings exists on both
boards no knowledge is gained about monitor frontend health status.

23136-I5/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
5.4.3.2.6 Remote control tests
If there is a “RC link status” warning, there is a problem with the remote control or its data link.
DESCRIPTION:
A warning on the RC link status indicates that the TXC does not receive valid data from the
5.4.3.2.7 Transmitter control tests
TX control “EPROM check” or “Integrity check” warnings indicate a failure on the TXC board.
5.4.3.2.8 Standby monitor tests
If there is a warning on the standby monitor board this board is faulty.
5.4.3.2.9 Standby monitor frontend tests
If there is a warning on the standby monitor frontend board AND there is no warning or alarm
indication on the standby monitor measurements then the standby monitor frontend board is
faulty.
5.4.3.2.10 User defined parameters
If there is a warning on any of the user defined inputs then “User defined input” is faulty.
5.4.3.3 Monitor self-test error
Monitor self-test failure indicates an error on the monitor board that reports this failure.
5.4.3.4 Monitor DC-loop alarm
If both monitor 1 AND monitor 2 reports DC-loop alarms or warnings the antenna has a broken
element.

23136-I5/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
5.4.3.5 Monitor warning tests
Figure 5-10 illustrates the tests done by the RMM software for automatically diagnosing faults
that result in monitor 1 and 2 warning indications.
Start monitor
warning tests.
CL or DS CLR warning
NF warning on DF warning on
warning on both No No on both No
both monitors? both monitors?
monitors? monitors?
Yes Yes No
Yes
Yes
Warning on NF
RF on one or No
Warning on both mon.?
Yes
active OS?
Yes
No
Active OS is faulty
Common cabling is "External factor" is

Warning on faulty reported as faulty.
Yes
active LF?
No Active LF is faulty
Active course or
clearance PA is faulty
Monitor warning
tests done.
Figure 5-10 Flow diagram for Monitor warning tests
5.4.3.6 Monitor disagree
If one monitor indicates delayed warning, raw alarm or alarm on any parameter and the other
monitor does not, then the monitor which indicates the delayed warning, raw alarm or alarm is
probably faulty.

23136-I5/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
5.4.4 Alarm event diagnostics
5.4.4.1 Changeover without shutdown
The flow diagram in Figure 5-11 describes the algorithm used to diagnosing a changeover
alarm that is not followed by a shutdown alarm. The RMM software uses the maximum config-
ured monitor alarm delay to determine whether a changeover alarm is followed by a shut-
down. If no shutdown alarm event occurred within the maximum configured alarm delay after
the changeover alarm event this algorithm will be used.
No maintenance
Start changeover
warnings
diagnostics
CL or DS Main COU TX is
Maint warn on Main OS is faulty Yes
Yes alarm? faulty
main OS?
No
No
External obstruction
NF alarm? Yes is blocking signal
Maint warn on
Yes Main LF is faulty
main LF?
No
No
Main CLR TX is
CLR alarm? Yes
faulty
Maint warn on Main COU TX is
Yes
main COU TX? faulty
No
No
DF alarm? Yes Main OS is faulty

Maint warn on Main CLR TX is
Yes
main CLR TX? faulty
No
No
Unable to diagnose
fault
No maintenance
warnings
Changeover
diagnose done
Figure 5-11 Flow diagram for diagnosing a changeover-only alarm.
5.4.4.2 Changeover with subsequent shutdown
A changeover alarm event that is followed by a shutdown alarm event within the maximum
configured monitor delay will be diagnosed as described in this section. The algorithm used
depends on the voting configuration.

23136-I5/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
5.4.4.3 Algorithm for systems with 2/2 voting
Figure 5-12 shows the flow diagram for diagnosing changeover/shutdown situations on sys-
tems with 2/2 voting.
DESCRIPTION:
The algorithm is based on the fact that a fault (in a 2/2 voting system) which causes a com-
plete shutdown, must be some point that is common for the transmitter section and the moni-
toring section.
Start changeover/
shutdown diagnose.
Is NF DDM or SDM External obstruction

alarm the cause of Yes
is faulty.
both alarms?
No
Is there maint.
The TXC board is
warnings on the Yes
faulty.
TXC board?
No
Common cabling is
faulty.
No
Changeover/ shutdown
diagnose done.
Figure 5-12 Flow diagram for diagnosing changeover/shutdown alarms.

23136-I5/Rev.6/02-Jul-07

23136-I5/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
6. Section 6 Parts List
6.1 Parts Lists
This section contains a tabulation of electrical and certain mechanical assemblies and parts;
i.e. chassis-mounted components, circuit cards assemblies, and modules of the equipment to
the lowest replaceable unit (LRU).
6.1.1 Explanation of Parts Lists Form

• Symbol/Item No.: References the symbol and item no. for each replaceable electronic
part in the equipment
• Fig. No.: Lists the figure no of the illustration in which the part is shown
• Manufacturers Part No.: Park Air Systems part number
• UOC: Usable on Code: Lists the code assigned to equipment model numbers and
identifies the components used in each model configuration. Se Usable On Code
Index

23136-I6/Rev.3/02-Jul-07
6.1.2 Parts Lists.
Electronic Subsystems group

Symbol/ Fig No Description Manufac- UOC Qty/ Qty/
Item No turers 7013B 7014B
Part No
NM 7013B 6-1 NORMARC 7013B Localizer Cabinet 22933 A X -
NM 7014B 6-1 NORMARC 7014B Localizer Cabinet 22934 B - X
6-1 LCA 1584A LLZ 2-freq. Cab.Ass. 22277 A X -
6-1 LCA 1584B LLZ 2-freq. Cab.Ass. 22278 B - X
CB1, CB2 6-1 Circuit Breaker 23130 C, D 2 2

F07 6-3 Fuse 13368 C, D 1 1
C01, C02 6-3 Capacitor 10533 C, D 1 2
M2 6-1 Cover Plate 22479 C, D 1 1
M1 6-1 Front Panel, Top 22488 C, D 1 1
M3 6-1 Front Panel 22819 C, D 1 1
M5 6-1 Collar Screw 22486 C, D 24 24
SPL 6-2 Power splitter 11533 C, D 4 4
MF 1211A 6-1 MF 1211A LLZ Monitor Frontend 18564 C, D 2 3

PS 1227C 6-1 PS 1227C Power Supply 23088 C, D 2 2
OS 1221A 6-1 OS 1221A LLZ RF-oscillator 18591 C, D 2 2
MO 1212A 6-1 MO 1212A Monitor 18567 C, D 2 3
MB 1575A 6-2 MB 1575A Motherboard 22390 C, D 1 1
TCA 6-1 TCA 1218A TX Control Assembly 18510 C 1 0
1218A
TCA 6-1 TCA 1218B TX Control Assembly 18511 D 0 1
1218B
RMA 6-1 RMA 1215A RMS Assembly 18509 C, D 1 1
1215A
LF 1576A 6-1 LF 1576A LF-generator 22441 C, D 2 2
LPA 6-1 LPA 1580A LLZ Power Amp. Assy 22272 C, D 4 4
1580A
RL1,RL2, 6-2 Relay 13124 C, D 4 4
RL3, RL4
DL1, DL3 6-2 Dummy Load 21980 C, D 2 2
DL2, DL4 6-2 Dummy Load 10605 C, D 2 2
DC 420C 6-2 DC 420A Directional Coupler 16577 C, D 2 5
AT01, 6-2 Attentuator 20dB BNC 11722 D 0 3
AT02,
AT03
CI 1210A 6-3 CI 1210A Connection Interface Board 18561 C, D 1 1

BW 1566A 6-3 BW 1566A Battery Warning 22229 D 0 1
F1,F4 6-3 Fuse 13362 C, D 2 2
J8,J21,J26 6-3 Connector (CI 1210) 12408 C, D 3 3
J9-J17, 6-3 Connector (CI 1210) 12406 C, D 13 13
J20, J27-
J29
J1, J4, J6, 6-3 Connector (BW 1566) 12406 D 0 4
J9

23136-I6/Rev.3/02-Jul-07
(Contin- Electronic Subsystems group

Symbol/ Fig No Description Manufac- UOC Qty/ Qty/
Item No turers 7013B 7014B
Part No
BC 1361C Battery Charger 22576 A, B 2 2
Battery 85Ah 15004 B 0 4
Battery Circuit Breaker 20332 A, B 2 4
Battery 115Ah 15008 A 2 0
RCA 1240C Remote Control Assy * 21342 E 1 0
RCA 1240D Remote Control Assy ** 21344 E 0 1
MP 1574A Meter Panel 22261 E 0 1
SKA 1229B Service Kit Assy 22945 A, B 1 1

EB 1349A Extension Board 18700 A, B 1 1
EB 1245A Coax cable Ext. Board 18662 A, B 1 1
* RCA 1240C can in some locations be replaced by RCA 1240E (part no. 22248)
** RCA 1240D can in some locations be replaced by RCA 1240F (part no. 22249)
6.1.3 Usable on code index
USABLE ON CODE INDEX

Usable Description Park Air Sys-
On Code tems Part.
No.
A NORMARC 7013B LLZ CABINET 22933
B NORMARC 7014B LLZ CABINET 22934
C LCA 1584A LLZ 2-FRQ. CAB. ASS. 22277
D LCA 1584B LLZ 2-FRQ. HOT STB. CAB. ASS. 22278
E Tower Equipment -

23136-I6/Rev.3/02-Jul-07
6.2 Figures
Figure 6-1 NORMARC 7013B-7014B LLZ cabinet

23136-I6/Rev.3/02-Jul-07
Figure 6-2 NORMARC 7013B-7014B LLZ cabinet, Rear View

23136-I6/Rev.3/02-Jul-07
Figure 6-3 NORMARC 70xxB LLZ & GP cabinet, wall mount side

23136-I6/Rev.3/02-Jul-07
7. Section 7 Installation and Initial Set-up
7.1 Mechanical Installation
The NORMARC 70XXB cabinet is constructed for mounting on a wall. For easy operation, the
keyboard/display section should be in eye/shoulder height (140-160cm). The RF connectors
may be mounted either on the cabinet top or the cabinet bottom. The free space required
around the cabinet is approximately one by one meter, see Figure 7-1
1.0m
0.9m
HBK594-2
Figure 7-1 NORMARC 70XXB required mounting space (top view)
7.1.1 Mounting Kit MK 1343A
If the wall is not able to carry the weight of the cabinet (see technical specifications), Park Air
Systems AS supplies a wall mounting kit, MK 1343A. This kit is dimensioned for standard 60
cm space between studs. For easy mounting, place the cabinet on the rest screws (B) before
entering the mounting screws (A). This is shown in the enlarged view in Figure 7-2

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
Figure 7-2 NORMARC 70XXB mounted on wall with MK 1343A

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
600
Hex. Screw 8x50 (B16)

Washer M8
808
606
1855 - 1890
919 - 954
Adjust. screw
HBK 1260-1
Figure 7-3 Wall mount dimersions (MK 1343A)
7.1.2 Moving RF Connectors
If desired the RF connectors may be moved from the cabinet top to the bottom or vice versa,
as illustrated in Figure 7-3. The back section (F) of the main cabinet has similar hole patterns
in the top and bottom flange. To move the connectors, follow these steps:
Remove all rubber grommets from the holes.
Disconnect all coaxial cables from the feed-through connectors.
Remove all feed-through connectors.

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
Move the metal bracket with anti-turn holes from the bottom to the top while disconnecting the
grounding strap from the lower end of the L-shaped vertical rail and reconnecting at the top or
vice versa.
Reinstall the feed-through connectors in the new position.
Reconnect the coaxial cables.
Reinsert the rubber grommets in all open holes.
Figure 7-4 Moving RF connectors

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.2 Electrical Installation
This paragraph describes the external electrical connections of the NORMARC 7013B-7014B
main cabinet.
7.2.1 Connection Overview
The ILS main cabinet has three connector groups, illustrated in Figure 7-5
• The ILS RF signals to and from the antenna system are connected at the bottom of the
main cabinet. These connectors may be moved to the top, see Mechanical Installation
• The power supply (supplies) and the backup battery are connected to the power con-
nector rail inside the cabinet back section
• All other external connections are sited on the Connection Interface board CI 1210A
inside the cabinet back section
POWER RAIL CONNECTIONS
POWER +27V
SUPPLY 0V
+27V
BATTERY
0V
CI 1210A CONNECTIONS
4 DC LOOPS
3 RS 232
1 REMOTE CONTROL
1 DME
2 TEMP SENSORS
1 AC LEVEL MEASUREMENT
3 DIFFERENTIAL ANALOG
CABLE FEEDTHROUGH 8 DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT
1 IIC EXTENSION
RF CONNECTIONS
NF
IN DS
CL
CLR
COU/CSB
COU/SBO
OUT
CLR/CSB
HBK574-3
CLR/SBO
Figure 7-5 ILS main cabinet connection overview

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.2.2 Power and Battery
The power supply and the backup battery are connected to the power connector rail inside the
cabinet back section as shown in Figure 7-6 and Figure 7-7 depending on configuration. The
cables used should have at least 4mm2 cross section. Circuit breakers shall be used between
the ILS Cabinet and the batteries.

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
Figure 7-6 Power and Battery connection Cold Standby

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
Figure 7-7 Power and Battery connection Hot Standby
A DC powered modem or other external equipment designed for 22V - 27V DC can be con-
nected to the fused terminal block marked Modem, (7011B, 13B, 31B and 33B) or to the
modem terminals on the BW 1566 (7012B, 14B, 32B and 34B). Maximum current consump-
tion should be 1 A.

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.2.3 RF Inputs
The RF inputs are:

• Course Line - CL
• Near Field Antenna - NF
• Displacement Sensitivity - DS
• Clearance - CLR (two frequency applications only)
These are connected as shown in Figure 7-8 (front view).
HBK577-2 NF CL CLR DS
Figure 7-8 RF input connections

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.2.4 RF Outputs
The RF outputs are connected as illustrated in Figure 7-9. The connections are:
All applications:
• COU SBO - COUrse Tx Side Band Only
COU CSB - COUrse Tx Carrier and Side Band Two frequency applications:
• CLR SBO - CLeaRance Tx SideBand Only
• CLR CSB - CLeaRance Tx Carrier and SideBand
HBK578-3
CLR CLR
SBO CSB
SBO CSB
Figure 7-9 RF output connections

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.2.5 DC Loop (Localizer only)
The DC loops are connected to the Connection Interface board CI 1210A in the cabinet back
section. Location and pin out are illustrated in Figure 7-10
• Ch X in* are the reference voltages from the main cabinet
• Ch X out* are the return voltages from the antennas
• GND is main cabinet ground
Suitable female connectors are Weidemüller BLZ-5.08/6 or equivalent.
Figure 7-10 DC loop connections

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.2.6 Remote Control
The remote control is connected to the Connection Interface board CI 1210A as illustrated in
Figure 7-11. The connection of the remote control, remote slave panel and interlock switch is
done at the remote control site and covered in Section 7.2.13 - 7.2.16
• FSK_[P,N] is the modem line pair
• GND is main cabinet ground
For normal FSK modem operation the straps S9-11 on CI 1210A should be mounted.
Refer to Section 7.3.4 for configuration for RS-232 connection.
A suitable female connector is Weidemüller BLZ-5.08/4 or equivalent.
Figure 7-11 Remote control connection

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.2.7 PC and Modem
PC terminals and modems are connected to the standard pin out RS 232, 9 pins DSUB con-
nectors. The Remote 1 and Remote 2 connectors are located on the Connection Interface
board CI 1210A as illustrated in Figure 7-12. The Local connector is located on the front of the
cabinet.
Recommended connections are:

• LOCAL - the PC located at the ILS main cabinet site
• REMOTE 1 - the PC located at the airport technical maintenance site
• REMOTE 2 - distant PC terminals connected directly or through a modem
Figure 7-12 PC and modem connections

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.2.8 DME LLZ Ident syncronisation
Distance Measurement Equipment DME is connected to the Connection Interface board CI

1210A as illustrated in Figure 7-13.
• ACT_DME[P,N] is the positive and negative terminal of the DME active signal from the
DME, respectively
• IN_DME[P,N] is the positive and negative terminal of the Morse code envelope signal
or start pulse from the DME, respectively
• OUT_DME[P,N] is the positive and negative terminal of the Morse code envelope sig-
nal or start pulse to the DME, respectively
Note! Observe polarity on all signals
A suitable female connector is Weidmüller BLZ-5.08/6 or equivalent.
Figure 7-13 DME connections

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.2.8.1 LLZ as Ident Master
This is the preferred configuration.
When the LLZ shall be used as ident master, connect as shown in Figure 7-14 or Figure 7-15.
In the RMM program, ILS settings / Transmitter settings, DME interface tab (see Appendix D),
set LLZ as master and the DME active signal according to the DME’s manual. The IDENT
TYPE can be set to CODE or PULSE. If set to CODE, the LLZ will send the Morse code enve-
lope to the DME. If set to PULSE, the LLZ send a start pulse to the DME. When the DME is
active, the LLZ will send every forth ident word to the DME. When the DME is inactive the LLZ
will be keying four out of four words. If the LLZ shall be keying three out of four words whether
the DME is active or not, disconnect the DME ACTIVE wires and program the DME active sig-
nal to OPEN.
NM 701x LLZ
CI 1210
+27Vdc
2.7K
a 1 S1
1 2 3
S2
DME ACTIVE 1 2 3
b 2
S3
1 2 3
3 S4
1 2 3
V+
S5
4 1 2 3
S6
1 2 3
c 5
S7
1 2 3
IDENT TO DME
d 6
S8
1 2 3
DME P8
connector
HBK1122-2
Figure 7-14 LLZ master connections (recommended)
Figure 7-14 shows the recommended configuration for colocation with Fernau 2020 and
Thales 415 DMEs’, refer to the DME handbook for configuration of the DME.
DME connector assignments:
Fig. 7-14 Fernau Thales

SK 2 SK4 (AF1, default) SK5 (AF2, alternate)
a 1 17 17
b 2 4 4
c 6 14 14
d 7 1 1

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
ILS
DME CI1210
v+
1 S1
+ 1 2 3
2.7K
DME ACTIVE S2
2 1 2 3
-
S3
1 2 3
3 S4
1 2 3
S5
4 1 2 3
S6
+27Vdc
1 2 3
5 15k
+
S7
IDENT TO DME 1 2 3
6
- S8
1 2 3
P8
HBK771-2
Figure 7-15 LLZ master connections (alternative)
Figure 7-15 shows an alternative configuration of the keyer outputs with loop current sourced
from the outputs. This is set by S1, S2 and S3 for the DME active signal and with S7 and S8
for the Ident signal. Refer to Figure 7-16 for circuit details.
Figure 7-16 Circuit Diagram, LLZ master

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.2.8.2 DME as Ident Master
In some installations, it may be necessary to use the DME as ident master.
If the DME shall be used as ident master, connect as shown in Figure 7-17. In the RMM pro-
gram, ILS settings / Transmitter settings, DME interface tab (see Appendix D), set DME as
master and DME active signal to OPEN. The IDENT TYPE can be set to CODE or PULSE. If
set to CODE, the LLZ will receive the Morse code envelope from the DME. If set to PULSE,
the LLZ will radiate its own programmed Morse code when it receives a start pulse from the
DME. If the LLZ does not receive any ident signal for approximately 20 seconds, the LLZ will
start to transmit its own programmed Morse code. When the DME signal returns, the LLZ will
start to transmit the DME code instantaneously.
ILS
DME CI1210
1 S1
1 2 3
S2
2 1 2 3
S3
1 2 3
3 S4
1 2 3
2.7K S5
IDENT FROM DME 4 1 2 3
S6
1 2 3
5
S7
1 2 3
6
S8
1 2 3
HBK770-2 P8
Figure 7-17 DME master connections
Current sourcing from the DME is shown, current can be sourced from the LLZ by moving S4,
S5 and S6 to position 1-2. Refer to Figure 7-18 for details.
Figure 7-18 Circuit diagram, DME master

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.2.9 Analog Inputs
7.2.9.1 General Description
The analog inputs are connected to the Connection Interface board CI 1210A as illustrated in
Figure 7-19
The inputs are:

• ANALOG CH.1-3 - three single ended DC analog inputs
Maximum voltage: ±15V

Input impedance: 10kOhms.
• TINDOOR, TOUTDOOR - temperature measurement inputs with interface to an LM35
temperature sensor
Maximum voltage: ±15V.
Input impedance: 10kOhms
• AC LEVEL - AC level measurement input. Intended for use with a battery eliminator
(i.e. 220/9VAC) to monitor the mains voltage
Maximum voltage: 24Vpp
Input impedance: 10kOhms
Figure 7-19 Analog input connections

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.2.9.2 Analog user inputs (CH.1-CH.3) details
Connectors: ANALOG CH.1, 2 and 3 on CI 1210A.
Input signal on pin 1, GND on pin 2 and 4.
Max input voltage relative to GND is ±15 V (zener diodes will clamp the signal if this limit is
exceeded).
Theoretically, full-scale positive is achieved by applying approx. +32 V, this would give a read-
ing = 2047 when scale=1 and offset=0. Fullscale negative approx.: -32 V (gives a reading of -
2048 when scale=1 and offset=0).
However, the full resolution of the A/D converter cannot be utilized in single ended mode since
the maximum input voltage relative to GND is ±15V, limiting the readings to approx. ±1000.
Read-out value = Ax + B
where
A is the “scale” value configured in the RMM “Analog user parameter” setup window,
B is the “offset” value configured in the RMM “Analog user parameter” setup window,
x is the 12 bit binary representation of the input voltage.
Figure 7-20 Typical circuit diagram

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.2.10 Digital Inputs and Outputs
Eight bidirectional digital channels (numbered 0-7) are located on the Connection Interface
board CI 1210A as illustrated in Figure 7-21
Logic levels: TTL.
Input impedance: 4.7kOhms.
Output impedance: Open collector with 4.7kOhms pull-up resistor.
Note about using these channels as inputs on CI 1210A part rev. 3 or earlier:
To drive a channel configured as an input the user equipment must be able to source approx.
10 mA at +5 V for the high logic level. This can be sourced from the +27V by using a 2.7
kOhms resistor. There is no need to pull down for the low logic level.
Figure 7-21 Digital input/output connections

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
Digital inputs and outputs - CI 1210A revision 4 or later.
Figure 7-22 Equivalent circuit diagrams

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.2.11 Battery Warning
Two inputs for main power supply failure (backup battery active) are sited on the CI 1210A
connection interface board as illustrated in Figure 7-23
Logic levels: Normally high 5V or 0V =battery warning.
Input impedance: 10kOhms.
Figure 7-23 Battery warning connections

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.2.12 IIC extension
The IIC extension is intended for use with future equipment connected to the ILS equipment.
The IIC SDA and IIC SCL signals are protected with automatic fuses.
Figure 7-24 IIC extension

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.2.13 Remote control connections
The remote control is connected to the corresponding ILS by connecting the REMOTE CON-
TROL connector on Connection Interface CI 1210 to P9 on Motherboard MB 1346, as shown
in Figure 7-25.
Suitable female connectors are Weidemüller BLZ-5.08/4 or equivalent. 600 Ohms cable
should be used.
REMOTE
CONTROL P9 NORMARC
1 - GND 1 - TXOFF
MB1346
J2 P9 P3
2 - FSK_P 2 - ALARM TXOFF
J1
3 - FSK_N 3 - LINE_A ALARM

CBA
4 - GND 4 - LINE_B LINE A 1
LINE B
P10 5
RX A
RX B
CI 1210
TX A 10
on
TX B
corresponding RS 232 SLAVE RS485
15
ILS 2 - TxD
P8
or 3 - RxD ALT.LINK INTERLOCK SLAVE

DIRECT
CI 1552 7 - GND
P6
AUX IN/OUT 20
on 9 - TxD_Rx
(RxD loopback)
corresponding P7 25
Marker Beacon
P5 OPTO OUT P4
GND 1-ALARM (C) GND 30
2-ALARM (E)
5V 3-NORM (C) 5V
4-NORM (E)
5-WARN (C)
24V 6-WARN (E)
24V
7-STBAL (C)
V_DIM 8-STBAL (E) V_DIM
POWER OUT POWER IN
HBK772-4
Figure 7-25 Remote control to ILS connection

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
The power supply to the remote control is connected according to Figure 7-26. The power
supply is connected to P2 pin 1 and 3 on the MB 1347 - power supply motherboard. Optional
standby power / battery can be connected to P2 pin 2 and 4. Output connector P3 on MB
1347 is connected to input connector P4 on MB 1346 - remote control motherboard. Several
MB 1346's are serial linked by connecting P5 on one board to P4 on the next.
An optional variable power supply 0-24V can also be used to reduce the illumination of the
Normal and Warning LED's during night operation. If the V_dim voltage is used, the jumper S1
on MB 1347 must be removed. If S1 is removed without supplying an additional V_dim volt-
age, only the Alarm LED will illuminate.
NORMARC NORMARC
MB1346 MB1346
NORMARC
J2 P9 P3 J2 P9 P3
J1 J1 J1
MB1347
TXOFF TXOFF
ALARM ALARM
CBA CBA BA
LINE A 1 LINE A 1 1
LINE B LINE B
D1
P10 5 P10 5 F1 5
RX A RX A
RX B RX B
TX A 10 TX A 10 10
TX B TX B P2 From
SLAVE RS485
15
SLAVE RS485
15
GND 24VDC
15
P8 P8 GND power
ALT.LINK INTERLOCK SLAVE ALT.LINK INTERLOCK SLAVE 24V supply
DIRECT DIRECT
AUX IN/OUT 20 AUX IN/OUT 20 BAT 20
P6 P6 POWER IN
S1 From
P7 25 P7 25 25 Optional
V_DIM=24V 24VDC
P5 P4 P5 P4 P3 Battery
OPTO OUT OPTO OUT
GND 1-ALARM (C) GND 30 GND 1-ALARM (C) GND 30 GND 30
2-ALARM (E) 2-ALARM (E)
5V 3-NORM (C) 5V 5V 3-NORM (C) 5V 5V
4-NORM (E) 4-NORM (E)
24V
5-WARN (C)
6-WARN (E)
24V 24V
5-WARN (C)
6-WARN (E)
24V 24V From
V_DIM
7-STBAL (C)
V_DIM V_DIM
7-STBAL (C)
V_DIM V_DIM optional variable
8-STBAL (E) 8-STBAL (E)
POWER IN POWER IN
0V-24V DC
POWER OUT POWER OUT POWER OUT
power supply
HBK773-4
Figure 7-26 Remote control power supply connections
The J2-connector provides an alternative possibility to connect to the ILS using RS-232.
Mating connector should be a 25-pin male DSUB using Pin 2 as Tx (from ILS remote control),
pin 3 as Rx (to ILS remote control) and pin 7 as GND.

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.2.14 Automatic shutdown of GP
If required, the GP can be configured to shut down automatically when the LLZ is off. Connect
a wire from P9 ALARM on the Motherboard MB 1346A that belongs to the LLZ to P9 TXOFF
on the MB 1346A that belongs to the GP. Refer to Figure 7-27.
GP LLZ
NORMARC NORMARC
MB1346 MB1346
J2 P9 P3 J2 P9 P3
J1 J1
TXOFF TXOFF
ALARM ALARM
CBA CBA
LINE A 1 LINE A 1
LINE B LINE B
P10 5 P10 5
RX A RX A
RX B RX B
TX A 10 TX A 10
TX B TX B
SLAVE RS485 SLAVE RS485
15 15
P8 P8
ALT.LINK INTERLOCK SLAVE ALT.LINK INTERLOCK SLAVE

DIRECT DIRECT
AUX IN/OUT 20 AUX IN/OUT 20
P6 P6
P7 25 P7 25
P5 OPTO OUT P4 P5 OPTO OUT P4

GND 1-ALARM (C) GND 30 GND 1-ALARM (C) GND 30
2-ALARM (E) 2-ALARM (E)
5V 3-NORM (C) 5V 5V 3-NORM (C) 5V
4-NORM (E) 4-NORM (E)
5-WARN (C) 5-WARN (C)
24V 6-WARN (E)
24V 24V 6-WARN (E)
24V
7-STBAL (C) 7-STBAL (C)
V_DIM 8-STBAL (E) V_DIM V_DIM 8-STBAL (E) V_DIM
POWER OUT POWER IN POWER OUT POWER IN
HBK1100-2
Figure 7-27 Automatic GP shutdown connection

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.2.15 Remote slave connection
The remote slave panel SF 1344 is connected to the corresponding remote control's mother-
board by connecting P3 on MB 1346 to P1 on SF 1344. P10 on MB 1346 is not used. See Fig-
ure 7-28.
Suitable connectors are standard 25 pins female DSUB (Harting 0967 025 0442 and 0967 225
4704 or equivalent), connected by a 10 wire 1:1 cable.
NORMARC
MB1346
J2 P9 P3
J1
TXOFF
ALARM
CBA
LINE A 1
LINE B
5
To P1
RX A
P10 5
1:1 on
RX B
10
SF1344
TX A 10
TX B
SLAVE RS485
15
P8
ALT.LINK INTERLOCK SLAVE

DIRECT Bold: Normally used
AUX IN/OUT 20
P6 Outputs:
1, 7, 13 - GND
2 - Alarm
P7 25 3 - Warning
4 - Normal
13 25 5 - STB Alarm
P5 OPTO OUT P4 6 - STB Warn
8 - STB Normal
2-ALARM (E) 9 - RMM Access
3-NORM (C) 5V 10 - Param. Warn
5V 4-NORM (E) 11 - Disagree warn
5-WARN (C)
24V 6-WARN (E)
24V 12 - Battery warn (Mains lost)
7-STBAL (C) 14 - Ident Warn
V_DIM 8-STBAL (E) V_DIM 15, 16 - 24V DC
17 - Mainenance warning
POWER OUT POWER IN
18 - STB on Air
24 -Vdim (24V)
1 14 25 - Buzzer
Inputs:
19 - ON/OFF
20 - Changeover
21 - Silence
22 - Access grant
23 - Interlock
HBK 774-2
Figure 7-28 Remote slave connection

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.2.16 Interlock switch connection
The interlock switch is either connected to P8 on MB 1346 (remote control motherboard) or to

P2 on SF 1344 (remote slave panel), see Figure 7-29.
INTERLOCK MB1346 / P8
SWITCH OR
SF1344 / P2
RWY A RWY B
1 INTERLOCK
2 GND
5 4 2 1
1 2 LLZ runway B
LLZ runway A
2 1
1 2 GP runway B
GP runway A
2 1
HBK775-3
Figure 7-29 Interlock switch connection
Note 1:
When MB 1346A is used with Remote Control Assembly RCA 1240C or D and Interlock func-
tion is not used (connected), a jumper plug must be installed in P8.
Note 2:
When the Interlock switch is used, the jumper plug normally installed in MB 1346-P8 must be
removed.
Note 3:
If the CAT Status Panel system MB 1508/CF 1510/CP 1511 is used the Interlock switch shall be
connected to MB 1509.
Refer to Chapter 8.2.7 for details.

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.2.17 Remote Control Auxiliary Channels
The Remote Control system has 3 uncommitted digital signals in each direction. These can be
used to transmit additional status and control signals between the remote control and equip-
ment rack. Please note that if the signals are connected to external equipment such as other
navaids or intrusion alarms, relays or optocouplers shall be used to provide a galvanic barrier.
For a number of purposes the NORMARC SK 1470 kit is suitable.
The signals are available on MB 1575, P15 in the ILS rack, and on MB 1346, P6 in the remote
control.
Connections from the ILS rack to the Remote Control:
Input in ILS rack, MB 1575, P15 Output in Remote Control, MB 1346, P6

Pin no. Signal name Pin no. Signal name
1 AUX_RI_IN0 1 AUX_RC_OUT0
10 GND 4, 9, 10 GND
Connections from the Remote Control to the ILS rack:
Input in Remote Control, MB 1346, P6 Output in ILS rack, MB 1575, P15

Pin no. Signal name Pin no. Signal name
5 AUX_RC_IN0 5 AUX_RI_OUT0
4, 9, 10 GND 10 GND
Signal interfaces:
All inputs are TTL level with pull-up to 5VDC. Outputs are TTL buffers with a drive capability of
20mA maximum. Care must be taken to avoid overloading the outputs. This may occur if the
outputs are connected directly to external equipment without a galvanic barrier.
NOTE:
Refer to 7.2.19 for additional information.

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
NORMARC
MB1346
J2 P9 P3
J1
TXOFF
ALARM
CBA
LINE A 1
LINE B
P10 5
RX A
RX B
TX A 10
TX B
2 4 6 8 10 SLAVE RS485
15
P8
1 3 5 7 9
ALT.LINK INTERLOCK SLAVE
DIRECT
AUX IN/OUT 20
P6
P7 25
P5 OPTO OUT P4
2-ALARM (E)
5V 3-NORM (C) 5V
4-NORM (E)
5-WARN (C)
24V 6-WARN (E)
24V
7-STBAL (C)
V_DIM 8-STBAL (E) V_DIM
POWER OUT POWER IN
HBK1185-1
Figure 7-30 Connector location, MB 1346 (Remote Control)

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
Figure 7-31 Connector Location, MB 1575 (ILS Rack)

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
Figure 7-32 Typical circuit diagram, Remote Control End
Figure 7-33 Typical circuit diagram, ILS Rack End

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.2.18 Remote Control optocoupler outputs
The remote control has optocoupler outputs for the following signals:
• Normal
• Warning
• Alarm
• Standby Alarm
The optocoupler outputs are available on MB 1346, P7.
Connector layout:
Pin no. Signal

1 Alarm – Collector (+)
2 Alarm – Emitter (-)
3 Normal – Collector (+)
4 Normal – Emitter (-)
5 Warning – Collector (+)
6 Warning – Emitter (-)
7 Standby Alarm – Collector (+)
8 Standby Alarm – Emitter (-)
The optocouplers are saturated for true signals.
Example: When Alarm is indicated, The Alarm optocoupler is saturated, giving a low imped-
ance connection between pin 1 and 2.
Maximum voltage Vce: 50V dc
Maximum current I max: 20mA
-1
Figure 7-34 Typical Remote Control Optocoupler output

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.2.19 MB 1575A configuration
LLZ:
The motherboard MB 1575A has a number of configuration straps. In LLZ cabinets, they can
be used to connect various logical signals to the Remote Control Auxiliary channels:
Strap Strap/Signal name Comment Notes
S5 VOICE_ACT_1 ON No configuration
S6 VOICE_ACT_2 ON No configuration
S7 FFM_ALM_1 ON FFM Alarm from Mon 1 connected to AUX_RI_IN0 Note 1
S7 FFM_ALM_1 OFF AUX_RI_IN0 available for other use
S8 FFM_ALM_2 ON FFM Alarm from Mon 2 connected to AUX_RI_IN0 Note 1
S8 FFM_ALM_2 OFF AUX_RI_IN0 available for other use
S9 FFM_WARN_1 ON FFM Warning from Mon 1 connected to AUX_RI_IN1 Note 1
S9 FFM_WARN_1 OFF AUX_RI_IN1 available for other use
S10 FFM_WARN_2 ON FFM Warning from Mon 2 connected to AUX_RI_IN1 Note 1
S10 FFM_WARN_2 OFF AUX_RI_IN1 available for other use
S11 DME_IDENT_OUT ON DME ident out connected to AUX_RI_IN2 Note 2
S11 DME_IDENT_OUT OFF AUX_RI_IN2 available for other use
Note 1:
The straps S7, S8, S9 and S10 are used to connect the alarm and warning outputs of the
optional Far Field Monitor controller (refer to Appendix B) to the Remote Control Auxiliary chan-
nels; refer also to 7.2.17.
Note 2:
Strap S11 can be used to transmit DME ident synchronisation via the Remote Control Auxiliary
channels. The DME interface must be set to LLZ as master and Ident type to PULSE if this
function is used, refer to 7.2.8.1, 7.2.17 and Appendix D, D.4.4.3 for details.

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.3 Tests and Adjustments
7.3.1 Configuration Settings
Follow this procedure to set the configurations in the ILS according to the desired system con-
figuration.
7.3.2 ILS Configuration
Set the correct configuration for this ILS according to this table. The strap platforms U6 and
U13 for configuration of the Station Control and the Remote Control Interface are located on
Transmitter Control Assembly TCA 1218 (Figure 7-35).
1 Strap IN NOT interlock

Strap OUT Interlock
2 Strap IN NOT hot standby
Strap OUT Hot standby
3 Strap IN 2 frequency ILS
Strap OUT 1 frequency ILS
4 Strap IN 1 of 2 voting
Strap OUT 2 of 2 voting (default)
5 Strap IN Lost contact with remote control will NOT turn off transmitters.
Strap OUT Lost contact with remote control will turn off transmitters. (default). Refer to
Table 7-2 for setting the shutdown delay.
6 Strap IN WRITE PROTECT switch in horizontal position generate service condition.
(default)
Strap OUT WRITE PROTECT switch in horizontal position does not generate service
condition.
7 Strap IN ACCESS grant switch on remote control must be in access grant position in
order to obtain access level 2 or 3 from the RMM system. (default)
Strap OUT ACCESS grant switch on remote control is overridden.
8 Strap IN Tells the RMS that this is a GP ILS.
Strap OUT Tells the RMS that this is a LLZ ILS.
9 Strap IN Spare, Not in use.
Strap OUT Spare, Not in use.
10 Strap IN See description below.
Strap OUT DEFAULT.
Table 7-1 Setting ILS configuration platform U6
Strap 10 is used for resetting the master Password in case this has been lost. The procedure
is as follows:
• Power rack off
• Insert a temporary link for strap 10 on the configuration-block U6 on the TCA 1218
board

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
• Reinsert TCA 1218

• Power rack on
• Wait till you see the message “master password reset” on the RMS LCD panel
• Power rack off and remove strap 10
• The master passwords has now been set to:
k5opm7e [space] xcw6qop [space] o9i8jnw

• Log in as MASTER from the PC using the three passwords above
• Change the Master passwords to the wanted ones (default: master1 master2 master3)
The action following a lost contact with Remote Control is configurable with U6 and U13 in
combination according to Table 7-2 (applies from revision 3 of the TCA 1218 board).
Action U6 strap 5 U13 strap 5

No shutdown IN Don’t care
2 sec. delayed shutdown (default) OUT OUT
30 sec. delayed shutdown OUT IN
Table 7-2 Setting RC link shutdown delay
Normally a changeover does not influence the Main/Standby transmitter selection. However
by setting straps according to Table 7-3, a Changeover from Remote Control will in addition to
changing transmitter-on-air also redefine the main and Standby transmitters (similar to press-
ing Main Select (TX1/TX2) and Changeover on Local Control Panel) (applies from revision 3
of the TCA 1218 board).
Action U13 strap 1 U13 strap 2 U13 strap 4

Normal operation (default) OUT OUT OUT
Main select at changeover IN IN IN
Table 7-3 Setting RC Main select at changeover
During Service mode of operation, transmitting ILS equipment is normally not shown as a
green Normal LED on the Remote Control panel, only the red Alarm LED will be lit. A special
Service Mode for the Remote Control display has been implemented for interfacing with cus-
tomized Remote Control and Monitoring Systems. In this configuration the Alarm, Warning
and Normal LED will be showing system status as during normal operation and the Remote
Control panel will indicate that the ILS equipment is in Service mode by a lit Access LED,
often relabelled as SERVICE instead of ACCESS. This mode is configured as shown in Table
7-4 (applies from revision 4 of the TCA 1218 board).
Action U13 strap 3

Normal Service mode indication (by Alarm LED) OUT
(Default)
Service Mode indicated by Access IN
Table 7-4 Setting RC indication in Service Mode

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
10
9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
U13 U6 HBK592-3
Figure 7-35 Transmitter Control strap platforms
7.3.3 Remote Ports Access Level Configuration
The allowed access levels on REMOTE ports 1 and 2 on the RMS can be configured by set-
ting jumpers S1-S4 on the Transmitter Control Assembly TCA1218A (Figure 7-35) according
to Table 7-5.
Jumper in means that access level is allowed.
Jumper out means that access level is denied.
PORT ACC. LEVEL 2 ACC. LEVEL 3

Remote 1 Strap S1 Strap S2
Remote 2 Strap S3 Strap S4
Table 7-5 Access level strap settings. Warning Configuration
Use the RMM Program to configure which warnings shall cause system warning, i.e. illumi-
nate the RC main warning lamp. The main warning lamp is the warning indication given on the
Slave Panel for the Air Traffic Controllers.
7.3.4 Remote Control Interface (CI 1210)
The transmission medium (telephone line (internal FSK modem) or RS232 (or external
modem)) to the Remote Control can be selected by plugs (see fig. 7-11) and link straps S9 –
S14 on the Connection Interface CI 1210.
Straps in Function Connector used

S9, S10, S11 Telephone line (FSK modem) CI 1210, P29
S12, S13, S14 RS-232 with CD CI 1210, P31
S12, S13, S18 RS-232 without CD CI1210, P31
Table 7-6 Remote Control Setup

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
NOTE: For external modem, use setting "RS-232 with CD" (Carrier Detect) or setting "RS-232 without
CD" depending on whether CD is supported by the modem or not.
7.3.4.1 Fiber optic line using Westermo MD-62
The modem shall be configured as follows (refer to Westermo handbook supplied with the
modem):
• Set status DIP switch S1 bit 1 to OFF (Disabled). S1 bit 2-9 are not used
• Calculate Power budget for the installation as described and set transmitted power
DIP switch S2 bit 5 to OFF (Low) or ON (High) as required for the line loss
The modem in the ILS cabinet end is connected to DB9M connector marked RS 232 Remote
Control on the CI 1210 using a standard DB9F to DB9M modem cable. Use setting “RS-232
without CD” in Table 7-6 above.
The modem in the Remote Control end is connected to DB25F connector marked Alt. Link on
the MB 1346 using a DB25M gender changer and a standard DB25F to DB25M modem cable.
7.3.5 Remote Control configuration
The Aural Alarm / Warning functions and transmission medium (telephone line or RS 232) in
the Remote Control can be selected by link straps: The strap links S6 to S12 will give Aural
Warning for the following warning parameters when connected:
Strap Warning Parameter

S6 Standby Alarm (Hot Standby racks only)
S7 Parameter Warning
S8 Ident Warning
S9 Battery Warning
S10 Standby on Air
S11 Monitor Disagree Warning
S12 Maintenance Warning
Table 7-7 Aural warning configuration
Strap Function
S1 in Silence on Remote Control resets Remote Control buzzer only
S1 out Silence on Remote Control resets both Remote Control and Slave Panel buzzer
S5 in Silence on Slave Panel resets Slave Panel buzzer only
S5 out Silence on Slave Panel resets both Remote Control and Slave Panel buzzer
Table 7-8 Warning reset (Silence)

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
Strap Function
S4 in Buzzer connected
S4 out Buzzer disconnected
Table 7-9 Buzzer
S2 pins connected S3 pins connected Function Input used on MB 1346A

1-2 1-2 Telephone line P9 Line A and Line B
3-4 3-4 RS 232 J2 Alt. link
5-6 5-6 TTL logic Not supported
Table 7-10 Telephone Line / RS 232 / TTL logic
The following optional strap links S13-S15 are available only on the alternative RCA 1240E
and RCA 1240F:
Strap Function
S13 IN A Low Interlock signal turns OFF transmitter
S13 OUT A High Interlock signal turns OFF transmitter (Default)
S14 IN Low active slave output state (Default)
S14 OUT High active slave output state
S15 IN Active Interlock blank all RC LEDS apart from equip-
ment erroneously ON indication
S15 OUT Active Interlock does not blank RC LEDS (Default)
Table 7-11 Optional straps
Strap 13 shall be OUT except when directly replacing RCA 1240A/B. (Note 1)
Strap 14 shall be IN for all standard slave panels. It shall be OUT when used with the NATS
RISCI system (failsafe outputs) or other special applications.
Strap 15 shall normally be OUT. When it is IN, lamps will behave as on RCA 1240C/D)
Note 1: If replacing RCA 1240A/B it is strongly recommended to change the interlock wiring to give a
high interlock signal for OFF rather than using strap 13.

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.4 Transmitter Setup
Test Equipment required:

• NORMARC 3710/7710 Field Test Set (with 20 dB attenuator)
• BNC Test Cable
Carry out the alignment steps in the order outlined below:
7.4.2 RF output level
7.4.3 LF phase check
7.4.4 SDM adjustment
7.4.5 DDM adjustment
7.4.6 CSB/SBO phase adjustment
7.4.7 Course Sector adjustment
7.4.8 Ident Morse code
7.4.9 Ident modulation adjustment
7.4.10 Flight Check value setting
7.4.1 Transmitter setup
The following sub paragraphs describe the System alignments. Two options are given for
each adjustment. The first "initial installation" is the one to be carried out during installation of
a new ILS. The second one "Replacement" is to be carried out if an LPA/GPA module has
been replaced.

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.4.2 RF output level
Open Transmitter settings window. Select Signal adj. tab.
Select the parameter for the transmitter to be adjusted.
HBK 1412-1
Figure 7-36 RF output level
Open Maintenance measurements window.
Observe the CSB forward power for the trans-

mitter.
Adjust COU (CLR) RF until the correct output

power is achieved.
7.4.2.1 Replacement
The CSB power should normally be set to the

nominal value.
LLZ Course 20W nominal

5-25W range
LLZ Clearance 20W nominal
5-25W range
GP Course 6W nominal
3-8W range
GP Clearance 0,6 nominal
0.1-1W range
Table 7-12 Normal operating power level
HBK 1408-1
Figure 7-37 Maintenance Measurements

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.4.3 LF Phase Check

DEMODULATION CSB: NORMAL DEMODULATION CSB 10° LF PHASE ERROR
Figure 7-38 LF phase CSB illustration
Connect oscilloscope channel A to the BNC test connector labelled CSB located on LPA/GPA
Course 1 (2). (LPA CLR1(2))
Set oscilloscope input mode to DC.
Adjust 90 Hz COU phase in the RMM program (Transmitter setting/signal adj.) observing
oscilloscope channel A until the waveform equals left hand graph in Figure 7-38.
A significant indication of correct LF phase is that the pair of the intermediate peaks are equal
in amplitude.
For two- frequency LLZ, repeat for CLR 90 Hz phase.
7.4.4 SDM adjustment
HBK 1414-1
Figure 7-39 SDM Adjustment

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.4.4.1 Initial installation
Connect a calibrated DDM-meter / PIR to the relevant test BNC jack on the ventilation cover.
Observe the measured SDM.
Adjust COU (CLR) SDM until the correct SDM measurement is achieved.
7.4.4.2 Replacement
Open Monitor Measurements and observe CL (CLR) SDM reading.
Change between the transmitter 1 and 2 and compare the SDM reading. Adjust the COU
(CLR) SDM of the new transmitter until the SDM readings are within +/- 0.02%SDM of the
other transmitter.
7.4.5 DDM adjustment
HBK 1411-1
Figure 7-40 DDM Adjustment
Connect a calibrated DDM-meter / PIR to the relevant test BNC jack on the ventilation cover.
Observe the measured DDM.
Adjust COU (CLR) DDM until the correct DDM measurement is achieved.

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.4.5.2 Replacement
Open Monitor Measurements and observe CL (CLR) DDM reading.
Change between the transmitter 1 and 2 and compare the SDM reading. Adjust the COU
(CLR) DDM of the new transmitter until the DDM readings are within +/- 0.5uA of the other
transmitter.
7.4.6 CSB / SBO phase adjustment
The SBO phase can be adjusted via two different windows.

1. Open Transmitter settings window. Select Signal adj. tab
or
2. Open Flight Check window
The first is preferred for LLZ while the second must be used for GP since phasing of GP
requires inserting of 90 degree stub.
HBK 1415-1
Figure 7-41 CSB/SBO Phase Adjustment (Transmitter settings)

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
1. Insert
90° stub
2.Observe 3. Adjust
1b
2b
HBK 1406-1
Figure 7-42 CSB/SBO Phase Adjustment (flight check)
During antenna system adjustments the CSB/SBO phase will be adjusted. Please refer to the
antenna systems handbooks for detailed procedure.
Select the first option mentioned above for LLZ and the second option for GP.
7.4.6.2 Replacement
LLZ:
Connect the DDM-meter / PIR to the test connector on the ADU.
Change between the transmitter 1 and 2 and compare the DDM reading. Adjust the SBO
phase of the new transmitter until the DDM readings are within +/- 0.5uA of the other transmit-
ter.
GP:
Connect the DDM-meter / PIR to the monitor return cable lower antenna (M1).
Open Fligh Check window, insert 90 degree stub or, alternatively, connect the 90 degree cable
stub in the SBO cable.
Change between the transmitter 1 and 2 and compare the DDM reading. Adjust the SBO
phase of the new transmitter until the DDM readings are within +/- 0.5uA of the other transmit-
ter.

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.4.7 Course Sector adjustment
HBK 1413-1
Figure 7-43 Course Sector Adjustment
During antenna system adjustments the Course Sector will be adjusted. Please refer to the
antenna systems handbooks for detailed procedure.
Adjust COU (CLR) SBO level until the correct Course Sector is achieved.
7.4.7.2 Replacement
Open Monitor Measurements and observe DS DDM reading.
Change between the transmitter 1 and 2 and compare the DDM reading. Adjust the COU
(CLR) SBO level of the new transmitter until the DDM readings are within +/- 0.5uA of the
other transmitter.
7.4.8 Ident Morse code
Check the Morse code value. If it is not correct, push the Edit button and type in the correct
code.

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.4.9 Ident modulation adjustment
Adjust Tx1 first with Tx1 to air, repeat for Tx2.
Connect the Field Test Set to the CSB COU (CLR) test connector on the ventilation cover
through a 20 or 30 dB attenuator.
Open Transmitter settings window. Select Modulation tab. Set the Morse signal to Cont. (con-
tinuous).
Select Signal adj. tab. Select COU 1020Hz level (CLR 1020Hz level). Push Edit and adjust the
modulation level
On the Field Test Set read IDENT MOD. The nominal reading should be 10% MOD, alterna-
tively the same value as previous recording. (If voice modulation is applied the Ident modula-
tion shall be 5% modulation depth.)
7.4.10 Flight Check value setting
The values in the Flight Check window will normally be set during the Commissioning flights to
give signal values that correspond to the alarm limits.
To set the signal values, open the Flight Check window, select the transmitter on air (Tx1|Tx2)
and Alarm limit check. Set values as required for alarm limit checks.
HBK 1405-1
Figure 7-44 Flight Check value setting

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.5 Antenna System Adjustments
After the transmitters has been aligned correctly the antenna system must be aligned. This
includes mechanical adjustments of the Antenna System, electrical adjustments (phasing)
and adjustments of the ADU and MCU.
For details, refer to the adjustment procedure for each antenna system.
7.6 Monitor Alignment
Refer to paragraph 7.7 for monitor limits.
Test Equipment required:

• Oscilloscope, general purpose
• NORMARC 3710/7710 Field Test Set (with 20 dB attenuator)
• BNC Test Cable
• Digital Voltmeter, 4 digits, DC
7.6.1 General
Description is given only for the DS channels. R338++ means that the other channels has
numbers R1338, R2338 and R3338 for CL, CLR and NF channels.
Before any monitor adjustments are attempted, the following procedures shall be completed:
Transmitter Setup
Network alignments
It is imperative for the result that the signals from the Monitor Combining Network (MCU) are
correct. Check these signals with the ILS Field Test Set / NAV Analyzer.
These signals are used for aligning the monitors.

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.6.2 RF Input Level Adjustment.
Mount the Monitor Frontend MF 12xx on an extender card.
Turn on the transmitters.
Set the potentiometer R338++ in middle position. See Figure 7-45.
Figure 7-45 Adjustment points on Monitor Frontend MF12xx
Adjust the jumper settings in P2++ and potentiometer R338++ until the voltage is 240mV at
TP23++.
HBK777-2
Figure 7-46 Alternative jumper settings of P2++
Turn off the equipment and remove the extender card. Set the Monitor Frontend MF 12xx in its
correct position. Turn on the transmitters.
Adjust the RF level potentiometer on the front of Monitor Frontend MF 12xx until the monitor
gives a RF level reading of 3.0V.

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.6.3 AGC Time Adjustment
Turn on the transmitters.
Make a note of the AGC voltages on TP 1,2,3 and 4 on MF 12xx.
Turn off the transmitters.
Adjust the AGC TIM potentiometer on the front of Monitor Frontend MF 12xx until the AGC
voltage (TP1,2,3 or 4) is the same as with a nominal RF input.
Do this for all four monitor channels on all of the Monitor Frontend MF 12xx modules in the
system.
This ensures fast response from the monitors.
7.6.4 SDM Adjustment
Adjust the SDM potentiometer on the front of Monitor Frontend MF 12xx until the monitors
reads 40.0% (LZZ)/80.0% (GP)SDM +/- 0.1%SDM.
7.6.5 DDM Adjustment
Measure and note down the DDM values from the MCU and NF antenna with help of the Field
Test Set.
DDM Adjustment
from MON2 DDM
the system again
Refer to Figure 5-1.
Set the Nominal values for each channel to the measured values with help of the RMM Pro-
gram.

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.7 Factory Default Configuration Settings
7.7.1 Cat I monitor LIMIT configuration
Factory default alarm, warning-limits and nominal values are shown in Table 7-13.
DDM values are in % DDM (which is the default DDM measurement unit in the RMM soft-
ware).
Limit values are relative to the configured nominal value. The nominal values for DDM meas-
urements can be configured by the user. Other nominal values can not be modified by the
user.
Monitor 1 and monitor 2 are always configured equally and according to Table 7-13. The
standby monitor are also configured according to this table, but with a few exceptions, see the
notes following the table.
Note that for the CL, DS, NF, CLR, and FFM channels the alarm limits are fine-tuned during
commissioning and flight tests to match each site installation.
For information on using the RMM software to set the monitor limits, see Appendix D.
LLZ GP
Channel Signal Nom Alarm L/H Warn L/H Nom Alarm L/H Warn L/H
CL DDM 0µA ±15µA 75 % 0µA ±35µA *) Note 75 %
1
CL SDM 40 ±4%SDM 75 % 80 %SDM ±5%SDM 75 %
%SDM
CL RF 3.0 V 1f: -1/1.5 75 % 3.0 V 1f: -1/1.5 75 %
2f: -0.35/ 2f: -0.36/0.43
0.47
NF DDM 0µA ±15µA 75 % 0µA ±45µA 75 %
NF SDM 40 ±20 %SDM 75 % 80 %SDM ±20 %SDM 75 %
%SDM
NF RF 3.0 V ±1.5 75 % 3.0 V ±1.7 75 %
DS DDM 150µA ±25µA 75 % 75µA *) Note
±18µA *) Note 75 %
2 2
DS SDM 40 ±20 %SDM 75 % 80 %SDM ±20 %SDM 75 %
%SDM
DS RF 3.0 V ±1.5 75 % 3.0 V ±1.7 75 %
CLR DDM *) Note 3 1f: Off 1f: 100 % *) Note 3 1f: Off 1f: 100 %
2f: ±38µA 2f: 75 % 2f: ±45µA 2f: 75 %
CLR SDM 40 1f: Off 1f: 100 % 80 %SDM 1f: Off 1f: 100 %
%SDM 2f: ±4.0 2f: 75 % 2f: ±5 2f: 75 %
CLR RF 3.0 V 1f: Off 1f: 100 % 3.0 V 1f: Off 1f: 100 %
2f: -0.37/ 2f: 75 % 2f: -0.36/0.43 2f: 75%
0.44
DF 10 kHz 1f: Off 1f: 100 % 15 kHz 1f: Off 1f: 100 %
2f: ±4 2f: 75 % 2f: ±4.5 2f: 75 %

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
LLZ GP
Channel Signal Nom Alarm L/H Warn L/H Nom Alarm L/H Warn L/H
CLR ID ACT 0.0 % Off 1f: ±69 0.0 % Off ±69
2f: 2.5/20
CLR ID MOD 0.0 % Off 100 % 0.0 % Off 100 %
CL ID ACT 0.0 % Off 2.5/20 0.0 % Off ±69
CL ID MOD 0.0 % Off 100 % 0.0 % Off 100 %
Self test DDM 0µA -13µA/39µA 100 % 0µA -22µA /Off 100 %
Self test SDM 40 -8%SDM/ 100 % 40 %SDM 25%SDM/Off 100 %
%SDM Off
Self test RF 3.0 V -1.2/1.8 100 % 3.0 V -1/Off 100 %
FFM ChA 0µA ±15µA 75 % 0µA ±35µA 75 %
DDM
FFM ChA 40 ±4 %SDM 75 % 80 %SDM ±5 %SDM 75 %
SDM %SDM
FFM ChA RF 0.0 V 20/80 30/70 0.0 V 20/80 30/70
FFM ChB 0µA ±15µA 75 % 0µA Off 100 %
DDM
FFM ChB 40 ±4 %SDM 75 % 80 %SDM Off 100 %
SDM %SDM
FFM ChB RF 0.0 V 20/80 30/70 0.0 V Off ±100
FFM EXE AL 0 0/200 ±2047 0 0/200 ±2047
CL VOICE 0.0 Off -150/204 0.0 Off -150/204
DETECT
Table 7-13 CAT I alarm and warning limits
*) Note 1: The value ±35µA is derived from a combined situation of wide DS alarm simultaniously with
a low GP angle alarm condition to satisfy the ICAO Annex 10 requirement of an alarm at 7.5%
change of GP angle.
*) Note 2: The alarm limit should be ±25% of the nominal value i.e. if the nominal monitor point is set to
150µA, limits should be ±37µA.
*) Note 3: The CLR nominal value should be set to whatever is measured as a DDM value on the CLR
signal in to the monitor.
• Unused DC loop channels: Set monitor alarm limits OFF and warning limits to 100%
• Unused Far Field Monitor (FFM) channels: Set monitor alarm limits to OFF and warn-
ing limits to 100% (RF warning to ±100)
• Unused VOICE channels: Set alarm limits to OFF and warning limits to ±204
• Standby monitor: Always disable alarms and warnings on the following channels: Near
Field, DC-loop, Far Field Monitor, and Voice

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
NM 3523B NM 3524 NM 3525 NM 3526 NM 7212 NM 7220
Low High Low High Low High Low High Low High Low High
DC-L0 2 42 2 42 2 42 2 42 0 905 0 920
DC-L1 2 42 2 42 2 42 2 42 0 920 0 920
DC-L2 Off Off Off Off 2 42 2 42 Off Off 0 920
DC-L3 Off Off Off Off 2 42 2 42 Off Off 0 920
Nominal 0. Warning Low/High 100%

Table 7-14 DC Loop alarm limits
7.7.2 Description of the FFM EXE AL limits
The FFM EXE AL (Far Field Monitor Executive Alarm) parameter is used to implement execu-
tive changeover/shutdown on FFM alarms. This measurement is zero when no alarms exists
on the FFM DDM/SDM/RF parameters. When an alarm has lasted for the time configured in
the FFM delay value, this measurement will be set to the value 101.
By setting the FFM EXE AL high alarm limit to 100, the TX Control will initiate an (executive)
changeover or shutdown on FFM parameter alarms. (Actually, any high alarm limit between 1
and 100 would work, but 100 is recommended as the default if executive FFM alarms is
desired.)
For non-executive FFM alarms, set the FFM EXE AL high alarm limit to a value higher than
101 (200 is recommended as the default).
7.7.3 Description of the CL IDENT and CLR IDENT limits
The CL ID ACT and CLR ID ACT parameters are the absolute value of the difference between
two consecutive 1020 Hz modulation measurements taken on the Course Line and Clearance
channels. This means that these parameters will have the value 0 when, for example, the
ident-keyer stops sending Morse code or if the 1020 Hz tone is continuously on (at approxi-
mately the same level). A positive non-zero value is therefore an indication of ident. modula-
tion activity.
The recommended low warning limit is 2.5. The ident. modulation levels then needs to be
large enough to periodically produce a CL or CLR ID ACT measurement that is greater than
this low limit to reset the ID ACT delay counter. All measurements that is greater than this min-
imum value should be accepted, the upper warning limit is therefore set to a large value (20 is
the recommended value).
If executive changeover/shutdown is desired on alarms on the CL or CLR IDENT parameters,

the warning limits recommended above should be used, instead of OFF, on the alarm limits.

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.7.4 Cat II monitor LIMIT configuration
For Cat II equipment the monitor limits are configured as for Cat I (see Table 7-13), with the
exceptions shown in Table 7-15. (Only the LLZ limits are different.)
LLZ
Channel Signal Nom Ala H/L Wa H/L
CL DDM 0.µA ±10µA 75 %
NF DDM 0.µA ±10µA 75 %
Table 7-15 Alarm and warning limits for Cat II equipment
7.7.5 Cat III monitor LIMIT configuration
For Cat III equipment the monitor limits are configured as for Cat I (see Table 7-13), with the
exceptions shown in Table 7-16. (Only the LLZ limits are different.)
LLZ
Channel Signal Nom Ala H/L Wa H/L
CL DDM 0.µA ±8µA 75 %
NF DDM 0.µA ±8µA 75 %
Table 7-16 Alarm and warning limits for Cat III equipment
7.7.6 Executive Monitor delay configuration
The factory default delay configuration for Cat I and II/III (values compliant with ICAO Annex
10) are shown in Table 7-17.
Note: That Annex 10 specifies the total changeover + shutdown delay after an alarm. The delay val-
ues used in the NORMARC 7000 RMM software are the time delay between the detection of
an alarm and the resulting changeover or shutdown. When a changeover takes place the delay
counters are reset. The values entered in the RMM software are therefore set to the Annex 10
value divided by two. The "Integrity Test - Monitor Delay Verification" delay shall be set to the
total changeover-shutdown time + 1 second (2*GEN delay + 1s).
The NF delay is used for alarms on the NF DDM, SDM and RF parameters. The IDENT delay
is used on the CL/CLR IDENT, MORSE and VOICE parameters. The FFM delay is used on all
FFM parameters including FFM EXE AL. The GEN delay is used on all remaining parameters.
See Appendix D for information on delay configuration using the RMM software.

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
LLZ GP
Channel Cat I Cat II/III Cat I Cat II/III
GEN 5s 1s 3s 1s
NF 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s
IDENT *) 20 s 20 s N/A N/A
FFM 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s
INTEGRITY TEST 11s 3s 7s 3s
Table 7-17 Factory default delay values
*) It is recommended to use minimum 30 seconds as the delay for IDENT on the standby mon-
itor on both Cat I and II/III. This is recommended in order to ensure that the RMS detects the
toggling of the IDENT measurements from the standby monitor. Detecting the toggling is
required in order not to generate IDENT warning. Some (short) ident codes may else cause
the ILS to generate IDENT warnings on the standby monitor.
7.7.7 Maintenance parameter configuration
This following sub-sections describes the maintenance measurements collected by the RMS
for diagnostic purposes. Default warning limits is also defined for each measurement type.
The warning limit for digital measurement point, are set to the “normal” state of the measure-
ment point. For example, for a measurement point that is normally “HIGH”, the warning limit is
set to “HIGH”.
For analog measurement points the limits are specified as “low limit”/”high limit”.
See Appendix D for information on using the RMM software to set these limits.

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.7.7.1 Oscillator 1 and 2 (OS 1221)
Measurement Warn. limit. Description

COU OUTPUT LEVEL HIGH Detects low output level from the board. May cause
low radiated power.
COU TUNEVOLT HIGH Voltage Controlled Oscillator parameter drift.
COU SYNTH LOCK HIGH The phase locked loop has been out of lock. (May
be reset by turning the TX off/on.)
COU LOCK DETECT HIGH Output frequency is unstable.
CLR OUTPUT LEVEL HIGH Detects low output level from the board. May cause
low radiated power.
CLR TUNEVOLT OK HIGH Voltage controlled oscillator parameter drift.
CLR SYNTH LOCK HIGH The phase locked loop has been out of lock. (May
be reset by turning the TX off/on.)
CLR LOCK DETECT HIGH Output frequency is stable/not stable.
7.7.7.2 LF generator 1 and 2 (LF 1576)
Measurement Warn. limit Description

-15 V 0/0 (Normally low) -15 V supply voltage status.
+15 V 1/1 (Normally high) +15 V supply voltage status.
+2.5 V 0/0 (Normally low) +2.5 V supply voltage status.
+3.5 V 0/0 (Normally low) +3.5 V supply voltage status.
Watchdog 0/0 (Normally low) Watchdog status. This signal is set to 1 if the watch-
dog has reset the DSP.
DSP execution 1/1 (Normally high) DSP software execution status. This signal is set to
0 if the DSP does not access the FPGA.
DSP memory check 0/0 (Normally low) DSP memory status. This signal is set to 1 by the
DSP software if it detects any failure in the external
flash program memory or the internal RAM.
EEPROM parity 0/0 (Normally low) Parity check status of the configuration data EEP-
ROM. This signal is set to 1 by the DSP software if a
parity error is detected in any of the configuration
settings.

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.7.7.3 TX 1 and 2, Course and Clearance

+5 V 1/1 (Normally high) +5 V supply voltage status.
+8.5 V 1/1 (Normally high) +8.5 V supply voltage status.
+27 V CSB 22/28 Measurement of the +27 supply voltage fed to the
CSB power amplifier stage.
+27 V SBO 22/28 Measurement of the +27 supply voltage fed to the
SBO power amplifier stage (not applicable for clear-
ance transmitters in GP equipment).
-15 V 0/0 (Normally low) -15 V supply voltage status.
CSB forward power 15W/26W Measurement of the forward power on the CSB out-
put.
CSB reverse power 0W/2W Measurement of the reverse power on the CSB out-
put.
SBO forward power 0.2W/2W Measurement of the forward power on the SBO out-
put.
SBO reverse power 0W/1.5W Measurement of the reverse power on the SBO out-
put.
CSB I-phase drive -0.5V/3V Measurements of the peak voltage to the CSB I
modulator
CSB Q-phase drive -0.5V/3V Measurements of the peak voltage to the CSB Q
modulator
SBO I-phase drive -0.5V/3V Measurements of the peak voltage to the SBO I
modulator
SBO Q-phase drive -0.5V/3V Measurements of the peak voltage to the SBO Q
modulator
Temperature -10/85 Measurement of the temperature of the power
amplifier assembly in degrees Celcius.
Reverse power status 1/1 (Normally high) Reverse power shutdown status. If the CSB or SBO
reverse power rises about a predetermined limit, this
status signal will toggle between OK and Fail with a
period of about 5 seconds as the power amplifier
drive signals are turned off and on to avoid overheat-
ing.
7.7.7.4 RF frontends for monitor 1, 2 and standby monitor (MF 1211/1219)

CL RF LEVEL HIGH Detects low Course Line RF level.
CL BASEBAND HIGH Detects low Course Line baseband level.
DS RF LEVEL HIGH Detects low Course Line RF level.
DS BASEBAND HIGH Detects low Course Line baseband level.
NF RF LEVEL HIGH Detects low Near Field RF level.
NF BASEBAND HIGH Detects low Near Field baseband level.
CLR RF LEVEL HIGH Detects low Clearance RF level.
CLR BASEBAND HIGH Detects low Clearance baseband level.

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.7.7.5 Monitor 1, 2 and standby (MO 1212)

V5P OK HIGH +5 V supply voltage ok/not ok.
STS ACT HIGH A/D conversion completed ok/not ok.
DSP PFO HIGH DSP +5 V ok/not ok.
DSP ERROR LOW DSP filter conversion completed ok/not ok.
DIAG RST HIGH For resetting diag. result (not used)
SYNC ERROR LOW DSP operation ok/not ok.
V15P OK HIGH +15 V supply voltage ok/not ok.
V15N OK LOW -15 V supply voltage ok/not ok.
7.7.7.6 Transmitter control board (TCA 1216)

EPROM PARITY CHECK LOW EPROM parity check ok/not ok.
INTEGRITY CHECK LOW Integrity check ok/not ok.
RC LINK STATUS HIGH Remote control link status ok/not ok. A warning
is generated if the TXC board does not receive
a valid data stream from the RC unit.
INTERNAL CL DDM -1/1 (% Measurements on the Course CSB signal out-
DDM) put from the cabinet. Only measured on hot
standby systems. These signals are not asso-
ciated with the TCA 1216 board in the auto-
matic diagnostic functions.
INTERNAL CL SDM 36/44(%) See description for INTERNAL CL DDM.
INTERNAL CL RF 2.6/3.4 (V) See description for INTERNAL CL DDM.
7.7.7.6.1 Remote monitoring board (RMA 1215)

RMS V5P LEVEL 4.3/6 (V) +5V voltage measurement (Volt).
RMS LI BATT LEVEL 2.7/3.5 (V) Clock and RAM battery voltage measurement
(Volt).
EPROM CHECK HIGH Program memory CRC check ok/not ok. Runs
continuously, and completes every 30 minutes
(approx.).
RAM CHECK HIGH RAM read/write test. Runs continuously, and
completes a check of all RAM every 15 min-
utes (approx.).

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.7.7.7 Power supply 1 and 2 (PS 1227)
The measurements listed here are displayed in the DC SUPPLIES maintenance window in
the RMM software.

V15N LEVEL -16.8/-13.8 Measurement of -15 V output voltage (Volt).
(V)
V5P LEVEL 4.6/5.9 (V) Measurement of +5 V output voltage (Volt).
V8P5P LEVEL 8.2/9.4 (V) Measurement of +8.5 V output voltage (Volt).
V15P LEVEL 13.8/16.8 (V) Measurement of +15 V output voltage (Volt).
7.7.7.8 External power
The measurements listed here are displayed in the DC SUPPLIES maintenance window in
the RMM software.

BATTERY V27P LEVEL 23/28 (V) Measurement of 27 V battery supply voltage.
BATTERY CURRENT -1/10 (A)
POWER CURRENT -1/20 (A)
CHARGER 1 STATUS ON Battery charger 1 status input.
CHARGER 2 STATUS ON Battery charger 2 status input.
7.7.7.9 User defined inputs
No default settings are defined for these parameters.
Measurement Description
USER_DIG0 - 7 8 user definable digital inputs/output.
TEMP_OUTDOOR Analog input for outdoor temperature sensor.
TEMP_INDOOR Analog input for indoor temperature sensor.
AC_LEVEL Analog input AC power level measurement.
ANA_CH1 - 3 3 user definable analog inputs.
7.7.8 Maintenance delay configuration
The factory default maintenance delays are as follows:
GEN delay: 20 seconds
EXT delay: 50 seconds
7.7.9 Morse code configuration
The factory default Morse code are “TST”.

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.8 Typical TX Adjustments values
Table 7-18 lists typical values entered in the RMM software (menu item ILS | TX settings | TX
adjustments) entered in the RMM software for LLZ and GP equipment.
Note that the adjustment values incorporate both a modulation level setting and a small,
unpredictable, correction for individual variation on the low frequency generator boards
(LF1576). The correction is shown after the “±” sign in Table 7-18.
Parameter Values for LLZ (20 W) Values for GP (6 W/0.6 W)

Course RF Power 16.8 ± 1 12.7 ± 1
Course DDM 0 ± 0.1 0±1
Course SDM 40 ± 1 80 ± 1
Course Mod Id. 10 ± 1 N/A
Clearance RF Power 16.8 ± 1 12 ± 1
Clearance DDM 0 ± 0.1 40 ± 1
Clearance SDM 40 ± 1 80 ± 1
Clearance Mod Id. 10 ± 1 N/A
Table 7-18 Typical TX adjustment values
NOTE:
GP CLR DDM can be increasedup to 80% for only 150Hz modulation. Recommended range 40-55.
7.9 User administration configuration
The following user are set up on new equipment:
Username: MASTER
Password number 1: MASTER1
These passwords should be changed after the commissioning.
7.10 Frequency configuration strap settings
This section defines the strap settings on the OS 1221A (LLZ) and OS 1221B (GP) for the
standard ICAO Annex 10 ILS frequencies.
The strap settings for each frequency and equipment type are shown in Table 7-19 and Table
7-20. The straps are numbered from A0 to A5 and N0 to N9. A0 is the bottom strap in two
groups of straps. (when the board is held as inserted in the cabinet).
An “X” character in the table means the strap must be inserted. A blank means the strap must
be removed.

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
7.10.1 OS 1221A strap settings for 2-frequency LLZ
The course transmitter frequency is set with straps in the J2 strap block. The configured
course frequency is the channel frequency + 5 kHz.
Ch. freq. A A A A A A N N N N N N N N N N
(MHz) 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
108.1 X X X X X X X X
108.15 X X X X X
108.3 X X X X X X X X
108.35 X X X X X X X X
108.5 X X X X X X X X X
108.55 X X X X X X X
108.7 X X X X X X X
108.75 X X X X X X
108.9 X X X X X X X X X
108.95 X X X X X X X
109.1 X X X X X X X
109.15 X X X X X X X X
109.3 X X X X X X X X
109.35 X X X X X X
109.5 X X X X X X X X
109.55 X X X X X X X
109.7 X X X X X X X
109.75 X X X X X
109.9 X X X X X X
109.95 X X X X X X
110.1 X X X X X X X X X X
110.15 X X X X X X X X
110.3 X X X X X X X X
110.35 X X X X X X X
110.5 X X X X X X X X
110.55 X X X X X X
110.7 X X X X X X
110.75 X X X X X X X X
110.9 X X X X X X X X
110.95 X X X X X X
111.1 X X X X X X X
111.15 X X X X X X
111.3 X X X X X X
111.35 X X X
111.5 X X X X X X X
111.55 X X X X X X X
111.7 X X X X X X X X
111.75 X X X X X X
111.9 X X X X X X
111.95 X X X X X
Table 7-19 OS 1221A Course frequency settings for 2-freq. LLZ

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
The clearance transmitter frequency is set with straps in the J102 strap block. The configured
clearance frequency is the channel frequency - 5 kHz.
Ch. freq. A A A A A A N N N N N N N N N N
(MHz) 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
108.1 X X X X X X X X
108.15 X X X X X X X
108.3 X X X X X X X X
108.35 X X X X X X X X X
108.5 X X X X X X X X X
108.55 X X X X X X X X
108.7 X X X X X X X
108.75 X X X X X X X
108.9 X X X X X X X X X
108.95 X X X X X X X X
109.1 X X X X X X X
109.15 X X X X X X X X X
109.3 X X X X X X X X
109.35 X X X X X X X
109.5 X X X X X X X X
109.55 X X X X X X X X
109.7 X X X X X X X
109.75 X X X X X X
109.9 X X X X X X
109.95 X X X X X X X
110.1 X X X X X X X X X X
110.15 X X X X X X X X X
110.3 X X X X X X X X
110.35 X X X X X X X X
110.5 X X X X X X X X
110.55 X X X X X X X
110.7 X X X X X X
110.75 X X X X X X X X X
110.9 X X X X X X X X
110.95 X X X X X X X
111.1 X X X X X X X
111.15 X X X X X X X
111.3 X X X X X X
111.35 X X X X X
111.5 X X X X X X X
111.55 X X X X X X X X
111.7 X X X X X X X X
111.75 X X X X X X X
111.9 X X X X X X
111.95 X X X X X X
Table 7-20 OS 1221A Clearance frequency settings for 2-freq. LLZ

23136-I7/Rev.7/02-Jul-07
8. Section 8 Detailed Technical Description
8.1 Main Cabinet
This Section gives a detailed description of the assemblies and modules in the NORMARC
7013B and 7014B.
Notations in the block diagrams:
~ - Active low signal.
[7:0] - Signal bus numbering system. Here, an eight bits bus, numbered from
seven down to zero.
The following paragraphs describe the electronics modules located in the main cabinet.
8.1.1 MF 1211A Localizer Monitor Frontend
General Description:
The MF 1211A module comprises four identical circuits that receive RF monitoring signals
from the antenna monitoring network. The RF signals are detected and their baseband signals
(envelope of the signals) are generated. In addition the module generates DC signals propor-
tional to the input RF levels. In two-frequency systems a pulse train which frequency is identi-
cal to the difference of frequency between the CL- an CLR.signals are extracted.
Block Diagram Description:
The block diagram of the module is shown in Figure 8-1. The four identical channels are:
• DS (Displacement Sensitivity)
• NF (Near Field)
• CL (Course Line)
• CLR (Clearance, used by two frequency systems only)
Each channel is divided into the following blocks: XX_FILT, XX_ RFAMP, XX_LEV,
XX_BASEB, and XX_LPFI. The CL channel is described below
In addition there is a frequency mixer circuit that generates the difference in frequency
between the CL- and CLR- input signals and a maintenance monitoring section which gener-
ates a maintenance warning to the RMS via an IIC bus if low modulation depth or low RF level
should occur.
CL_FILT
In this block the input RF signal is coarsely set to optimum performance level by combining
any of the three jumper selectable attenuators of 6dB, 12dB, and 16dB resulting in 0 to 34dB
input attenuation. Thus input levels from 0dBm to –35dBm may be accepted. The following
band pass filter rejects signals outside the ILS band to minimize out of band interference.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
CL_RFAMP
The signal from CL_FILT is amplified and split into two separate branches.
The RF level_RF signal is applied to the RF level detector (see next block), while the other
branch is used for baseband processing and comprises a PIN diode attenuator which is part
of the automatic gain control (AGC) system.
The RF vernier control (R 2338 for CL channel) is used to fine-tune the input level to optimum
value.
CL_LEV
The temperature compensated diode detector processes the baseband of the RF input. Its
output signal is amplified and then split into two branches, one is low pass filtered, buffered
and applied to the monitor module MO 1212A (see section 8.1.2). This DC signal is propor-
tional to the input level of the channel and is being used to monitor the RF level. The potenti-
ometer RF LEVEL DC OUT is used for calibration of the display reading. The other branch is
connected to the CL_BASEB block there it is used to control the AGC circuit (refer to descrip-
tion in next block).
CL_BASEB
This block comprises two functions:
Demodulation of the AGC controlled RF signal and generation of the AGC signal which con-
trols the gain of the PIN diode attenuator in CL_RFAMP. The diode detector is identical to that
of the CL_LEV.
After demodulation the baseband signal is amplified and the DC offset is removed before it is
applied to the LPFI block, see next block.
The AGC will keep the baseband signal at correct level, which is set by the potentiometer of
the voltage reference. This is the SDM calibration of the monitor.
To minimize settling time due to time constants of the AGC loop, a nominal AGC voltage is
inserted when no RF input signal is present. The size of this nominal voltage is adjusted with
the AGC_TIME potentiometer.
If a RF signal is detected by the RF_ LEV circuit the inserted voltage is switched off, and the
AGC loop starts operating normally from nominal operating conditions.
CL_LPFI
The active low pass filters in this block removes frequency components above the ILS base-
band. By turning the potentiometer in the filter the amplitude transfer function is affected, thus
the DDM reading is adjusted. This is a factory adjustment and will normally not be necessary
to carry out on site.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
DF_MIXER
The CL- and CLR RF signals are feed to a frequency mixer, and its output is low pass filtered
and applied to a voltage comparator which generates the difference frequency in TTL format.
MAINTMON
This block compares the level of the baseband signals and RF levels from all four channels of
the module with preset limits and reports to the RMS if a signal is outside this range.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
Page 8-4
Instruction Manual
23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
TPxx23
RF LEVEL
TP 1...4
AGC AGC_VOLT
AGC_TIME
PRESET
RF LEVEL AGC LEVEL
VERNIER
RF INPUT STEP BANDPASS
ATTENUATOR FILTER IIC_SCL
COMPARATOR
IIC_SDA
CURRENT- MUX
LOWPASS
CONTROLLED FILTER
ATTENUATOR
CL_FILT
CL_RFAMP
Part of MAINTMON
VOLTAGE
REFERENCE CL_IDENT
DF
ACTIVE MIXER
DF_MIXER
BASEBAND
LOWPASS FILTER
HBK554-3
CL_LPFI
CL_BASEB
Figure 8-1 MF 1211A Block Diagram (CL channel shown)

From CLR channel
NORMARC 7013B-7014B

8.1.2 MO 1212A Monitor
The MO 1212A module digitally converts and processes NAV parameters, compares them
with programmable limits and reports alarm situations to the Station Control on TCA 1218
(Section 8.1.3) and the RMS.
Block Diagram:
Se Figure 8-2
Block Description:
LF_FRONT:
The analog signals from MF 1211A Monitor Frontend are multiplexed and digitized, and the
difference frequency (DF) pulse train is counted as a 12 bits value. These digital values are
multiplexed into the FIFO along with the DC loop (DL_Detect[3:0]), External (Ext_Val[11:0])
and test channels. The FIFO is seven words deep, and the sampling frequency is 640 Hz/
channel. Much of the functionality of LF-Front is handled by a FPGA NMP101A which is
described in Section Figure 8.1.2.1
A special self-test feature has been integrated into the monitor system for continuous check-
ing of the monitor integrity. This starts in the LF_FRONT by multiplexing a degenerated CL
baseband into separate self-test channels. These signals are sampled and checked in the
same manner as the ordinary baseband signals. The test channels repeatedly switches
between normal signal values and degenerated signal values, thus toggling the status of
these channels between normal and alarm later in the monitor chain. If the CL signals in the
Station Control on TCA 1218 are normal, the test signals are checked for toggling between
normal and alarm states. If not toggling, the monitor is supposed to not being able to detect
alarms in the ordinary monitor signals, and the whole monitor is put into alarm state. Based on
the state of the other monitor, you will have an alarm changeover/shutdown or a system warn-
ing.
DSP_FILTER
Performs all filtering in the Monitor. Data is read from the LF_FRONTEND FIFO, AC data are
FFT analysed and for the DC data mean values are calculated. The calculated parameters are
written to the COMPARATOR. DSP_FILTER consists of a TMS320C31 DSP, a memory block
and a reset/watchdog circuit.
COMPARATOR
Compares the parameters received from DSP_FILTER with the programmed upper and lower
alarm limits. Alarm data are passed on to the Station Control and Terminator (on TCA 1218
(Section 8.1.3) on a dedicated bus. The COMPARATOR generates both instantaneous and
delayed alarms. The delayed signal is sent only if the alarm is still present after the pro-
grammed delay period. All parameters, alarm and warning data are passed on to the RMS via
an output FIFO (warning information is treated by the RMS). The alarm and warning limits and
delays are stored in the local EEPROM. Much of the functionality of COMPARATOR is han-
dled by two FPGAs NMP102A and NMP103A described in Section 8.1.2.2.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
8.1.2.1 NMP101A Monitor Digital Frontend
General description:
NMP101A is a FPGA in the LF-FRONT block. It serves as an interface between the (digitized)
inputs from the monitor frontend MF 1211A and the DSP_FILTER block. NMP101A is based
on the Actel ACT1020 FPGA. For electrical specifications see the ACT1020 datasheet.
Block Diagram
See Figure 8-2
Block Description:
REF COUNTER
Divides the system clock (4.9152 MHz) for use in channel addressing. It also generates the
read/convert pulse to the external ADC.
DIFF FREQ COUNTER
Counts the pulse train that represents the frequency difference between the CL and CLR sig-
nals. It generates a 12 bits value which multiplied by 20 gives the true frequency difference.
MUX
Selects between DF, one of sixteen channels from the ADC or one of the eight external chan-
nels in a roundabout manner to the FIFO.
FIFO
Is a 7x17 bits first in first out queue with interface to the TMS320C31 DSP in the DSP_FILTER
block. The five most significant bits are channel address and the 12 least significant bits are
data. FIFO reports error to the COMPARATOR and data available (DAV) status to the DSP.
8.1.2.2 NMP102A / NMP103A Comparator
NMP102A and NMP103A are two FPGA's providing most of the functionality of the COMPA-
RATOR block.
Block Diagram:
See Figure 8-2.
Block Description:
The block diagram shows both the NMP102A and NMP103A as a whole and blocks drawn
twice are found with the same functionality on both FPGA’s.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
INPUT LATCH:
Stores the parameter number and value coming from DSP_FILTER.
SEQUENCE CONTROLLER:
Controls the entire operation of reading alarm limits from the EEPROM, runs parity checks on
the alarm limit values, compares the parameter value from DSP_FILTER with upper and lower
alarm limits, reads and parity checks the alarm delay values and delays any alarms corre-
spondingly.
COMP:
Compares the parameter value from DSP_FILTER with the alarm limits from EEPROM and
generates a raw alarm.
DELAY:
Delays the raw alarms corresponding to the delay values in the EEPROM.
FIFO CONTROL:
Writes data into the FIFO when the comparator cycle is finished.
EEPROM INTERF.:
Controls the interface towards the EEPROM. EEPROM write is only allowed if RMS_LEVEL1
is a logic '0' (RMS access level3).
RMS INTERF.:
Is the interface to the RMS. It controls interrupt when data is ready in the FIFO and generates
addresses for EEPROM programming and status and control signals.
PARITY CHECK:
Checks incoming data from the EEPROM. Single bit errors are corrected, and only a parity
warning is passed to the RMS. If two bits are erroneous, all output alarms are set, and a parity
error is passed to the RMS.
EEPROM:
The EEPROM is used to store the alarm limits. Warning limits used by the RMS are also
stored here.
FIFO:
The FIFO is used to streamline the data transfer to the RMS. One full set of 32 parameters is
written to the FIFO before the interrupt is activated.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
Page 8-8
Instruction Manual
23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
TST_CH[1:0]
2 ANA_CH[3:0] SEQUENCE
TEST_RF_ERROR CONTROLLER
VOLT. MONITOR
REF. TEST_RF_OK EXT_CH[2:0] MS_ALARM_RDY
2 CLK REF
PAR_WR SC ALARM
MUX COUNTER 5 12 MS_ALARM_RAW BUS
DSP_DATA[11:0]
4 EXT_ENA COMP MS_AL_N 9 TO
CL_BB_DGR INPUT
LPF 5 5 LATCH DELAY TCA1218A
CL-BASEBAND DSP_DATA[16:12]
MS_AL
4 4
CL_RFLEVEL DIFF
MS_AL_ID[4:0]
FREQ RESET
CL_IDENT AND DIGITAL SIGNAL
5
COUNTER
12 ADO[11:0] CHECK PROCESSOR
FROM MUX AD MUX
12 17 DO[16:0] CIRCUIT
DS_* 2 FIFO PARITY
MF1211A CHECK
NF_* 2 EXT_VAL[11:0] 12 17
DAV
CLR_* 3
MT_AL_RDY MONITOR
DL_DETECT_*
TER ALARM
4 4 4 MT_AL_N BUS
PARITY
CHECK DELAY TO
LF_DREAD ADDRESS MT_AL
VOLT. DL_REF* DECODER TCA1218A
REF. MT_AL_ID[4:0]
4 5 MT_AL_RDY
ANAFRONT NMP101 BOOT EXTERNAL
EPROM RAM
4.9152 MHz
DF DSP_FILTER SEQUENCE
LF_FRONT CONTROLLER
WR
FIFO
CONTROL FIFO
HBK555-4
RD
Figure 8-2 MO 1212A Block Diagram

IOD[7:0]
RMS BUS RMS EEPROM
IOS[6:0] INTERF. EEPROM
INTERF.
FROM RMS_LEVEL1
TCA1218A
NMP 102/103A
COMPARATOR
NORMARC 7013B-7014B

8.1.3 TCA 1218 Transmitter Control Assembly
The TCA 1218A Transmitter Control Assembly consists of the transmitter control TC 1216A
and Local Control (front panel) LC 1217A. It is used in the cold standby equipment
The TCA 1218B Transmitter Control Assembly consists of the transmitter control TC 1216A
and Local Control (front panel) LC 1217B. It is used in the hot standby equipment
Block Diagram:
See Figure 8-3 and Figure 8-4 All blocks except Local Control are located on TC 1216A.
Description of selected signals:
MON1 SC ALARM BUS:
Station control alarm bus from monitor MO 1212A no.1. Consists of M1S_AL_ID[4:0],
~M1S_AL_RDY, M1S_AL, ~M1S_AL_N and M1S_AL_RAW.
MON2 SC ALARM BUS:
Station control alarm bus from monitor MO 1212A no.2. Consists of M2S_AL_ID[4:0],
~M2S_AL_RDY, M2S_AL, ~M2S_AL_N and M2S_AL_RAW.
STB MON ALARM BUS:
Station control alarm bus from standby monitor MO 1212A. Consists of ~MSTBS_AL_RDY
and MSTBS_AL. Only used for hot standby configurations.
RMS BUS:
Interface to the RMS. Consists of IOD[7:0], IOCS, IOS[2:0].
MON1 TRM ALARM BUS:
Terminator alarm bus from monitor MO 1212A no.1. Consists of M1T_AL_ID[4:0],

~M1T_AL_RDY, M1T_AL, ~M1T_AL_N and M1T_AL_RAW.
MON2 TRM ALARM BUS:
Terminator alarm bus from monitor 2. Consists of M2T_AL_ID[4:0], ~M2T_AL_RDY, M2T_AL,

~M2T_AL_N and M2T_AL_RAW.
RC_BUS:
Interface to the line interface circuits for the remote control interface on CI 1210A (Section
8.1.11). Consists of SDIN, SDOUT, ~CD.
Block Description:

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
STATION CONTROL (SC MON DATA DETECTOR, SC STATE MACHINE CONTROL, SC

EVENT DETECTION)
Interprets the alarm bus from the monitors MO 1212A and generates alarm (and standby
alarm for hot standby configurations). These signals together with inputs from local controls
(on LC 1217), remote controls (via CI 1210A), RMS inputs and configuration setup (in EEP-
ROM and jumper settings) determine the state/state change for the NORMARC 70xxB trans-
mitter state. Status information are generated and sent to local control panel (LC 1217) and
remote control panel (via CI 1210A). The RMS can poll the state of the station control at any
time. State changes generate an interrupt signal to the RMS. STATION CONTROL can shut
off the transmitters LPA1580A by turning off the RF-oscillators OS 1221A.
Most of the functionality of STATION CONTROL is handled by three FPGAs NMP104A,

NMP105A and NMP106A described in Sections 8.1.3.1 - 8.1.3.3.
TERMINATOR
Interprets the alarm bus from the monitors MO 1212A and generates alarm. This signal
together with local controls (on LC 1217), remote controls (via CI 1210A), RMS inputs and
configuration setup (in EEPROM and jumper settings) determine the state of the terminator
alarm (TRM_AL) output. TERMINATOR has an extra 1s delay, so that the STATION CON-
TROL has time to fulfil transmitter state changes before the terminator shuts the NORMARC
70xxB down. Terminator alarm shuts the NORMARC 70xxB down by disconnecting the power
supply from the output stage of the transmitters LPA 1580A.
Most of the functionality of TERMINATOR is handled by FPGA NMP107A described in Sec-

tion 8.1.3.4.
REMOTE CONTROL IF:
This unit converts signals from the station control and terminator to serial messages (1 mes-
sage is 2 bytes long). This is done continuously (approximately 10 messages/s). The serial
input from the remote control is converted to parallel format. Messages from the remote con-
trol are accepted only if two equal messages are received in sequence. If no valid message is
received within 2s, the remote control interface asserts a failure signal to inform the station
control and terminator that the link to the remote control is broken. Depending on the configu-
ration setup, this will turn the NORMARC 70xxB off.
CONFIG
Jumper plugs for configuration of the NORMARC 70xxB.
DEBOUNCE
Consists of debouncing circuitry for signals from switches on LC 1217 and jumper plugs for
setting access levels for remote control.
LOCAL CONTROL
Consist of keys, switches, switchlocks lamps and indicators located on LC 1217 used to con-
trol and indicate operational status of the NORMARC 70xxB.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
8.1.3.1 NMP104A Station Control Monitor Data Detector
NMP104A is a FPGA within the STATION CONTROL block. It serves as a monitor alarm/error
detection and monitor alarm voting unit. NMP104A is based on the Actel ACT1020 FPGA. For
electrical specifications see the ACT1020 datasheet.
Block Diagram:
See Figure 8-3.
Block Description:
MON.1 ALARM & ERROR DETECTION
This block decodes the MON1 SC Alarm bus and generates alarm if the monitor MO 1212A
no 1 has set the alarm flag for any of the 32 parameters received in a set. Error checks
includes parameter identity sequence check, AL_N negated of AL, test channel alarm toggling
and timeout for RDY-signal. Any alarm/error will set the monitor alarm output (M1_ALARM) for
the duration of next 32 parameters, meaning that 32 parameters without alarm/error must be
received in sequence before the alarm output is reset.
Same as for MON.1 ALARM & ERROR DETECTION, but for MON2 SC alarm bus.
VOTING
This block provides monitor alarm (VALARM) to the NMP105A depending on jumper configu-
ration (1 of 2 or 2 of 2 voting) in the CONFIG block and inputs from the two MO 1212A moni-
tors (not including standby monitor). When configured for 2 of 2 voting, both MO 1212A
monitors must give alarm to set the VALARM output. When configured for 1 of 2 voting, alarm
from one of the two MO 1212A monitors is sufficient to set VALARM.
STB ALARM DETECTION
Alarm flag for any parameter sets the alarm immediately. The alarm will be reset when 32
parameters are received in sequence with no alarm flag set.
PUSHBUTTON ONESHOTS
To prevent locking up of push button keyboard signals, this block translates the input signals
from the switches on LC 1217 from levels (high or low) to pulse stream.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
8.1.3.2 NMP105A Station Control Event Detection
NMP105A is a FPGA within the STATION CONTROL BLOCK. It serves as an event detection
and control unit. The NMP105A also includes the station control RMS-interface. The event
information is output to the station control state machine controller NMP106A. NMP105A is
based on the Actel ACT1020 FPGA. For electrical specifications see the ACT1020 datasheet.
Block Diagram:
See Figure 8-6.
Block Description:
RMS INTERFACE
The RMS interface provides interface to the RMS BUS
LAMP STATUS GENERATION
This block generates lamp status information for the LOCAL CONTROL and REMOTE CON-
TROL IF blocs.
RMS LEVEL DETECT
This block decodes RMS access levels 2 and 3 using access configuration in CONFIG block,
write disable switchlock information from LOCAL CONTROL, access grant from Remote Con-
trol IF and access requests from the RMS.
EVENT DETECT
The event detect unit checks for valid events (for example key press, alarm interlock etc.), and
sends valid event number to the station control state machine controller NMP106A. Events
not valid for the current mode of operation are ignored. Events are given priorities with inter-
lock as the highest priority. The alarm event has the next priority, while the other events are
polled one by one. The event detect unit also has a built in integrity check. This function works
when the ILS is in normal operational mode (automatic mode with transmitters on and no
alarm). When the ON/OFF is pressed, a FORCE_AL signal is output. This signal turns off all
transmitters (LPA1580A ) without notifying the rest of the system. The loss of transmitted sig-
nal will be detected by the monitors (MO 1212) and cause monitor alarms to the STATION
CONTROL.This alarm will result in a TX changeover initiated by STATION CONTROL, but
since STBY TX is also turned off, monitor alarm will remain and cause TX shutdown after
alarm delay. This sequence ensures that the monitoring circuits and shutdown mechanisms
operates as intended. If the integrity check function should fail, a timeout function shuts the
ILS down.
INTERRUPT DETECT
This block detects transmitter state changes and stores the event causing the change. Trans-
mitter feedback and coax relay position is also stored. An interrupt is generated to inform the
RMS that a transmitter state change has occurred.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
TX 20 SEC DELAY
This function ensures that no transmitters are allowed to transmit for 20 seconds after an
alarm shutdown has occurred.
MAIN SELECT STORE
This block stores the information regarding which transmitter that is selected as main transmit-
ter.
INTERLOCK DELAY
This block turns on the transmitters 20 seconds after the interlock signal from the REMOTE
CONTROL IF block has been deactivated.
8.1.3.3 NMP106A Station Control State Machine Control
NMP106A is a FPGA within the STATION CONTROL block. It serves mainly as a state
machine controller (states are stored in an EPROM) for transmitter on/off control. NMP106A is
based on the Actel ACT1020 FPGA. For electrical specifications see the ACT1020 datasheet.
Block Diagram:
See Figure 8-5.
Block Description:
SEQUENCER
This block generates strobes and control signals for running the state machine. New states
are triggered based on received new data from NMP105A (on the STO_BUS). This block also
generates reset to the hardware watchdog safeguarding and controlling the station control
reset.
EVENT CHECK
This block checks event and main select signal received from NMP105A. Two identical event/
main select signals must be received in sequence before the event/main select is acted upon.
TIMER
Used by the state machine for delays/timeouts for state changes.
DELAY
Delays the coax relay position feedback in state change sequences. Ensures that the coax
relay (Section 8.1.7) will not change position while the transmitters are transmitting.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
PARITY CHECK
This block checks the parity of each byte read from the state machine content EPROM. Parity
failure results in transmitter shutdown.
LOCKUP DETECT
This block detects failures in the state machine sequence. It will trigger if the state machine
doesn’t become idle within a specified time. Failures results in transmitter shutdown.
EPROM READ DATA ADDRESS
This block is an address counter setting the address for the state machine EPROM during
reading through the RMS. The RMS can either reset or increment the address counter. The
feedback from these control strobes, address bit 0 and EPROM data byte are transferred to
the NMP105A for reading by the RMS.
TX ON/OFF CONTROL
This block controls the on/off state of the transmitters. Default is leaving the transmitters in the
state reported by their feedback signals, thereby providing no change in transmitter state.
However, if PARITY CHECK failure or event LOCKUPDETECT failure is detected, the trans-
mitters are turned off.
LOCAL LAMP STATUS
Local panel lamp outputs to the LOCAL CONTROL BLOCK are provided based on coax relay
position, TX main select, transmitter status and station status received from NMP105A.
EPROM ADDR MUX
This block selects EPROM addressing either for STATE MACHINE or RMS read control.
8.1.3.4 NMP107A Terminator
NMP107A is a FPGA providing most of the TERMINATOR function. The terminator function is
to provide a transmitter shutoff function if the STATION CONTROL should fail to do so.
NMP107A is based on the Actel ACT1020 FPGA. For electrical specifications see the
ACT1020 datasheet.
Block Diagram:
See Figure 8-5.
Block Description:
RMS INTERFACE
The RMS interface provides the interface to the RMS BUS.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
RMS LEVEL DETECT
This block decodes RMS access levels 2 and 3 using access configuration in CONFIG block,
write disable switchlock information from LOCAL CONTROL, access grant from REMOTE
CONTROL IF and access requests from the RMS.
EVENT DETECT
The event detect unit checks for valid events (for example on/off-key, alarm, interlock etc.),
and sends valid events to the terminator state check. Events not valid for the current mode of
operation are ignored.
TERMINATOR STATE CHECK
This block acts upon events/states received from the EVENT DETECT block. Alarm/interlock
states are allowed to be active for 1 second before terminator alarm is activated. The termina-
tor alarm is then reset if an on/off-event is detected, thereby starting a new 1 second timeout.
The STATION CONTROL must now stabilise the ILS with no alarm within this 1-second period
of time if a TERMINATINATOR shutdown should be avoided. If terminator is triggered by
alarm or interlock while transmitters are transmitting, an interrupt is generated. The RMS can
then read the cause of the interrupt through the RMS BUS.
INTERLOCK FILTER
This block overrides the interlock signal in interlock override mode of operation. To enable
interlock override mode of operation the interlock override switchlock must be activated, the
local/remote switch must be in local position and the auto/manual switch must be in manual
position.
This unit decodes the MON1 TRM ALARM BUS and generates alarm if the monitor MO
1212A no. 1 has set the alarm flag for any of the 32 parameters received in a set. Error checks
includes parameter identity sequence check, AL_N negated of AL, test channel alarm toggling
and timeout for RDY-signal. Any alarm/error will set the monitor alarm output (M1ALARM) for
the duration of the next 32 parameters, meaning that 32 parameters without alarm/error must
be received before the alarm output is reset.
Same as for MON.1 ALARM & ERROR DETECTION but for MON2 TRM ALARM BUS.
VOTING
This block provides a monitor alarm (~VALARM) depending on jumper configuration (1 of 2 or

2 of 2 voting) in the CONFIG block and inputs from the two MO 1212A monitors (not including
STBY monitor). When configured for 2 of 2 voting both MO 1212A monitors must give alarm to
set the ~VALARM output. When configured for 1 of 2 voting alarm from one of the two MO
1212A monitors is sufficient to set the ~VALARM.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
8.1.3.5 NMP109A Remote Control Interface
NMP109A is a FPGA providing most of REMOTE CONTROL IF function. The NMP109A

transfers data between STATION CONTROL and TERMINATOR and the remote control (via
CI 1210A). NMP109A is based on the Actel ACT1020 FPGA. For electrical specifications see
the ACT1020 datasheet.
Block Diagram:
See Figure 8-6.
Block Description:
STB LAMP FILTER
This block provides the standby lamp information to be sent to remote control by the TX
UART.
TX UART
Converts parallel data to 2-bytes serial messages. Protocol for the serial data SDOUT (sent I
1210A) is start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, odd parity.
RX UART
Converts serial data SDIN received from remote control (via CI 1210A) to parallel data (2
bytes).
MESSAGE DETECTOR
Messages from RX UART are accepted only if two identical messages are received in
sequence. If so, the data output latch is updated and a new-message pulse is generated.
NEW MESSAGE TIMER
Checks whether an OK message from MESSAGE DETECTOR and carrier detect signal from
CI 1210A is present. Missing message or no carrier detect for 2 seconds or more gives time-
out signal to DATA FILTER.
DATA FILTER
In case the NEW MESSAGE TIMER has signalled a timeout (indicating missing messages)
this block will modify the data received from the MESSAGE DETECTOR by forcing the
TX_OFF signal to on (configurable). If configuration enables interlock, the interlock signal is
also forced active.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
Debounce and
LED driver
NORMARC 7013B-7014B
Station Controller

MON1
Station Controller
Alarm-bus
20 sec.
delay
Alarm detection
and Lamp
Voting status
generation
MON2 NMP104A Station Controller
Station Controller Event Detector
On / Off
Alarm-bus & Forced alarm signals
Event machine
Configuration to
OS1221
Course TX1 Course TX1
Course TX2 Course TX2
CLR TX1 CLR TX1
U13 U6 CLR TX2 CLR TX2
NMP105A &
NMP106A Coax Control
MON1
Terminator
Alarm-bus
Terminator
Alarm detection
Event Detector
and Terminator Alarm
&
Voting On / Off signal
Status check
Figure 8-3 TCA 1218 Block Diagram

to
MON2 PS1227
Part of NMP107A Part of NMP107A
Terminator
Alarm-bus Terminator
To CI1210A
Remote Control
(MONCO)
interface
RMS Data-bus
HBK 1303-1
Page 8-17
Instruction Manual
23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
Figure 8-4 Connection Diagram TCA 1218
8.1.4 LF 1576A Low Frequency Generator
General Description
LF 1576A provides the audio signals to be modulated onto the carrier signal in the transmitter.
The levels of the 90Hz, 150Hz, RF level, ident level and ident Morse code is programmable
from the RMS.
The setup for generating the baseband output signals is stored in non-volatile memory on
board, and consists of values in numeric form for all the frequency components of the signals.
The low-frequency output signals are continuously calculated by the DSP using a formula that
takes into account modulation levels, phase and ident signalling. The user can alter the setup
when logged in with access level 3 (or higher).
Block Diagram:
See Figure 8-5. The block descriptions refer to the names on the block diagram.
Block Description:
DIGITAL
This block is composed of all the digital parts of the design (except for the self-test function)
I/O SYSTEM
The I/O-system basically consists of the FPGA NMP 137, and does the following tasks:
• Generates status to the IIC INTERFACE (SELFTEST)
• Passes protocol messages between the RMS and the DSP by converting data
between the RMS bus and the DSP DATA bus

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
• Limits write access to the memory, so that the DSP cannot alter the sources for the
signal generation while not allowed by the system access level of the system
• Generates 30Hz test signal (controlled by the DSP)
• Converts RMS bus data to PA IIC control data (LOCAL DATA BUS on block sche-
matic) and vice versa
• Calculates Voice and DME control output
PA IIC CTRL, UTILITY
Converts LOCAL DATA BUS from the I/O SYSTEM to PA IIC BUS data, and vice versa. It also
generates 16 digital spare outputs, which again is controlled by the DSP.
DSP
This block consists of a Digital Signal Processor with supporting circuits. An oscillator at
32.768 MHz clocks the DSP.
The DSP runs the program NMS 221. The program basically generates the LF-values sent to
the two four-channel DACs in the analog part. This is done by calculating the frequency com-
ponents in real-time based on stored values in the memory system. The scaling of the fre-
quency components and the behaviour of the analog outputs can be altered by the RMS
through a dedicated RMS-DSP protocol. NMS 221 also generates the 30Hz test signal.
MEMORY
Is the memory in the system, and consists of a FLASH device with the DSP program NMS 221
(loaded at start up), and an EEPROM for storing non-volatile data. The EEPROM is not per-
mitted to be written to unless in access level 3 (see I/O SYSTEM).
SERIAL (optional)
This is a serial interface used for debugging the software, and is not present for ordinary pro-
duction line boards.
IIC INTERFACE (SELFTEST)
The internal selftest systems are an IIC device with eight inputs. Four of them are dedicated
for the status of the internal voltages (2.5V, 3.3V, 15V and -15V). The other four inputs are
dedicated for the status of the digital system (DSP alive, RMS alive, DSP Flash memory fail
and DSP EEPROM memory fail). These inputs are read by the RMS on the IIC bus.
ANALOG
Comprises the analog circuitry of the board (amplifiers, filters etc.) plus the DAC circuits. In
addition a high precision voltage reference is provided.
COU BASEBAND MOD and CLR BASEBAND MOD

• Converts serial data from DSP to the actual signals sent to the transmitter. This
includes:

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
• Digital to analog conversions for CSB, SBO I and SBO Q

• Mixing of voice signals onto baseband
• Selecting between analog and digital voice input
• Generation of ident signals (filtered from CSB baseband)
COU DAC and CLR DAC
Digital to Analog Converters that converts serial data from the DSP to actual LF outputs. The
resolution of the DACs used is 14-bits.
VOLT REF (10V)
Reference voltage used by the analog circuitry.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
,,&%86
9
9 ,,&
9 ,17(5)$&(
9
6(/)7(67
67$786
506 /2&$/
'$7$ '$7$%86
3$,,& 3$,,&%86
%86 &75/
,26<67(0 6<65(6(7 87,/,7<
103$ 3$,,&567
767
92,&(&75/
'0(,'(17287
:5&75/
RS232
'63'$7$%86
0(025<
COU Ident
CLR Ident
'63 6(5,$/
237,21$/
',*,7$/
6(5,$/'$7$ %$6(%$1'
6,*1$/6
&28&6%
$ ]

5() &286%2,
%
92,&( $&
,1
&
5()'
'
&28'$&
&28%$6(%$1'02'
&/5&6%
$ ]

5() &/56%2,
%
$&
& &/56%24
5()'
' 63$5($1/*
&/5'$&
&/5%$6(%$1'02'
92/75()
9 $1$/2*
/)$
HBK 1284-1
Figure 8-5 LF 1576A Block Diagram

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
8.1.5 OS 1221A RF Oscillator
The OS 1221A module generates the RF signals used for the generation of the carrier signals
in the transmitters (Section 8.1.6).
Block Diagram:
CHANNEL
SELECT COU
PROGRAMABLE 64
DIVIDER
FREQUENCY MODULUS 2
ADJUST DIVIDER
FREQ.
TEST
MODULUS SELECT
POINT
RF
X-TAL OSCILLATOR
12 dB
PHASE LOWPASS BANDPASS OSC_COU_RF
DETECTOR FILTER VCO FILTER
WINDOW LOCK DETECT TO IIC BUS

COMP.
LOCK SCHM.TR LOCK DETECT TO IIC BUS

DETECT LATCH
LOCK DETECT TO IIC BUS

SCHM.TR
COU Tx ON/OFF
CHANNEL
SELECT CLR
PROGRAMABLE 64
DIVIDER
MODULUS 2
DIVIDER
MODULUS SELECT
RF
OSCILLATOR
12 dB
PHASE LOWPASS BANDPASS OSC_CLR_RF
DETECTOR FILTER VCO FILTER
WINDOW LOCK DETECT TO IIC BUS

COMP.
LOCK SCHM.TR LOCK DETECT TO IIC BUS

DETECT LATCH
LOCK DETECT TO IIC BUS

SCHM.TR
CLR Tx ON/OFF HBK587-5
Figure 8-6 OS 1221A Block Diagram

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
Block Description:
The RF signal is generated by a voltage controlled oscillator (VCO) built around a Dual Gate
Mosfet Transistor, chosen because of its good noise properties, and the possibility to have an
isolated output at the drain.
A part of the signal is fed back, via a buffer for isolation, to a divide by 64, modulus 2 pres-
caler. This is connected to a MC145152-2, a phase locked loop circuit that performs the count-
ing and control of the prescaler. The total count, and thereby the frequency, is set by inserting
shunts onto an array of pins.
Please find tables of jumper settings in Section 7.10
The internal oscillator of the Course PLL is also used to control the Clearance PLL.
A combined low-pass filter and integrator is built around an operational amplifier, that gener-
ates the control voltage for the RF oscillator. This control voltage is also fed to a window com-
parator that alarms the system via the I2C-bus if it falls outside its limits. Another control of the
PLL is via the Lock Detect output of the PLL. The Lock Detect output of the PLL circuit is fed
to a low pass filter and a transistor. This output consists of narrow negative going pulses when
the loop is locked, and wide pulses of variable width when out of lock. Therefore the transistor
will be turned off when in lock, and on when out of lock.
The output from the transistor goes to two Schmidt triggers, one latching and one unlatching.
The latching Schmidt trigger turns the signal off if the loop goes out of lock and alarms the I2C-
bus. It is reset by power on and/or a low transition of the COU_OFF signal (CLR_OFF for the
clearance channel). The other Schmidt trigger is used to inform the system of the situation
that the loop have been out of lock, but is in lock at the present time even if the signal is turned
off (this might be the situation if a short drop in the 12V supply occurs, or a change in fre-
quency setting has taken place).
The signal ON/OFF switching is done in two steps. The first is a diode switch and the next is a
Dual Gate Mosfet transistor that can be turned off by taking its control gate to a low potential.
This transistor acts as a buffer for the signal when in the on state. At the output of this transis-
tor, a second order bandpass filter follows, that serves as an output match of the transistor
and to filter out harmonics of the output voltage. The last stage is a 12dB gain block that deliv-
ers 10mW of power to the PC1225 card.
The Clearance channel is identical to the Course channel except for the crystal oscillator for
the PLL.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
8.1.6 LPA 1580A Localizer Power Amplifier Assembly
The Localizer Power Amplifier Assembly LPA 1580A consists of CB 1579A and PA 1577A
mounted together as shown on Figure 8-7.
The LPA 1580A receives RF signals and LF signals from the OS 1221A Oscillator (Section
8.1.5) and LF 1576A low frequency generator (Section 8.1.4) respectively. The outputs from
the LPA 1580A are carrier sideband (CSB) signal and sideband only (SBO) signal.
Detected samples of the CSB and SBO signals are available on the BNC connectors on the
front panel. Power measurements and status signals are interfaced to the RMS.
Block Diagram:
See Figure 8-8 and Figure 8-9.
Description of operation:
The CSB input signal is supplied to both I and Q inputs in the CSB amplifier. In the SBO ampli-
fier, separate inputs are used for I and Q to allow phase adjustment of the SBO signal.
The difference between the modulating I and Q signals and the feedback signals is amplified
through the Error amplifier. The I and Q error signals are mixed with an in-phase and a quad-
rature LO signal in the Modulator. LP filtering is applied to remove harmonic mixer products.
The resulting RF signal is then amplified to a suitable signal level for the PA input. A forward
coupled signal from the directional coupler at the PA output is BP filtered at the Demodulator
input. The RF signal is then mixed with an in-phase and a quadrature LO signal. LP filtering is
applied on the resulting I and Q baseband signals to remove residual RF. DC offset is elimi-
nated from I and Q feedback signals before they are subtracted from the I and Q input signals.
This effectively forms a control loop that tracks and eliminates amplitude and phase errors
made by the PA, although a small error will always be present. This linearisation- technique is
known as Cartesian Feedback.
Description of blocks:
1. AGC and splitter
The AGC ensures that the modulators and demodulators are supplied with a constant LO sig-
nal independent of the oscillator output level. The AGC has a dynamic range of approximately
6dB. The splitters first split the modulator and demodulator paths, and then split each in CSB
and SBO paths
2. Phase control
• Mosfet based phase compensator with 270 degrees of phase adjustment
• The phaseshift is obtained by changing the voltage across a varicap, controlled from
the IIC bus

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
• The phaseshifted LO signal is buffered with a second FET stage and a gainblock.
Hence the proper signal level and isolation is obtained
• The uncompensated branch is buffered with a gainblock only
• Buffering of LO signal to give sufficient LO level, and give isolation between the modu-
lator and demodulator LO inputs
3. Error amplifier
• The difference between I/Q signals and I/Q feedback signals is amplified and fed to the
I/Q modulator and to the Maint. Monitor (I-drive, Q-drive)
• Differential inputs eliminates DC offset on the baseband signal
• A precision Op Amp with sufficient bandwidth compared to required loop bandwidth
has been deployed as error amp. The op-amp operates as an integrator
• Switches are included for open-loop and unity gain settings in the alignment process,
controlled by the IIC bus
• In the CSB path I-off and Q-off signals allow adjustment of the I-path and Q-path sepa-
rately, controlled by the IIC bus
• Protection mechanism for high VSWR and high temperature power down. Attenuation
of the input signal to the error-amplifier to turn off the PA output, in case of high VSWR
or temperature
• Protection mechanism to delay the loop gain until the PA is fully powered
4. Modulator
• Direct modulation by means of Gilbert-cell mixers. Baseband and LO input, modulated
RF output
• The LO to the I and Q modulators is provided by a 90º hybrid
5. PA
• Input power: 6 dBm
• The CSB amplifier uses a driver stage with 2 RF mosfet transistors, and an output
stage with one push-pull double RF mosfet transistor. The SBO amplifier uses 2 RF
mosfets
• The CSB amplifier for GP CLR uses uses 2 RF mosfets
• A hybrid coupler is located on the PA board. Forward coupled signal is attenuated and
split to a monitor output and to the feedback loop. Reverse coupled signal is detected
on the PA board. Reverse signal controls VSWR power down switches on the Error
amp board

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
6. Splitter/attenuators
• A resistive splitter splits the forward coupled signal in one path to the demodulator and
one path to the power measurement and test connector circuits
7. Demodulator
• Direct demodulation by means of Gilbert-cell mixers. RF and LO input, baseband out-
put
• The LO to the I and Q demodulators is provided by a 90º hybrid
• DC offset adjustment eliminates DC offset from the I and Q demodulator output in the
feedback loop
• Gain adjustment to set equal gain in I and Q paths
• The circuit is composed of Op-amps and digital controlled variable resistors. The vari-
able resistors are controlled through an IIC bus
• Lowpass filters on the output of the demodulator to prevent RF overload of the base-
band sections
8. Maintenance circuits
• A 8-input A/D converter measures forward and reverse power in the CSB and SBO
outputs. It also reads the I and Q drive level to the modulators (normal operation) or
the output from the demodulators (test mode)
• A temperature sensor IC provide temperature measurements, and also can provide an
over-temperature signal to the error amplifier
• The measurements are sent to the RMS system through the IIC bus

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
Figure 8-7 LPA 1580A Assembly

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
Figure 8-8 LPA 1580A CSB Block Diagram

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
Figure 8-9 LPA 1580A SBO Block Diagram

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
8.1.7 Change-Over Relays
The change-over relays are located on the top of the transmitter subrack. They connect Tx1 to
the antenna output, and Tx2 to the dummy load(s) or vice versa, controlled from the TCA
1218 module. he 2-frequency LLZ systems use 4 relays for COU CSB, COU SBO, CLR CSB
and CLR SBO
In the hot standby systems, additional directional couplers are inserted between the coaxial
relays and the dummy loads to give signals to the standby monitor.
Block Diagram:
C O A X C O N T R O L
M O N IT O R
C S B C S B
T X 1
O U T P U T
5 0 o h m C S B
C O A X
R E L A Y
C S B
T X 2
C O U P L E R
C O A X C O N T R O L
S B O
T X 1
O U T P U T
5 0 o h m S B O
C O A X
R E L A Y
S B O
T X 2 H B K 1 2 8 9 -1
Figure 8-10 Change-over system Block Diagram

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
8.1.8 SC 898C Signal combiner (Hot Standby only)
SC 898C combines a CSB and a SBO input into one combined CSB/SBO output for use in
standby transmitter DS simulation.
Block Diagram:
DC420C
CSB 50
ohms SC898C
FROM -18dB
COAXIAL R2
RELAY
LLZ: +10dBm
DC420C R1 R3
GP: +15dBm
SBO 50
ohms
U1
-8dB
15-35dB att. R9
R6 DS
R11 R8 R7
R5 R4
R10
HBK572-4
Figure 8-11 System Diagram standby TX CL/DS simulation
System Description:
Refer to the system diagram above. CSB and SBO signals from the STB transmitter are sam-
pled through the directional couplers (DC420C) and fed to the input ports CSB and SBO
respectively on the SC898C signal combiner. The cable lengths are cut such that the input
phase difference of P2 is 180°.
Block Description:
The unit has two input ports and one output port. The assembly consists of a 18dB fixed atten-
uator, a15-35dB adjustable attenuator, and a 3 dB 0 phase signal combiner(P2).
The purpose of the unit is to combine samples of the CSB and SBO signals from the transmit-
ter and produce standard Course Sector DDM signal output.
In order to combine to a standard value DDM at the DS port the RF phases of the 90 and
150Hz sidebands from the CSB signal must be in antiphase (180°) with the SBO signal at the
input ports of the combiner P2. The DDM is then given by the equation
ESBO
DDM = 2
ECSB
DDM expressed in absolute value, ESBO and ECSB given in relative voltage values.
The adjustable attenuator R4 is provided for accurately setting of the DS DDM value.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
8.1.9 PS 1227C Power Supply
PS 1227C supplies the NORMARC 70xxB cabinet with +27V, ±15V, +8.5V and +5V, from a
+27V input.
Block Diagram:
T R M _ A L
V 2 7 P V 2 7 _ C S B _ C O U 1
A
I2 7 _ C S B _ C O U 1
G N D
V 2 7 _ S B O _ C O U 1
A
I2 7 _ S B O _ C O U 1
V 2 7 _ C S B _ C L R 1
A
I2 7 _ C S B _ C L R 1
V 2 7 _ S B O _ C L R 1
A
I2 7 _ S B O _ C L R 1
D C V 1 5 P
S Y N C D C V 1 5 P _ M E A S
V 1 5 N
D C
V 1 5 N _ M E A S
D C
V 9 P
D C
V 9 P _ M E A S
D C
V D D
D C
H B K 1 2 9 0 -2 V D D _ M E A S
D C
Figure 8-12 PS 1227 Block Diagram
Block description:
The ±15V, +8.5V and +5V supplies are provided by integrated DC/DC converter modules.
PS 1227 can operate in redundancy with a second power supply using or'ing diodes. The out-
put voltages are measured prior to these or'ing diodes, to be able to identify a power failure.
The four 27V outputs supply the LPA 1580A power amplifiers. The current drains are con-
verted to a voltages used for current measurement. The ILS output signals may be shut down
by cutting off the 27V supplies. This is done by the TERMINATOR alarm signal (TRM_AL)
(Section 8.1.3.4).

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
8.1.10 RMA 1215A RMS Assembly
General description
The RMA 1215A is a microprocessor based assembly that contains the RMS software, and
also forms the basis for the NORMARC 7000B RMM system. The RMA 1215A consists of
KD 1214A front panel with keyboard and display, and the RM 1213A the RMS module.
Block Diagram:
RM 1213A
Watchdog
Jumper RESET
Memory
Battery
RAM
EPROM
EEPROM
Interrupts Interrupt
circutry CPU Real time
clock
CTRL
port
IIC IIC bus

Analog controller
MUX
Three serial
Analog + A channels.
voltages D
- Double RS232
UART drivers
Analog
MUX
KD 1214A
CTRL
CTRL port Display
port
Ident
speaker
Det. CTRL
Analog port
ident MUX
Keypad
CTRL RMS bus
port
HBK588-2
Figure 8-13 RMA 1215A Block Diagram

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
Figure 8-14 Connection Diagram RMA 1215
Block Description.
CPU
The CPU is an 80C188EB micro controller with addresses decoding unit and two UARTs. Only
one of these UARTs is utilised for serial communication. The other has been mapped as a par-
allel IO port. The operating frequency of the CPU is 20 MHz provided by an external 40 MHz
oscillator.
WATCHDOG AND BATTERY
A watchdog resets the CPU at power up and if the CPU does not toggle the watchdog reset bit
within approx. 1.6 sec. intervals, or if the +5V supply voltage goes below the battery voltage.
In the latter case battery voltage will be connected to the RAM and RTC. Removal of the bat-
tery or jumper S1 will cause the RESET line to go low and inhibit any function on the module.
If a battery is not available, operation can be achieved by shortening the battery socket. The
battery can be disconnected by removing jumper S1 when the module is being stored. The
battery voltage is measured using an optocoupler switch in order not to discharge the battery.
The battery provides approximately one month of memory retention at continuous use (sys-
tem power turned off). RMS battery status is reported by the RMS system as Maintenance
Parameter RMS BATTERY.
INTERRUPT CIRCUITRY
The interrupt circuitry combines several interrupts into the 5 interrupt inputs of the CPU.
DISPLAY
The display used is a 20 characters by 4 lines LCD.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
KEYPAD
The keypad consists of seven pushbuttons, directly connected to a parallel input port.
DOUBLE UART
The dual UART is a standard UART with a 16 byte bidirectional FIFO on both channels.
RS 232 DRIVERS
The RS 232 drivers are single supply RS 232 drivers. They provide the interface between the
UARTs and external PCs and modems.
IIC CONTROLLER
The IIC controller handles the communication on the IIC bus which is the main communication
bus for maintenance data collection in the NM 70xx ILS.
REAL TIME CLOCK
The real time clock keeps track of the date and time. Date and time is used to timestamp mon-
itor and maintenance data sets. The RTC accuracy is better than 15 seconds per 24 hours.
CTRL PORT
The CTRL ports in the block diagram are parallel IO ports for the CPU.
ANALOGUE INTERFACE
The analogue interface block contains two analogue multiplexers and an A/D-converter. The
main function of this block is to measure analogue signals provided from several measure-
ment points in the NORMARC 70xxB equipment. The analogue multiplexers are connected to
the same address bus with separate enable bits. This allows the analogue inputs to be meas-
ured separately as single ended signals, or to be paired for differential measurements.
AURAL IDENT
The Aural ident block contains an analogue MUX, an amplifier and a loudspeaker. It enables
the user to listen to the ident morse code from each of the four transmitters. The Det. ident
inputs are detected CSB signal, filtered through a 1020Hz bandpass filter.
MEMORY
The memory block contains RAM for data storage, EPROM for the program and EEPROM for
permanent system setup parameters. The RAM has battery backup in order to retain logging
data during a power down.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
8.1.11 CI 1210A External Connection Interface
The CI 1210A External Connection Interface board provides all the interfaces for the NOR-
MARC 70xxB equipment for external connections except from RF signals and power supply.
The module performs transient overload protection on all inputs. In addition CI 1210A contains
a battery protection circuit and a modem demodulation circuit.
The external connections are:

• 1 Remote control port (FSK and opt. RS 232)
• 3 RS232 ports (local and remote RMM)
• 4 DC-loops (antenna cable fault detection)
• 1 DME (keying synchronisation)
• 2 Temperature sensors (indoor/outdoor)
• 1 AC-level measurement input
• 3 Single-ended Analogue inputs
• 8 Auxiliary Digital Inputs/Outputs

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
Block Diagram:
+5V -15 V +15 V
Connection Interface Mux contol
CI1210A
Batt warning 1
Batt warning 2
Batt warning 2
Temp indoor
Temp outdoor
Temp indoor
AC level Analog Mux Analog out
Temp outdoor
Anl. In 1
AC level
Anl. In 2
Anl. In 1
Anl. In 3
Anl. In 2
Anl. In 3
User dig 0 User dig 0

IIC interface IIC bus
Local PC RS232
Over Voltage
Protection
Remote 1 PC RS232 Remote 1 RS232
Remote 2 PC RS232 Remote 2 RS232
Remote Control RS232

Modem & config
Remote
Remote Control FSK
Control FSK
Ident IN from DME

Ident OUT to DME DME config
DME Active from DME
DC loop 1 ref
DC loop 1 detect
4 * DC loop detect
DC loop 2 ref
DC loop 2 detect
DC loop 3 ref
DC loop 3 detect 4 * DC loop ref
DC loop 4 ref
DC loop 4 detect
Charger Amp Cabinet
Voltage
ref.
Battery Amp
HBK 1301-1
Figure 8-15 CI 1210A Block Diagram

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
8.1.12 BW 1566A Battery Warning (Hot Standby only)
The BW 1566A is used in hot standby equipment with dual battery banks to provide the follow-
ing features:
• Battery protection for the additional battery bank
• Voltage and current measurements for the additional battery bank
• Low battery warning for both battery banks
• Modem power
The BW 1566 has the same battery protection functionality as the CI 1210 board located in
the equipment and which is monitoring the first battery/Charger bank. Circuit description is
therefore as for CI 1210 described in Section 8.1.11.
+5V -15 V +15 V
Battery Warning
BW1566A
Modem
power
Batt 1
Cabinet Pwr 1 Comparator low voltage
warning
Batt 2
Comparator low voltage
warning
Charger 2 current
Battery 2 current
Charger 2 Amp Cabinet Pwr 2
Voltage
ref.
Battery 2 Amp
HBK 1304-1
Figure 8-16 BW 1566A Block Diagram

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
8.1.12.1 Battery Protection
The module will disconnect the battery if the battery voltage falls below a preset voltage, nor-
mally 22VDC. The trigger voltage can be adjusted between 20V and 24V by adjusting R22.
8.1.12.2 Low battery detector and logic
The module contains circuits to give warnings when the battery voltages are falling below a
predetermined adjustable level, normally set to 23VDC, or optionally, if a battery is isolated by
the battery fuse (detected by the auxiliary switch connected to the battery circuit breaker).
Separate warning circuits are provided for each battery bank.
The battery low trigger voltage can be adjusted between 20V and 24V by adjusting R101 for
battery bank #1 and R1 for battery bank #2
Separate signals for Battery #1 low, Battery #1 isolated, Battery #2 low, Battery #2 isolated is
provided for connection to the Digital inputs of the RMS system in the LLZ / GP racks.
8.1.12.3 Modem Power
The module also provides fused power output J7 to modem or other external equipment.
Using diodes this output is supplied from both charger/Battery banks and these diodes also
prevent a reverse current from one battery bank to the other.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
8.1.13 MB 1575A Monitor Section Motherboard
Description:
MB 1575A is the backplane for the 19” subrack in the NORMARC 70xxB cabinet. MB 1575A
is a passive motherboard that provides all interconnections between the printed circuit board
in this subrack and all interface for external signals except from RF (Coax) cabling.
Table 8-1 shows the plug-in module connectors.
Section # Module
Monitor 1 1 MO 1212A
1 MF 1211A
1 External Frontend 1
Monitor 2 1 MO 1212A
1 MF 1211A
1 External Frontend 2
Standby Monitor 1 MO 1212A
1 MF 1211A
Station Control 1 TCA 1218A
RMS 1 RMA 1215A
Transmitter 1 1 LF 1576A
1 OS 1221 A/B
Transmitter 2 1 LF 1576A
1 OS 1221A/B
Power Supply 2 PS 1227C
Table 8-1 MB 1575A plug-in module connectors

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
Figure 8-17 Connection Diagram

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
8.1.14 Coaxial Cabling
Figure 8-18 shows the coaxial cable interconnections used in Figure 8-19 shows the addi-
tional connections in the Hot Standby cabinets.
Figure 8-18 Coax cable connection

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
Figure 8-19 Additional Coax Connections Hot Standby

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
8.2 Tower Equipment
The following paragraphs describe the modules to be located in the control tower.
8.2.1 RCA 1240 Remote Control Assembly
The RCA 1240C Remote Control Assembly consists of the remote control RC 1241B and front
panel RF 1242A.
The RCA 1240D Remote Control Assembly consists of the remote control RC 1241B and front
panel RF 1242B.
RCA 1240C is used for cold standby equipment and RCA 1240D is used for hot standby
equipment.
They provide the user’s interface to the ILS Cabinet from the control tower or technical equip-
ment room. The RCA 1240 is connected to the ILS cabinet either using ordinary telephone
lines or using the RS 232 interface selected by jumper plugs on the RC 1241B.
The telephone line interface conforms to V.21 standard (300 baud FSK) for use with ordinary
2-wire 600 ohm telephone line. The transmitter level is -10 dBm, and the receivers dynamic
range is from -10 dBm to -34 dBm.
Most of the functionality of the remote control is provided by the FPGA NMP128A described in
Section 8.2.1.1
Block Diagram:
RC 1241B
OPTO OUTPUTS
Telephone Line
line driver/modem LED OUTPUTS RF 1242A/B
Interface Signal Front panel
RS232 select STATUS drivers LEDs
RS232
driver &
config ALARM
Control
and
uarts
RST_RC_AURAL_ONLY
RF 1242A/B
Keys and RST_SL_AURAL_ONLY
KEYBOARD INPUTS
switches
CONTROL INPUTS
AUX_IN AUX_OUT
SLAVE
LED
OUTPUTS
SLAVE DIRECT
INPUTS
HBK546-4 SLAVE DIRECT BUS
Figure 8-20 Block Diagram RCA 1240

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
Figure 8-21 Interconnection Diagram RCA 1240
Block schematic signal description:
CONTROL INPUTS ILS control signals. Consists of INTERLOCK and TX_OFF.

OPTO OUTPUTS Opto coupler outputs. Collector/emitter for ALARM, NORMAL,
WARNING and STB_ALARM.
SLAVE_DIRECT_BUS Data interface to optional slave panel. Consists of open collector out-
puts (ALARM, NORMAL, WARNING, STB_ALARM and
SLAVE_BUZZER) and active low inputs (ON_OFF, CHANGEOVER
and SILENCE).
Block Description:
CONTROL AND UARTS
This block interprets serial data from the ILS cabinet and generates status outputs to front
panel LEDs, slave panel outputs, opto outputs and buzzer signal based on the received sta-
tus. Failure in data from ILS results in alarm condition. Discrete inputs from the front panel
keyboard, control/AUX inputs and slave panel (Section 8.2.5) are collected and sent to the ILS
rack as serial data.
INTERFACE SELECT
These straps select between telephone line and RS 232 for interface with the ILS cabinet. The
default setting is line interface.
LINE DRIVER/MODEM
This block converts logic level serial signals to and from FSK level line signals.
RS 232 DRIVER
This block converts logic level serial signals to and from RS 232 level signals.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
SIGNAL DRIVERS
This block drives the front panel LEDs, opto outputs and slave panel LEDs.
FRONT PANEL LEDs
This block contains the front panel LEDs used to indicate the operational status of the ILS.
KEYS AND SWITCHES
This block contains the pushbuttons and switches used for operator input.
8.2.1.1 NMP128A Remote Control
NMP128A is a FPGA providing most of the remote control functions. NMP128A is based on
the Actel ACT1020 FPGA. For electrical specifications see the ACT1020 datasheet.
Block Diagram:
ON_OFF_KEY
CHANGEOVER_KEY ON_OFF
Command
SLAVE_ON_OFF_KEY mixer CHANGEOVER
SLAVE_CHANGEOVER_KEY
SERIAL
DATA
TX
OUT
uart
AUX_IN
INTERLOCK
ACCESS_GRANT_SWITCH
TX_OFF
RC_BUS
MESSAGE DATA
MESSAGE DATA LED OUTPUTS
CARRIER RX Message
DETECT uart PARITY ERROR detector
SERIAL
LED SLAVE LEDS
DATA
&
IN
buzzer
NEW MESSAGE AUX_OUT
filter
MESSAGE ALARM BUZZER

TIMEOUT
New message
SLAVE BUZZER
timer
SILENCE_KEY
SLAVE_SILENCE_KEY
RST_RC_AURAL_ONLY HBK564-3
RST_SL_AURAL_ONLY
Figure 8-22 Block Diagram NMP128A
Block Description:

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
COMMAND MIXER
This block mixes the on/off and changeover commands from the different sources (remote
control front panel or slave front panel input).
TX UART
Converts parallel data to 2-bytes serial messages. The protocol is start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop
bit, odd parity.
RX UART
Converts serial data from remote control to parallel data (2 bytes).
MESSAGE DETECTOR
Messages are accepted only if two equal messages are received in sequence. If so, the data
output is updated and a new-message pulse is asserted.
NEW MESSAGE TIMER
Checks that an OK message and carrier detect is present. Missing message or no carrier
detect for 2 seconds or more gives timeout.
LED & BUZZER FILTER
Data from the ILS cabinet is filtered according to the following descriptions:
• Missing data from ILS sets an alarm condition (Alarm LED on, all other off)
• Activating SILENCE-key turns on all LED’s (lamptest)
• Interlock turns off all LEDs
Buzzers are activated at transitions from normal to alarm. Lamptest always activates buzzers.
Pressing SILENCE-key deactivates the local buzzer. The remote control SILENCE-key may
deactivate the slave panel buzzer, while SILENCE from the slave panel may deactivate the
local buzzer (both separately configurable).
8.2.1.2 RCA 1240E/F
An alternative Remote Control Assembly RCA 1240E/F can be supplied that is providing the
same functionality as the RCA 1240C/D with a few added features:
• Enhanced comm. fail detection and reporting. At communication fail for the link (FSK
or RS 232) between the Remote Control and the connected ILS equipment all indica-
tors on the Remote Control Panel will be blanked apart from the red ALARM LED that
will be lit. A dedicated Comm. Fail output is added (P10 pin 2 on MB 1346)
• Configurable Interlock input polarity (S13)
• Configurable polarity of Slave output signals (S14)
• Configurable blanking of all LED indicators apart from the red ALARM LED at Interlock
OFF (S15)

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
These features are implemented on the RC 1563A board that is replacing the RC 1241B used
in the RCA 1240C/D. Configuration straps S13, 14 and 15 are added with functionality
described in 7.3.5.
8.2.2 MB 1346A Motherboard
MB 1346A is a motherboard for RCA 1240.
Interconnections
J1 Backplane connector for RCA 1240
J2 RS-232 interface for external line modems, radio modems or fibre

optic connections (alternative to P9 line connection)
P3 Parallel interface to slave panel or status unit
P4,P5 Power supply connectors
P6 Aux in/out signals. May be used for FFM status, intruder alarm or other
auxiliary functions
P7 Opto coupler outputs for ALARM, NORMAL, WARNING and STB.

ALARM
P8 Interlock connector (alternative connector located on slave panel)
P9 RC telephone line interface. Includes alarm output and off input to

establish automatic shutdown of GP when LLZ is off
NOTE
When MB 1346A is used with RCA 1240 and Interlock function is not used (connected), a jumper
plug must be installed in P8 (or P2 on SF 1344A on Slave Panel).
8.2.3 PS 635B Power Supply
Description:
PS 635B is based on a switch-mode DC/DC converter module (PKG 2611PI) that features
shutdown at low input voltage and current limiting of outputs (short circuit proof). Supply inputs
are protected by a fuses.
8.2.4 MB 1347A Motherboard
Description:
MB 1247A motherboard provides the interface to PS 635B power supply (Section 8.2.3)
through connectors for 24VDC input and 5VDC output.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
8.2.5 SF 1344A / SP 1394A Slave Panel
Description:
The SF 1344A and SF 1394A slave panel provide user interfaces to the ILS from the control
tower or equipment room. The slave panels are connected to the RCA 1240 remote control
assembly (Section 8.2.1) handling the interface with the ILS cabinet. SF 1344A and SF 1394A
are identical apart from mechanical dimensions.
FRONT PANEL LEDs
LEDs on the front panel indicate the ILS status (Alarm/Warning/Normal)
BUZZER
The internal buzzer provides aural alarms.
PUSHBUTTONS
Pushbutton switches provide the on/off and silence (aural alarm reset) function. The silence
button is also used for lamp test.
INTERLOCK CONNECTOR
A connector is provided for interfacing a IL 1379/IL 1380 interlock switch (Section 8.2.6).

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
8.2.6 IL 1379 / IL 1380 Interlock switch
Description:
The interlock switch is used if the runway has two ILS’s for opposite runway directions that
shall be interlocked.
The interlock switch consists of a key-operated change-over switch, and is connected to the
RCA 1240 remote control (Section 8.2.1) or SF 1344A/SF 1394A slave panels (Section 8.2.5)
of the affected localizer and glide path equipment.
IL 1379 and IL 1380 are identical modules apart from mechanical dimensions. The IL 1379 is
3 height units by 10 length units (approx. 12,8x5cm). The IL 1380 is 2 height units by 9 length
units (approx. 8,4x4,5cm).
Figure 8-23 shows the Interlock switch connections.
INTERLOCK MB1346 / P8
SWITCH OR
SF1344 / P2
RWY A RWY B
1 INTERLOCK
2 GND
5 4 2 1
1 2 LLZ runway B
LLZ runway A
2 1
1 2 GP runway B
GP runway A
2 1
HBK775-3
Figure 8-23 Interlock switch connections

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
8.2.7 Category Status System (Optional)
This section describes the system that is used to calculate the ILS category for one runway
end and to display the FFM status. This system (if installed) should be located alongside the
LLZ and GP remote controls at the airport.
It consists of the following units:
MB 1509A Motherboard
CF 1510A Cat and FFM unit
CP 1511A Category and Status Panel
The MB 1509A should be located alongside the ILS remote controls, and the CF 1510A must
be plugged in the J1 connector of the motherboard. The CP 1511A in the remote control room
must be connected to the CF 1510A via a flatcable. A CP 1511A unit may also be located in
the tower. The units in the equipment room
Figure 8-24 Cat Status system in equipment room
The following subchapters describe the different modules. For details regarding the Cat-status
calculation and the installation, please see chapters 8.2.7.4 and 8.2.7.6, respectively.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
8.2.7.1 CP 1511A Cat- and FFM-Panel
The Status Panel CP 1511A consists of a front panel of size 128.4 x 50.5 mm with LEDs used
to indicate the CAT status of the equipment and the status of the FFM (Far Field Monitor).
A PCB is mounted to the front panel on spacers. This PCB consists only of the passive cir-
cuitry used to light the status LEDs.
NORMARC ILS
SILENCE
ILS
FFM STATUS
ALARM OFF
LLZ
WARNING
ONLY
NORMAL CAT I
CAT II
CAT III
HBK1374-1
Figure 8-25 CP 1511A Cat Panel
The LEDs at the left side of the panel show the status of the Localizer Far Field Monitor
(FFM). There are three lamps: FFM Alarm, FFM Warning and FFM Normal. Only one of the
lamps FFM Alarm and FFM Normal may be lit simultaneously, while the FFM Warning lamp is
independent.
The LEDs at the right side of the panel show the ILS status for one runway end. The possible
alternatives are CAT III, CAT II, CAT I, LLZ Only and OFF. Only one of these lamps will be lit at
a time. If interlock is used, all lamps are off when the runway is deselected.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
In addition, a buzzer and a silence pushbutton is included.
The connection to the rest of the system is done through a 25 pin PCB mounted male DSUB
connector. This must be connected either to CF 1510 (for use in equipment room) or to con-
nector P7 on MB 1509 if it is intended for use elsewhere, e.g. in the tower.
For further details, please see chapter 8.2.7.4.
8.2.7.2 CF 1510A Cat- and FFM-status indicator
The CAT- and FFM Indicator CF 1510A is an Euro Board of size 160 x 100 mm. The unit inter-
faces the Motherboard MB 1509A through a 96-pin Euro connector.
The unit gets the alarm- and warning status from the LLZ- and GP remote controls (via moth-
erboard MB 1509A) and use this information to calculate the overall CAT-status for one run-
way end.
One 25-pin DSUB connector mounted on the PCB makes it possible to connect the unit to a
CP 1511A Cat Status Panel via a flat cable. This panel will normally be located right in front of
the CF 1510A unit.
Block Diagram:
Figure 8-26 CF 1510A Block Diagram

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
Block Description:
LLZ Inputs:
Status signals from Localizer (LLZ) remote control. The signals enter the motherboard MB
1509A via flatcable and the CF 1510A through 96-pin euro connector J1.
GP Inputs:
Status signals from Glidepath (GP) remote control. The signals enter the motherboard MB
1509A via flatcable and the CF 1510A through 96-pin euro connector J1.
Strap Fields:
This is a set of two-way straps connected to the status signals from LLZ and GP. The jumper
settings for each of these signals determine if this shall lead to a downgrade to CAT II, CAT I
or no downgrade (when strap is not set).
CAT-status:
This is the part of the circuit board that determines the CAT-status for the runway. The unit
uses the Interlock, Alarm and Normal status received from the remote controls to determine
whether the ILS system is “OFF”, “LLZ Only” or in one of the three categories. In the latter
case the status from the strap fields are read to determine if a the overall CAT status of the
runway. Please refer to Table 8-2
Buzzer Logic:
This is a small logical sub unit that is used to switch the buzzer on or off. The buzzing is deter-
mined by the use of silence pushbuttons on the status- and slave panels and the toggling of
the FFM Alarm signal.
Outputs:
Signals used to display the calculated CAT status for the runway. The signals are sent to sta-
tus panel CP 1511A located in tower and a Personal Computer via the backplane MB 1509.
The signals are also relayed to the CAT- status panel CP 1511A located in the control room in
front of the CF 1510-module via connector P2.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
8.2.7.3 MB 1509A Motherboard
The Motherboard MB 1509A is of size 129.5 x 50mm and is meant for installation in a remote
control cabinet (i.e. RFA 1353). Typical mounting is alongside the backplanes for the localizer
and glide path remote controls.
The main purpose of the MB 1509A is to connect the input signals from LLZ, GP and FFM to
the CAT status system (CF 1510A/CP 1511A) and provide output connectors for the output
signals. All connectors are listed below.
Interconnections
Front side
J1 96-pin Euro backplane connector for CF 1510A
Rear side:
P2 25pin DSUB connector to/from LLZ Remote control.
P3 25-pin DSUB connector to/from GP Remote control..
P4 10-pin header from LLZ Remote Control. Aux in/out signals, also used for
FFM status signals.
P5 10-pin header from GP Remote Control. Aux in/out signals.
P6 4-pin Weidemüller connector (Power in)
P7 25pin DSUB connector used to connect to Status Panel (1:1 connection).
P8 10-pin header from CF 1510A. Status outputs - opto open collector.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
J1
P3
P2
P7
P8
P5
P4
P6
HBK1376-1
Figure 8-27 MB 1509A seen from the back side

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
8.2.7.4 Calculation of the ILS Category Status
Which one of the five lamps indicating runway status that actually are lit is determined by the
criteria shown in Table 8-2
Signal LLZ GP Remarks

name Alarm Alarm (Only one of the five signal lamps may be lit)
Cat III No No Determined by warning status.
Cat II No No Determined by warning status.
Cat I No No Determined by warning status.
LLZ Only No Yes
Off Yes (N/A)
Table 8-2 CAT Status criteria.
If an interlock switch is used to deselect the runway, none of the LEDs are lit.
It is important to remember that the lamps only show the status of the ILS equipment. To oper-
ate in CAT II or III the airport and runway in question must be certified for this kind of opera-
tion. Other criteria must also be fulfilled. For details about this, please refer to your aviation
authorities.
If both the Localizer and Glide Path are operating as normal (no alarms) the runway is consid-
ered to be operative. The maximum CAT status of the ILS equipment is then calculated from
the warning status of the Localizer and Glide Path.
The status indicators are field programmable by links located on the CF 1510A unit. Each link
has two positions, marked with CAT II and CAT I. A link set in CAT II position means that this
particular event/failure shall cause a runway degradation to CAT II. The same goes for CAT I.
A link not present means that the event shall not cause degradation.
The following selectable downgrade criteria are available:
LLZ:
Strap Failure Strap not set Strap set in Strap set in

pos 2-3 pos 1-2
S1 Lost primary TX (standby on air) (Stby) No degrade CAT II CAT I
S2 Lost standby TX (standby alarm) No degrade CAT II CAT I
S3 Mains loss (Batt) No degrade CAT II CAT I
S4 Mains low (Batt low) No degrade CAT II CAT I
S5 Loss of Ident if Ident is not executive (Ident) No degrade CAT II CAT I
S6 Loss of monitor-redundancy (Disagr) No degrade CAT II CAT I
S7 Primary parameter warning (Param) No degrade CAT II CAT I
Table 8-3 Localizer downgrade criteria

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
FFM:

pos 2-3 pos 1-2
S8 Far-field monitor alarm No degrade CAT II CAT I
S9 Far-field monitor warning No degrade CAT II CAT I
Table 8-4 FFM downgrade criteria
GP:

pos 2-3 pos 1-2
S10 Lost primary TX (standby on air) (Stby) No degrade CAT II CAT I
S11 Lost standby TX (standby alarm) No degrade CAT II CAT I
S12 Mains loss (Batt) No degrade CAT II CAT I
S13 Mains low (Batt) No degrade CAT II CAT I
S14 Loss of monitor-redundancy (Disagr) No degrade CAT II CAT I
S15 Primary parameter warning (Param) No degrade CAT II CAT I
Table 8-5 Glide Path downgrade criteria
The straps are OR’ed in such a way that it is sufficient if one of the criteria for a downgrade is
present to cause a runway downgrade. If, for instance, a LLZ primary warning (S7) is selected
to cause degradation to CAT I, such an event will cause the runway to be downgraded to
CAT I, regardless of the other settings.
8.2.7.5 Far Field Monitor
FFM Warning and FFM Alarm are derived directly from the input signals from the Far Field
Monitor (if applicable), after being buffered at the FFM Control unit. The FFM signals are
relayed via RS232 connections from the FFM Recording Unit at one of the runway shelters.
The FFM Normal signal is just the FFM Alarm signal inverted.
On transition from FFM Normal to FFM Alarm, a control signal for an alarm buzzer is set. The
buzzer is reset by a reset signal or transition to Normal. The reset signal has a filter to prevent
short pulses generated by cable crosstalk from resetting the buzzer.
Both FFM Warning and FFM Alarm may be set to cause a downgrade of the equipment, either
to CAT II or CAT I.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
8.2.7.6 Installation
The installation of this system is explained briefly in the previous chapters. There are, how-
ever, some details that should be clarified.
The basic installation is as follows:
Motherboard MB 1509A must be installed close to the Localizer and GP remote controls in the
equipment room, preferably in the same cabinet RFA 1353.
A flatcable must be used to connect the Localizer Remote Control (via connector P3 on its MB
1346A) to connector P2 on MB 1509A.
A flatcable must be used to connect the Glide Path Remote Control (via connector P3 on its
MB 1346A) to connector P3 on MB 1509A.
A flatcable must be used to connect the FFM/Aux-signals from Localizer Remote Control (via
connector P6 on its MB 1346A) to connector P4 on MB 1509A.
Power must be connected from connector P5 on the nearest MB 1346A to connector P6 on

MB 1509A. Use a 1:1 connection.
Insert CF 1510A into MB 1509A after configuring strap fields as desired (see chapter 8.1.4).
Connect CP 1511A to CF 1510A with a flat cable for showing CAT-status in the equipment
room.
If desired, connect to CP 1511A in tower (or elsewhere) with a 1:1 cable from connector P7 on
MB 1509A.
After doing this, the installation procedures in either Chapter 8.2.7.6.1 or chapter 8.2.7.6.2
must be used, depending on the airport configuration.
8.2.7.6.1 One runway end without an interlock system:
If the Cat-Status system is used with an ILS that is not configured for interlock the following
must be done in order for the system to work.
Both the LLZ and GP must be configured for NOT INTERLOCK. (This is set with strap 1 on
the ILS configuration platform U6 on TCA 1218 and has most likely been done at the ILS
installation. Please refer to the relevant chapter in the Installation section) .
Strap P8 must be set for both the LLZ and GP remote Controls.
Strap P2 must be set for the CP 1511A located in the tower (if applicable).
In the rare case when there is no CP 1511A, or similar slave panel, in the tower, then the inter-
lock signal must be grounded. This may be done by grounding pin 23 on connector P7 on the
MB 1509A Motherboard, e.g. by connecting pin 23 (interlock) and pin 1 or 13 (GND) on a con-
nector mating P7 of MB 1509A.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
8.2.7.6.2 Two runways with an interlock switch :
If the Cat-Status system is used with an ILS that is configured for interlock the following must
be done in order for the s to work.
Both the LLZ and GP must be configured for INTERLOCK. (This is set with strap 1 on the ILS
configuration platform U6 on TCA 1218 and has most likely been done at the ILS installation.
Please refer to the relevant chapter in the Installation section) .
Strap P8 must NOT be set for the LLZ and GP remote Controls.
Strap P2 must NOT be set for the CP 1511A located in the tower (if applicable). The interlock
switch shall be used to select/deselect the ILS depending on which runway is in use.
Note! The interlock switch is normally connected to the Remote Control Motherboards MB 1346A for
both the LLZ and GP. In installations with the Cat-Status system the interlock switch shall
instead be connected to P2 on the CP1511A located in tower (if installed) or, alternatively, con-
nected to pin 23 (interlock) and pin 1 or 13 (GND) on P7 of MB 1509A.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
8.2.8 Meter Panel (Optional)
8.2.8.1 MP 1574A Meter Panel
General description
The MP 1574A Meter Panel contains two elapsed time counters counting the time that the
LLZ equipment and the GP equipment have been transmitting (on the air/Normal). The Meter
Panel is a 3U panel size module to be installed in the Remote Control subrack next to the
Remote Control Panels controlling the ILS equipment to be monitored.
The time counted will be used for gathering information of true operational time (and MTBO)
for the ILS equipment. Elapsed time is stored in the counters at power off and will continue
counting at power up and Normal situation.
Note: That in case the ILS equipment is configured for alternate Remote Control indication of trans-
mitter status in Service mode of operation, Table 7-4, the time counters will also count the time
the equipment is transmitting in Normal in Service mode.
8.2.8.2 Detailed description
Control signal (Normal signal) and power supply is taken from the MB 1346 Remote Control
Motherboards (P7 and P5). As long as the remote control is showing green Normal indication,
the counter will count the operating time. Elapsed time is stored in the counters at power off
and will continue counting at power up and Normal situation, but it is also possible to reset the
time by connecting the reset pin (pin 4) on the time counter module to +27V (i.e. pin 1 on the
module). This might be relevant if the Meter Panel is moved to a new ILS Remote Control, but
is not a feature that is normally used.
8.2.8.3 Connectors
Connector J1 is for power supply input to the MP1574.
J1 Pin: Signal name Description
1 GND Supply GND input
3 +27V DC +27V supply input

Table 8-6 1 Pin-out MP1574 J1
Connector J2 is for control/Enable signal input from LLZ Remote Control.
J2 Pin: Signal name Description True Level
3 +27V DC +27V to external optocoupler N.A.
4 ENABLE Counting enabled High (+27V)

Table 8-7 Pin-out MP1574 J2

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
Connector J3 is for control/Enable signal input from GP Remote Control.
J3 Pin: Signal name Description True Level
3 +27V DC +27V to external optocoupler N.A.
4 ENABLE Counting enabled High (+27V)

Table 8-8 Pin-out MP1574 J3
8.2.8.4 Cables
Connector J1, J2 and J3 are located on individual cables to be connected directly to connec-
tors on the Remote Control panel motherboards.
8.2.8.5 Installation
MP 1574 is mounted in the Remote Control subrack next to the Remote Control Panel Assem-
blies (RCA 1240) by removing of a blind front panel.
8.2.8.6 Interconnection
Connect J1 to P5 on the nearest MB 1346 Motherboard. Connect J2 to P7 on the MB 1346

Motherboard for the LLZ Remote Control Panel and connect J3 to P7 on the MB 1346 Mother-
board for the GP Remote Control Panel.
8.2.8.7 Operation
The time counted will be shown on the displays as long as +27V DC is applied to the Remote
Control Panels. An hourglass shown on the displays will be blinking indicating that time is
counted (elapsing), a steady hourglass will indicate that time counting is stopped.

23136-I8/Rev.6/02-Jul-07
SECTION 9 APPENDIXES
Appendix A. Monitor and Maintenance Parameters
A.1 Monitor Parameters
These are ILS parameters measured by the monitors. An alarm on any of these parameters
can be configured to cause change-over/shut-down.
Channel Parameter Description

CL DDM Course Line - Difference in depth of modulation
SDM Course Line - Sum of depth of modulation
RF Course Line - RF level
DS DDM Displacement Sensitivity - Difference in depth of modulation
SDM Displacement Sensitivity - Sum of depth of modulation
RF Displacement Sensitivity - RF level
NF DDM Near Field - Difference in depth of modulation
SDM Near Field - Sum of depth of modulation
RF Near Field - RF level
CLR DDM Clearance - Difference in depth of modulation
SDM Clearance - Sum of depth of modulation
RF Clearance - RF level
- DF Difference Frequency
IDENT CL ACT IDENT activity signal from CL monitor (LLZ only)
CLR ACT IDENT activity signal from CLR monitor (LLZ only)
CL ID MOD IDENT signal modulation on CL monitor (LLZ only)
CLR ID MOD IDENT signal modulation on CLR monitor (LLZ only)
TEST DDM Monitor self test signal
SDM Monitor self test signal
RF Monitor self test signal
SELF TEST Monitor self test signal from TX control (derived from monitor
self test parameters)
DC LOOP DC LOOP 0 DC-LOOP for antenna element group 0 (LLZ only)
DC LOOP 1 DC-LOOP for antenna element group 1 (LLZ only)
FFM DDM Ch. A Far Field Monitor Ch. A DDM
(only with SDM Ch. A Far Field Monitor Ch. A SDM
FC 1391) RF Ch. A Far Field Monitor Ch. A RF
DDM Ch. B Far Field Monitor Ch. B DDM
SDM Ch. B Far Field Monitor Ch. B SDM
RF Ch. B Far Field Monitor Ch. B RF
Execute Alarm Select Non-Exec / Exec alarm
Table A-1 Monitor Alarm/Warning Parameters

23136-IAPA/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
©2007 Park Air Systems AS Page A-1
A.2 Maintenance Parameters
These parameters may cause maintenance warning and can be used for fault isolation pur-
poses.
Originates Parameter Gives WARNING when

from module (with default warning limits setting):
MO 1212 +5V OK +5V Supply Voltage below predefined limit.
STS ACT ADC conversion error
DSP PFO DSP power failure
DSP ERROR DSP watchdog warning.
DIAG RST Not used
SYNC ERROR COMPARATOR out of sync
+15V OK +15V Supply Voltage below predefined limit.
-15V OK -15V Supply Voltage below predefined limit.
MF 1211/ CL RF LEVEL RF level from CL monitor channel below predefined limit.
MF 1219
CL BASEBAND Baseband level from CL monitor channel below predefined limit.
DS RF LEVEL RF level from DS monitor channel below predefined limit.
DS BASEBAND Baseband level from DS monitor channel below predefined limit.
NF RF LEVEL RF level from NF monitor channel below predefined limit.
NF BASEBAND Baseband level from NF monitor channel below predefined limit.
CLR RF LEVEL RF level from CLR monitor channel below predefined limit.
CLR BASEBAND Baseband level from CLR monitor channel below predefined limit.
LF 1576 -15 V OK -15 V supply voltage status.
+15 V OK +15 V supply voltage status.
+2.5 V OK +2.5 V supply voltage status.
Watchdog Watchdog status. This signal is set to 1 if the watchdog has reset the
DSP.
DSP execution DSP software execution status. This signal is set to 0 if the DSP
does not access the FPGA.
DSP memory check DSP memory status. This signal is set to 1 by the DSP software if it
detects any failure in the external flash program memory or the inter-
nal RAM.
EEPROM parity Parity check status of the configuration data EEPROM. This signal is
set to 1 by the DSP software if a parity error is detected in any of the
configuration settings.
OS 1221 COURSE OUTPUT RF level output to COURSE transmitter is below a predefined level
LEVEL
COU TUNEVOLT COURSE tune voltage outside predefined limits.
COURSE SYNTH Synthesizer has been out of lock since COURSE transmitter was
LOCK WARN turned on.
COURSE LOCK COURSE synthesizer is out of lock
DETECT
CLR OUTPUT LEVEL RF level output to CLR transmitter is below a predefined level
CLR TUNEVOLT CLR tune voltage outside predefined limits.
CLR SYNTH LOCK Synthesizer has been out of lock since CLR transmitter was turned
WARN on.
CLR LOCK DETECT CLR synthesizer is out of lock
Table A-2 Maintenance Parameters (Part 1)

23136-IAPA/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
Page A-2 ©2007 Park Air Systems AS
Originates from Parameter Description

module
TX LPA/GPA +5 V OK +5 V supply voltage status.
+27 V CSB Measurement of the +27 supply voltage fed to the CSB power
amplifier stage.
+27 V SBO Measurement of the +27 supply voltage fed to the SBO power
amplifier stage (not applicable for clearance transmitters in GP
equipment).
-15 V OK -15 V supply voltage status.
CSB forward power Measurement of the forward power on the CSB output.
CSB reverse power Measurement of the reverse power on the CSB output.
SBO forward power Measurement of the forward power on the SBO output.
SBO reverse power Measurement of the reverse power on the SBO output.
CSB I-phase drive Measurements of the peak voltage to the CSB I modulator
CSB Q-phase drive Measurements of the peak voltage to the CSB Q modulator
SBO I-phase drive Measurements of the peak voltage to the SBO I modulator
SBO Q-phase drive Measurements of the peak voltage to the SBO Q modulator
Temperature Measurement of the temperature of the power amplifier assembly
in degrees Celcius.
RMA 1215 RMS +5V Measured value of +5V voltage
RMS BATTERY Measured value of RMS battery voltage
PS 1227 PS1 -15V Measured value of -15V supply voltage from PS1227 #1
PS2 -15V Measured value of -15V supply voltage from PS1227 #2
PS1 +5V Measured value of +5V supply voltage from PS1227 #1
PS1 +8.5V Measured value of +8.5V supply voltage from PS1227 #1
PS2 +8.5V Measured value of +8.5V supply voltage from PS1227 #2
TX1 CLR I SBO Measured value of current through TX1 CLR SBO amplifier
TX1 CLR I CSB Measured value of current through TX1 CLR CSB amplifier
TX1 COURSE I SBO Measured value of current through TX1 COURSE SBO amplifier
TX1 COURSE I CSB Measured value of current through TX1 COURSE CSB amplifier
TX2 CLR I SBO Measured value of current through TX2 CLR SBO amplifier
TX2 CLR I CSB Measured value of current through TX2 CLR CSB amplifier
TX2 COURSE ISBO Measured value of current through TX2 COURSE SBO amplifier
TX2 COURSE I CSB Measured value of current through TX2 COURSE CSB amplifier
CI 1210 CHARGER STATUS1 Charger 1 Voltage OK / not OK
CHARGER STATUS2 Charger 2 Voltage OK / not OK
BATT CURRENT 1 Measured value of battery current (negative if charging)
POWER CURRENT 1 Measured value of total system current consumption
BW 1566 BATT CURRENT 2 Measured value of battery current (negative if charging)
(HOT STB ONLY) POWER CURRENT 2 Measured value of total system current consumption
Table A-3 Maintenance Parameters (Part 2)

23136-IAPA/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
©2007 Park Air Systems AS Page A-3

module
CI 1210 Temp in Inside temperature (if installed)
Temp out Outside temperature (if installed)
AC voltage Mains voltage (if installed)
User defined 3 user defined analog inputs
Table A-4 User Defined Analog Inputs Maintenance Parameters

module
CI 1210 User defined 8 user defined logical inputs/outputs
Table A-5 User Defined Logical Inputs/Outputs Maintenance Parameters

23136-IAPA/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
Page A-4 ©2007 Park Air Systems AS
Appendix B. Far Field Monitor
This chapter only applies to Localizer installations with the Far Field Monitor option installed.
B.1 System Description
B.1.1 Functional Description
Figure B-1 NORMARC 7000B Block Diagram for FFM interface
The Far Field Monitor interface for NORMARC 7000B consists of a common FFM Interface (FI
1392) and one FFM Controller (FC 1391) for each of the two main monitors. The FI 1392 is
located on the wall-mounted part of the cabinet (above connection interface CI 1210 inside
the cabinet), while the FC 1391 cards are placed next to their corresponding monitor MO
1212.
The FFM parameters integrates with the other monitor parameters for monitor data storage
etc.
B.1.2 Detailed Description FC1391
General Description
The FC 1391 is a FFM controller that interacts with the connected FFM through serial mes-
sages. The FFM parameter values are extracted from the received FFM messages. The val-
ues are compared against alarm limits and the alarm status is then delayed according to the
specified FFM alarm delay. After this the parameter values and status are sent to the corre-
sponding monitor through use of the external channels on MO 1212. A common FFM alarm
status is sent as a parameter value to the MO 1212, which generates alarm to the station con-
trol on TC 1216 if the FFM is in alarm state.

23136-IAPB/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
©2007 Park Air Systems AS Page B-1
Block Diagram
Figure B-2 FC 1391 Block Diagram
Signal Description
RxD Serial data from FFM.
TxD Serial data to FFM.
Configuration FFM interface configuration. Includes selection of FFM

type, baudrate, parity etc.
RMS request irq. Interrupt generated by call on IO-bus from RMS.
RMS commands RMS commands (status request, setting of alarm limits

etc.).
RMS data Requested data to RMS. Generated as response to RMS

commands.
Ext. data FFM parameter values to monitor.
Local status LED lamp status indicating status of FFM controller.
LCD status Debug status to local LCD on FC 1391.
Keyb. pushb Keyboard pushbutton status from connected LCD panel.
EXT channel External channel select (0-7). Used to select one of the
FFM parameter available on the external bus.
EXT val External value to monitor corresponding to EXT channel

input.

23136-IAPB/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
Page B2 ©2007 Park Air Systems AS
IO_bus The RMS IO-bus used for read/write to connect boards.
Access levels RMS Access level as decided by the station control.
FFM status FFM alarm and warning status indications.
Block Description
CPU SYST
Consists of a CPU system and controls all the functionality in the FFM controller. The CPU
SYST decodes messages from the FFM, sends parameter values etc. to the EXT IF and
(upon request) to the RMS IF. The status of the FFM controller is displayed on status LED’s
and on an optional LCD/keyboard (if connected). Alarm and warning status indications are
also sent to the remote control through the AUX channels on the remote control interface.
Under normal operation, the LCD and keyboard will not be used. The CPU system will also
generate an "alive" signal to the FFM interface FI 1392. This signal is used to determine which
of the FC 1391 that shall be allowed to send commands, when two FC 1391's are connected
to the same FFM.
CONFIG
Is a strap field readable by the CPU SYST for selecting the appropriate setup of the communi-
cation with the FFM.
EXT IF
Is the part of the NMP125A FPGA that interfaces to the external bus on the corresponding MO
1212 for this FC 1391. This function is implemented as write registers that are filled with the
appropriate FFM parameter values.
RMS IF
Is the part of the NMP125A FPGA that interfaces to the RMS through the IO-bus. It is imple-
mented as read/write registers with software handshaking between the RMA 1215 and the FC
1391.
STATUS LEDS
Is showing the operating status of the FFM controller. The four LED's has the following func-
tions:
LED 1: On when there is no FFM alarm, off when there is one or more alarms.
LED 2: On when there is no FFM warnings, off when there is one or more
warnings.
LED 3: Blinks when a byte in a command is transmitted to the FFM, normally

every 3. second when using the NORMARC 3634 FFM receiver.

23136-IAPB/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
LED 4: Blinks when a message from the FFM has been received and vali-
dated, normally every second when using the NORMARC 3634 FFM
receiver.
LCD/KEYBOARD INTERFACE
is a connector designed to connect to a KD 1214, as used in the RM 1215 assembly. This unit
is used only for debugging purposes, and will not be connected during normal operation of the
ILS.
B.1.3 Detailed Description FI 1392
General Description
The FI 1392 is an interface card between the FFM controller FC 1391 and the connected FFM
(e.g. NORMARC 7720 or NORMARC 3634). When using the NORMARC 7720 FFM, the RS
232 interface shall be used. When using the NORMARC 3634, either of the built in modem
(CCITT V.21 standard) or the RS 232 interface shall be used.
Block Diagram
Figure B-3 Block Diagram FI 1392
Signal Description
RxD Serial data from FFM.
M1 TxD Serial data from FC 1391 on monitor 1 to FFM.
M2 TxD Serial data from FC 1391 on monitor 2 to FFM.
Alive Signal from monitor 1 to detect if FC 1391A is present.

23136-IAPB/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
Modem control* Modem clock and Modem mode select (originate/answer).
Modem RxD* Decoded Rx signal from FFM through modem.
RS RxD Decoded Rx signal from FFM through RS 232.
Line signals The physical line from the FI 1392 to the FFM.
RS 232 RxD RS 232 input signal from FFM.
RS 232 TxD RS 232 output signal to FFM.
NOTE: * Only applicable if connecting to a NORMARC 3634 FFM
Block Description
CONTROL
Generates 3.5794 MHz to feed the modem circuit, and selects between originated and answer
mode for the modem.
MODEM
Is the CCITT V.21 modem with support components. Only applicable if connecting to a NOR-
MARC 3634 FFM.
INTERFACE SELECT
Selects between modem and RS 232 connection between FC 1391 and FFM.
COMMAND SELECT
Selects which of the TxD signals from the two FFM controllers that shall be sent to the FFM.
LINE INTERFACE
Is the line transformer and overvoltage protection. Only applicable if connecting to a NOR-
MARC 3634 FFM.
RS 232 DRIVERS
Is the RS 232 drivers for Rx and Tx interface to FFM.

23136-IAPB/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
B.1.4 Detailed Description NMP125A
General Description
The Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) NMP125A interfaces the CPU system on FC
1391 to the external bus on the corresponding monitor and the RMS IO-bus.
Block Diagram
Figure B-4 Block Diagram NMP125A
Signal Description
ADDR Address lines from CPU system.
DATA Data lines to/from CPU system.
CONTROL Control signals for accessing NMP125A.
RMS IN Data register values from RMS (32 bits).
RMS OUT Data register values to RMS (32 bits).
IOD 8 databits for RMS IO-bus.
IOCS Card select strobe for RMS IO-bus. Used to detect present
hardware modules.
IOCSB Card select back signal for hardware detection of present

modules.
IOS Strobes used for accessing the RMS IO-bus.

23136-IAPB/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
Block Description
CPU INTERFACE
is the part of the NMP125A that interfaces to the CPU system of FC 1391.
RMS INTERFACE
is the part of the NMP125A that generates and decodes the RMS IO-bus access.
EXT INTERFACE
is the register based part of the NMP125A that interfaces to the external bus from MO 1212.
B.2 Installation
B.2.1 Mechanical and electrical installation
FC 1391
Two FC 1391 cards are inserted next to the monitor1 and monitor 2 respectively.
FI 1392
The FI 1392A is located above the connection interface CI 1210 inside the cabinet (first open
the door). Two flatcables are connected from P1/P2 on FI 1392 to P9/P10 on MB 1575,
respectively.
The FI 1392 has two connectors for interfacing to a FFM. The P3 is used for connecting to the
NORMARC 3634 FFM using the built-in modem (V.21). Pin 2 and 3 shall connect to the 2-wire
cable connected to the FFM. P5 is a standard 9 pins D-sub used for RS 232 interface to a
either NORMARC 7720 or NORMARC 3634. Leased line modems can be used in connection
with RS 232 interface when a 2-wire telephone line is available.
B.2.2 Interfacing the NORMARC 7720 Far Field Monitor
When connecting to the NORMARC 7720 FFM, the RS-232 interface shall be used. Commu-
nication can be made using external modems, fibre-optic modems, radio modems or by other
means.
B.2.2.1 Interface with RS-232
A RS-232 cable is used to connect the NORMARC 7720 and the NORMARC 7000 LLZ to
external communication equipment.
The link runs at selectable baud rate 1200, 2400 or 9600bps..
The communication equipment (external line modems, fibre-optic modems, radio modems)
must be capable of operating in transparent mode, since the equipment software will not send
any initialisation or control strings.

23136-IAPB/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
On the NORMARC 7720, connect the external equipment to the connector labelled AUX with
a standard modem cable. The AUX connector is located inside the FFM cabinet on the rear of
the NORMARC 7720 instrument. On the NORMARC 7000B LLZ, connect to P5 on FI 1392
with a standard modem cable.
For testing, the two units can be connected directly with a 9 pin null-modem cable.
Strap settings FI 1392
S1 S2 S3 S4
1-2: Selects originate 3-4: Selects RS-232 3-4: Selects RS-232 3-4: Selects RS-232
mode operation operation operation
Strap settings FC 1391 (S2)
Field name Setting (1=IN, Description

0=OUT), rightmost
digit=LSB
PROTOCOL 0-2 101 Selects NORMARC 7720 protocol
BAUDRATE 0-2 101 – 1200

100 – 2400 Selects baud rate
010 – 9600
All others Don’t care Don’t care
Pin 1 on S1 is the pin closest to the text U2.
Pins 1 and 2 on S2, S3 and S4 are the pins closest to the text S2, S3 and S4. Pin 3 and 4 are
the middle rows on S2, S3 and S4.
NORMARC 7720 must be set up using the same baud rate as on the FC 1391.
The NORMARC 7720 always communicate using 8 data bits, no parity and 1 stop bit.
B.2.3 Interfacing the NORMARC 3634 - Far Field Monitor Receiver Unit
There are two ways to interface the FFM receiver NORMARC 3634 to the NORMARC 7000
LLZ rack, either by using the built-in modems or by using RS-232 interfaces and external
modems, fibre-optic modems, radio modems or other means.
B.2.3.1 Interface with internal FSK modems
A telephone pair (2 wire) is used between the NORMARC 3634 and FI 1392 inside the NOR-
MARC 7000B LLZ rack.
On NORMARC 3634, use the connector labelled MD 661 P2 (25 pin D-SUB). On the FI 1392,
use the connector P3 (4 pin Weidmuller).

23136-IAPB/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
CONNECTIONS:
NORMARC 3634, MD 661 P2 NORMARC 7000, FI 1392

Pin 11 and 13 Pin 2 and 3
STRAP SETTINGS IN FI 1391A:
S1 S2 S3 S4
1-2: Selects originate 1-2: Selects modem 1-2: Selects modem 1-2: Selects modem
Pins 1 and 2 on S2, S3 and S4 are the pins closest to the text S2, S3 and S4
Strap settings FC 1391 (S2):
Field name Setting (1=IN, Description

0=OUT), rightmost
digit=LSB
PROTOCOL 0-2 111 Selects NORMARC 3634 protocol
All others Don’t care Don’t care
In NORMARC 3634, no settings are required.
B.2.3.1.1 Interface with RS-232
A RS-232 cable is used to connect the NORMARC 3634 and the NORMARC 7000 LLZ to
external communication equipment.
The link runs at 300bps full duplex.
The communication equipment (external line modems, fibre-optic modems, radio modems)
must be capable of operating in transparent mode, the equipment software will not send any
initialisation or control strings.
On the NORMARC 3634, connect the external equipment to the connector labelled RS-232
with a standard modem cable. On the NORMARC 7000B LLZ, connect to P3 on FI 1392 with
a standard modem cable.
For testing, the two units can be connected directly with a 9 pin null-modem cable.
Strap settings FI 1392
S1 S2 S3 S4
1-2: Selects originate 3-4: Selects RS-232 3-4: Selects RS-232 3-4: Selects RS-232

23136-IAPB/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
Pins 1 and 2 on S2, S3 and S4 are the pins closest to the text S2, S3 and S4. Pin 3 and 4 are
the middle rows on S2, S3 and S4.
In NORMARC 3634, no settings are required.

23136-IAPB/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
Appendix C. Power Supply
Suppliers’ Documentation:
Powec SC8 or Eltek SMPS 700.

23136-IAPC/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
©2007 Park Air Systems AS Page C-1

23136-IAPC/Rev.2/02-Jul-07
Page C-2 ©2007 Park Air Systems AS
Installation Guide
SMPS 700 Wallbox
354029.033
Issue 3
September 2002
Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the
part of ELTEK ASA.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means— electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and recording— for any purpose without the explicit written permission of
ELTEK ASA.
Copyright ©: ELTEK Energy, Norway 2002
NS-ISO 9001 Certificate No.4

This product holds a CE mark and satisfies all requirements covering relevant standards and
directives.
EMC LVD
à LVD73/23/EEC Low Voltage Directive
Generic Immunity Standard
à EN50082-1 Residential, Commercial and Light Industry
à EN50082-2 Industrial Environment
Generic Emission Standard
à EN50081-1 Residential, Commercial and Light Industry
à EN50081-2 Industrial Environment
ELTEK Energy
P.O. Box 2340 Strømsø
N-3003 DRAMMEN
Norway
Phone: 47 32203200
Fax: +47 32203210
E-Mail: eltek@eltekenergy.com
Visit our Web site on Internet: http://www.eltekenergy.com
354029.033 Issue 3, September 2002

This document was produced using Microsoft Word.
mgc 09/2002
2(18) Installation Guide, SMPS 700 Wallbox

354029.033, v3, September 2002
Contents
1 General 5
1.1 Installation .............................................................................. 5

1.2 Electrical Installation ............................................................ 6
1.3 Operation ................................................................................ 6
1.3.1 Visual indications 6
1.3.2 Adjustments 7
2 Electrical / Mechanical Data 9
2.1 Input ........................................................................................ 9

2.2 Output ..................................................................................... 9
2.3 Electromagnetic interference.............................................. 10
2.4 Safety ..................................................................................... 10
2.5 Mechanical Data................................................................... 11
2.6 Environment......................................................................... 11
2.6.1 Temperature range 11
2.6.2 Humidity 11
2.6.3 Acoustic noise 11
2.6.4 General 11
2.6.5 Interface 11
3 System drawings 12
Installation Guide, SMPS 700 Wallbox 3(18)

354029.033, v3, September 2002
Contents

354029.033, v3, September 2002
1. General
1 General
The Eltek range of wall mounted switch mode power supply has been specifically developed to meet the DC
power requirements for the telecommunications, industrial and marine industries
The SMPS 700 SI Wallbox has the following features:
• High efficiency
• Power Factor Correction
• Low weight and volume
• Soft Start
• 12Volt, 24Volt and 48Volt options
• Boost charging
• Output Power Limiting
• Automatic Over Temperature De-Rating
• Alarm and Control Facilities
• Compliant with International Standards including Marine Applications
The SMPS 700 SI Wallbox can be used for both portable and stationary equipment either as a power supply or a
battery charger.
Warning
This product has no user serviceable parts inside. There are Hazardous Voltages inside during operation! Do not
expose the unit to moisture, water, dust or other items that may result in short-circuits or fire. Do not block the
airflow through or around the module.
Removal of the cover should be done by authorised service personnel only. Wait for 10 minutes after
disconnection before removing the cover to ensure all high voltages have been discharged to a safe level.
⇒ The SMPS 700 Wallbox must be mounted vertically only.
1.1 Installation
Please check that the equipment is not damaged and is in accordance with your order. Compare the barcode
labels on the module and the package - they should be identical. Check both the input and output voltages
against your system voltage levels.
Remove the front plastic cover by releasing the four screws in front of SMPS700 Wallbox.
⇒ The metal cover inside the SMPS 700 Wallbox must NOT be removed!
Use «Dimension drawing»( Ref. Figure 2) as a guideline for mounting holes. The two upper fixing screws must
be mounted first. Then the SMPS700 Wallbox must be hooked on, and the two lower fixing screws must be
mounted.
The SMPS 700 Wallbox is now ready for electrical connection.

354029.033, v3, September 2002
1. General
1.2 Electrical Installation

See Figure 1 Connection Drawing SMPS 700 Wallbox
All connections are to be done from the bottom of the rectifier. The Front plastic cover must be removed before
making the connections.
Max. Cable size: -Mains input: 2.5mm2.
-Low voltage disconnection: 2.5mm2.
-Boost connection: 2.5mm2.
-Alarm connection: 2.5mm2.
-Output voltage: 10.0mm2.
Note 1: The alarm relay connections are found on J3 pins 4 to 6 which are marked “Alarm Open” and in normal
operation there is a short circuit between J3:4 and J3:6 (common) which opens in case of alarm.
J3 pin 5 is marked “Alarm Closed” there being an open circuit between J3:5 and J3:6 (common) in normal
operation which is shorted in case of alarm.
Note 2 (only when boost voltage is required): The Boost voltage connections must be done with an external
timer relay. The terminals «NO» (normally open) and «C» (common) at the external timer relay must be
connected in accordance with the connection drawing.
1.3 Operation
The SMPS 700 SI Wallbox is intended for use as a stand-alone module with an alarm contact for remote sense of
the SMPS 700 Wallbox, and visible LED’s in front.
1.3.1 Visual indications

Front yellow LED: «POWER» - indicates operating module.
Front yellow LED: «CURRENT» - indicates that output current is displayed.
Front yellow LED: «VOLTAGE» - indicates that output voltage is displayed.
Front red LED: «RECT.ERROR» - indicates an error state. The Alarm relay will change into the
passive (deenergized) state simultaneously, and the module will be in shutdown mode.
Front red LED: «LOAD FUSE» - indicates that the DC output fuse is in OFF -position. (see
connection drawing)
Front red LED: «LOW BATTERY» - indicates that the DC output voltage is below a specified limit.
This limit can be adjusted. (see connection drawing.)
Front red LED: «HIGH BATTERY» - indicates that the DC output voltage is above a specified limit.
This limit can be adjusted. (see connection drawing.)

354029.033, v3, September 2002
1. General
1.3.2 Adjustments
Figure 1 Connection Drawing SMPS 700 Wallbox shows available adjustments. All potentiometers are factory
adjusted and should only be operated by qualified service personnel.
Level adjustments:
241113.340 241113.320 241113.310

48V-version: 24V-version: 12V-version:
Adjustable Factory Adjustable: Factory Adjustable: Factory
settings: settings: settings:
Output voltage [V]: 40.0-59.5 53.5 20.0-29.5 26.8 10.0-29.5 13.4
*Overvoltage
protection level [V]
56.0-60.0 60.0 26.0-30.0 30.0 26.0-30.0 30.0
*Current limit [A]: 5.0-15.0 14.0 20.0-29.5 25.0 20.0-29.5 29.0
High battery voltage
level [V]:
54.0-60.0 56.0 24.0-30.0 28.0 12.0-30.0 14.0
Low battery voltage
level [V]:
45.0-55.0 50.0 22.5-27.0 25.0 10.0-13.0 12.5
Low voltage
disconnect [V]:
40.0-53.0 43.0 20.0-26.0 21.5 10.7-13.0 10.8
*: Only authorised personnel must change this setting.
Table 1: Level adjustments.
Example: Adjusting high battery voltage level:

Note!: The levels marked: *, must only be changed by authorised personnel.
Ref.: Connection Drawing (annexe).
Say, we want to change the high battery voltage alarm level from 28.0V to 28.5V at the SMPS 700 Wallbox,
24V-version.
1. Press right hand button on the front panel of the SMPS 700 Wallbox so that the display
shows the output voltage.
2. Remove plastic front cover.
3. Disconnect the external loads and batteries.
4. Adjust the DC-output voltage potentiometer with a screwdriver (clockwise) until the
display shows 28.5V (the High Battery Alarm led will illuminate).
5. Adjust the High battery voltage alarm potentiometer with a screwdriver until the High
Battery Alarm (H.B.A) LED turns off. Turn the screwdriver backwards carefully just
to the point when the H.B.A LED illuminates. The H.B.A -level is now set to 28.5 V.
6. Adjust the DC-output voltage potentiometer counter clockwise until the display shows
26.8V.
7. Re-connect the loads and batteries.
8. Replace the plastic cover.

354029.033, v3, September 2002
1. General

354029.033, v3, September 2002
Electrical / Mechanical Data
2 Electrical / Mechanical Data
2.1 Input
• Voltage: 230VAC nominal ± 20% (total range: 185VAC - 275VAC ).
High voltage: 275 - 300 VAC for < 10 minutes (reduced power factor, increased
harmonic current).
• Within the input voltage range 100.0 - 185.0 the SMPS 700 Wallbox reduces the output
power to app. 40 - 50% of full power. For instance; the 24V-version has an output
current > 10A with nominal voltage 26.8VDC and input voltage equal to 100VAC!
• Frequency: 50 Hz or 60 Hz nominal ±10% (total range: 45 - 66 Hz). Frequency
deviation: 35 Hz to 100 Hz for < 10 minutes (reduced powerfactor and increased
harmonics).
• Input current: 3.2 ARMS at 230 VAC , 4.2 ARMS maximum at 185VAC - full load.
Harmonic currents according to IEC555-2. Current THD: < 7% at full load.
• Power factor: Approx. 0.995 at full load, 230VAC +20%/–10% input
• Efficiency: >90.5% typical at 230VAC, nominal output voltage and full load. >80% at
20% load
• Input fuse: F 5.0A (H) (fast, high rupture capacity) (5*20mm) in Live input.
Disconnect mains for fuse replacement, see Connection Drawing.
• Inrush current protection: <8A followed by converter soft-start
2.2 Output
Output voltage
• Output voltage: See table 1.
• Overvoltage protection level: See table 1.
• Voltage regulation: Static: ± 0.5 % for load 100%-0% and input 185 - 275VAC
Dynamic response: ±5.0% - regulation time <10ms - load step 10-90% or opposite
• Temperature drift: ± 100 ppm / °K over temperature range
• Hold-up time: >10ms at 53.5V output, full load.
• Boost Voltage: Uboost = nominal + 1,5 ± 0,5 VDC.
Output power.
• 48V-version: Constant power from 43.0 to 58.0 VDC : 670W +20W - 40W (range:
630W - 690W) Output power at 53.5VDC : 670W ±20 (nominal output voltage).
• 24V-version: Constant power from 22.0 to 29.5 VDC : 670W +20W - 40W (range:
630W - 690W) Output power at 26.8VDC : 670W ±20W (nominal output voltage).
• 12V-version: Constant output current from 10.5 to 22.0VDC: 29.0 ± 0.3 A. Output
power at nominal output voltage: 390 ± 10 W.

354029.033, v3, September 2002
2. Electrical / Mechanical Data
Output current.
• Short-circuit behaviour: (0 VDC < VOUT < 5VDC ): Current limit.
• Ripple and noise: < 100 mV peak-to-peak, < 2-mV psophometric.
• There is an automatic circuit breaker (40A) at the output for reverse polarity protection.
• Reverse current at DC output: Max. 20 mA (from battery)
2.3 Electromagnetic interference
Emission:
Radiated: EN 50081-1
EN 50081-2
E10 marine specification - includes: IEC
801-3 Radiated electromagnetic field
Conducted - Input: EN 50081-1
EN 50081-2
VDE 0871 grade B
Conducted - Output: EN 50081-2
VDE 0871 grade A
Immunity:
EN 50082-1
EN 50082-2
E10 marine specification includes: IEC80(secr)51(1990) Conducted audio

interference immunity.
2.4 Safety
Design standard
• IEC 950 (EN60950) - classification of equipment:
• Protection class: 1 (permanent connection to protective earth).
• Supply connection: Permanent (may be connectable)
• Clearance and creepage class: Pollution degree 2, Material group 2 (3a for circuit
boards).
• An external primary circuit breaker must be used in the input line.
• IEC protection class: IP22. Current from AC inputs to safety earth: < 10mA at 50Hz.
Isolation voltages
• Input - earth: 1.5 kVAC (basic insulation).
• Input - output: 3.0 kVAC (reinforced insulation)
• Output - earth: 1.0 kVDC (basic insulation - SELV according to IEC950)
E10 marine specification -includes: Insulation resistance.

354029.033, v3, September 2002
2. Electrical / Mechanical Data
2.5 Mechanical Data

• Width: 272 mm , Height: 370 mm, Depth: 135 mm
• Weight: < 3.5 kg
2.6 Environment
2.6.1 Temperature range

• Storage: –25°C to +85°C.
• Operation: –10°C to +55°C. The module may enter thermal protection mode above
45°C under extreme conditions (power limit, low mains).
2.6.2Humidity
• Storage: 0-95% Relative Humidity non-condensing
• Operating: 10% - 85% RH non-condensing
2.6.3Acoustic noise
<40 dB (A) max (30 dB typ.) according to IEC651 at normal line and load.
2.6.4General
• Internal protection by shutdown is provided for output overvoltage (when delivered by
the module itself), over temperature and low mains. For over -temperature, current limit
is reduced. If temperature increases further, shutdown and alarm is given.
• Module MTBF according to MIL-HDBK 217F.1 parts count: > 100 000 hours.
2.6.5Interface
• Alarm contacts: 125VDC, 1A max floating. Configuration Alarm = open, Alarm =
closed and Common are available.
• Low voltage disconnect max. ratings, external relay:
Output voltage: Approximate nominal rectifier output DC-voltage.

Output current: 1.2 ADC max.

354029.033, v3, September 2002
3. System drawings
3 System drawings
Figure 1 Connection Drawing SMPS 700 Wallbox ................................................................................................ 14

Figure 2 Dimension Drawing SMPS 700 Wallbox ................................................................................................. 16

354029.033, v3, September 2002
3. System drawings

354029.033, v3, September 2002
3. System drawings
Figure 1 Connection Drawing SMPS 700 Wallbox

354029.033, v3, September 2002
3. System drawings

354029.033, v3, September 2002
3. System drawings
Figure 2 Dimension Drawing SMPS 700 Wallbox

354029.033, v3, September 2002
3. System drawings

354029.033, v3, September 2002
ELTEK Energy
P-O- BOX 2340 Strømsø
3003 DRAMMEN
NORWAY
Phone: +4732203200
Telefax: +47 32203210
Internet: http://www.eltekenergy.com
e-mail: eltek@eltekenergy.com
Appendix D. Windows RMM Program

23136-IAPD/Rev.8/03-Dec-07
©2007 Park Air Systems AS Page D-1

23136-IAPD/Rev.8/03-Dec-07
Page D-2 ©2007 Park Air Systems AS
Commercial – in – Confidence
D User's guide
D.1 Overview of the NORMARC 7000 RMM
This information has been updated for version 2.3 of the software.
The NORMARC® 7000 RMM is a Microsoft Windows based program that provides access to
all the data and functions made available by the ILS remote monitoring subsystem.
By connecting to the ILS remote monitoring subsystem, the program lets the user do the
following:
• View the current status and measurements done by the ILS
• Configure ILS monitor and transmitter settings
• View reports that shows the current operational status and configuration of an ILS
• Download historical data from the ILS and browse through individual data sets
• Download and view events to see the operational history of the ILS
• Connect to the ILS with a null modem cable (direct), dial-up connection or leased line
connection
The figure below shows a screen dump of the main program window.
NORMARC 7000B ILS Overview of Windows RMM

IMAPPD/Rev.8/29-Nov-07
© 2007 Park Air Systems AS Page 1 of 54
Commercial – in - Confidence
D.1.1 Installing the software

To install the software, just insert the CDROM and wait until the NORMARC 7000 RMM
welcome file is displayed. Read the instructions in this file to install the software.
Overview of Windows RMM NORMARC 7000B ILS

Page 2 of 54 © 2007 Park Air Systems AS
D.2 Support contact information
NORMARC Support can be contacted at the following addresses and telephone numbers:
E-mail: normarc.support@no.parkairsystems.com
Web-site: www.parkairsystems.com
Tel: +47 2318 0205 (office hours)
Fax: +47 2318 0378
D.3 General
D.3.1 The station list
The RMM software maintains a list of ILS stations. The list contains information that is used
by the software to identify and to connect to an ILS.
When the menu item File | Connect to station is selected, the station list window is opened:
The user can do the following from the Station list window:
• Connect to a station
• Add a new station
• Edit a station
• Delete a station
Each of these operations is described below.
D.3.1.1 Connect to a station
To connect to a station that has been set up in the station list, the station must first be
selected and then the "Connect" button clicked. The RMM software will connect to the
station, before the user is asked to log on to the ILS.
D.3.1.2 Add a new station
This function adds a new station to the station list. The settings for the new station are
initialised with default values. The user must select "Edit station" to customize the settings for
the new station.
D.3.1.3 Edit a station
To edit a station, select the desired station and click the "Edit station" button. The following
window will appear:

The following information has to be set correctly:

• Station name: Type in the desired name. The name may be up to 50 characters long
• Port: Select the serial port on the PC that the connection shall use. The available
options are COM1 - COM16, plus SIM. Select SIM to connect to a simple ILS
simulator instead of an actual ILS. See the simulator description chapter for more
information
• Bitrate: Select the speed of the communication. The options are 2400, 4800 or 9600
bps. 9600 bps is the default bit rate
• Connect method: Select Direct (null-modem), Dial up or Leased line connection.
Direct connection is the default connects method
• Phone number: Type the phone number for the connection. This field is valid only for
Dial up connections
• Modem: Select the modem in the dropdown list that matches the actual modem
used. This affects the modem init strings that will be used for the connection types
(dial up or leased line). The user may also edit the modem settings by clicking the
Edit button
• Enable automatic download: Check this box to automatically download the medium
time periodic storage from the ILS at the time you specify. Note that the storage will
only be downloaded if a user is logged on to the ILS at the specified time. Automatic
medium time storage download will not be performed if another storage download
(excluding event download) is in progress at the specified time
D.3.1.4 Delete a station
In order to delete a station, select the station and click the "Delete station" button. The user is
asked to confirm before the deletion takes place. Note that the delete operation will also
delete all historical data stored in the database for the selected station. This may take a few
seconds.
D.3.2 Logging on and off

After a connection has been established with an ILS the user must log on by entering the
user name and password(s).

The top panel of the ILS Logon window displays dialling/connection progress, and when the
connection has been established it shows which to port on the ILS the user is connected, in
addition to the RMS software version of the ILS.
To log on the user must wait until the user name and password field becomes available for
input and then enter a valid user name and one or more passwords. The user name and
password(s) are not case sensitive.
The ILS will compare the entered username and password(s) with the information stored in
the RMS subsystem in the ILS. If invalid logon information is entered the RMS subsystem in
the ILS will not allow access. A window will be opened informing about what went wrong, and
let the user perform another logon attempt. If three attempts are used without success the
ILS will disconnect and not allow more login attempts for 3 minutes (Remote Port 1 and 2
only).
Refer to the Access levels chapter for related information.
For information about logging on the simulator see the Built-in Simulator chapter.
D.3.3 Access levels

The operations that are permitted to a logged on user depend on the logon access level.
The NORMARC 7000 ILS defines four access levels:
Access Number of Allowed operations
level passwords
Level 1 1 Readout of all measurements and all configuration data, except
user passwords.
Level 2 2 Level 1 operations + turning transmitters and LF signals on/off.
Level 3 3 Level 1 and 2 operations + setting all configuration data, except
user passwords.
MASTER 3 Level 1, 2 and 3 operations + setting/viewing users and
passwords, setting the ILS real time clock.
Note that to logon at access level 2 or higher, more than one password must be entered. The
passwords must be separated with a single space.
The user name and password(s) are not case sensitive.
To logon as MASTER, which is a special built-in administrative user, the user name "master"
and all three master passwords must be entered (logon at access levels 1 or 2 with the
master user is therefore not possible). The factory default master passwords are: MASTER1
MASTER2 MASTER3
To logon at other access levels a user account must be first be set up by the master user.
If the master user passwords have been lost, the Customer Service department can help
with resetting the master passwords.
Note that to logon at access level 2 or higher, straps on the TCA board must be set to enable
this. Refer to the NORMARC 7000B Instruction Manual for more information about this.

D.3.3.1 Viewing reports

When logged on to an ILS the user can view reports for the current ILS. The "View report"
window is opened by selecting the menu item File | View report.
There are four types of reports:

• A custom report. The user can select individual measurement groups and settings to
report. The predefined groups and settings have been selected according to the
maintenance procedures. The user can select what groups to include on the report.
The selection made by the user is saved, so the user does not need to make the
selection each time a custom report is generated
• A report for documenting the operational status, all monitor and all maintenance
measurements, and selected configuration data. Note that all configuration data is not
included on the report, the report is therefore not a replacement for the configuration
files
• A report for showing the operation history. See Operational history for a description of
this
• A report for listing all events that have occurred in a selected time period. The last 31
days are selected by default when the dialog is opened
The reports are in HTML format and are automatically opened in the default Web-browser
(this will normally be Microsoft Internet Explorer) when the user clicks the OK button. The
user can print or save the report from the Web-browser.
D.3.4 Preferences
User preferences can be selected in the File | Preferences window. These settings are stored
in the user portion of the Windows registry and will be restored each time the program is
started.

D.3.4.1 Unit for DDM values

Selects the unit to use for DDM values. This controls the unit used for all DDM value
output (on the screen and printed report) and DDM value user input (for example
monitor limit adjustment). Note that the unit used for DDM values stored in the
database and in configuration or historical or continuous data log files is always µA
To change the unit for DDM values on the LCD of the cabinet refer to the System options
section.
D.3.4.2 Adjustment mode options
These options can be used to change the way the program displays measurements and
configuration settings. These options should be left un-checked when the program is used for
routine maintenance or monitoring.
• High decimal precision: Check this to display values and limits with an extra decimal
• Display all monitor and tx parameters independent of ILS type: Check this to display
all the defined ILS configuration parameters independent of the actual ILS system
configuration. This option should only be enabled for configuring new monitor, rms or
LF-generator boards at the factory. It can also be necessary to enable this option
when a board is moved from one equipment to another (for example from a LLZ to a
GP)
• Enable alarm limit setting in level 3 from Test DDM window: Check this to display
buttons in the Test DDM window for changing the CL DDM and NF DDM monitor
limits. This option can be enabled for easy access to monitor limit setting during
commissioning flight-check. Note that some civil aviation authorities may prohibit the
use of this option
NOTE: The user must manually close and re-open measurement and configuration windows
for the options to take effect when any Adjustment mode option has been changed.
D.3.4.3 Language
The language to use in the user interface can be selected in this drop-down list. The list of
available languages is created dynamically when the Preferences window is opened by
looking for resint_*.dll files in the installation folder. The resint_*.dll files contain the
translated strings that is used in the GUI and on the report.
NOTE: The program must be restarted for a change in the language setting to take effect.

D.3.5 Using modems

D.3.5.1 About using modems
The use of modems is required when connecting to an ILS over a public or private telephone
network. The connection can be either a dial-up connection or a leased line connection. In
both cases modems are connected to the PC and to an RS232 port on the connection
interface inside the ILS cabinet. Normally one of the REMOTE1 or REMOTE2 ports is used
for this.
When the "Connect method" for a station is set to "Dial up" or "Leased line", the modem
connected to the PC will be initialised with AT command strings set up for the selected
modem. The user can add new modem configurations and customize the AT command
strings for existing modems.
Procedures for using Westermo and USRobotics modems are described later in the "Using
modems" chapter.
When the user clicks the Edit button in the "Edit station" window the following window will be
opened:
This window lists the modems for which dial up and leased line initialisation strings have
been set up. The list will by default contain settings for a few supported modems. If the
modem that is to be used is not found in the list, the user can add a new modem to the list by
clicking the Add button. Click the Edit button to change the set up for the currently selected
modem. Selecting Add or Edit will open the window shown below.
In this window the user can type in the init strings for dialup and leased line connections
respectively. The init string is strings sent to the modem before the actual call is started.
These settings require knowledge about the AT commands that are supported by the specific
modem in question, and should only be altered by a user familiar with modems. The
technical manuals for the modems will normally contain the necessary information on how to
initialise the modem.
To delete a modem in the modem list, click the Delete button, and respond to the
confirmation dialog. Note that a modem cannot be deleted if it is selected for use by a
station.

D.3.5.2 Dial-up using Westermo TD-32/TD-32B

This description applies to Westermo TD-32 AC, TD-32 DC, TD-32B AC and TD-32B DC
modems.
D.3.5.2.1 DIP switch settings
In the tables below, 1 indicates that a DIP switch is ON, 0 indicates OFF.
SW1: 1 2 3 4 Description
ILS modem * 0 0 0 1 Dial-up connection. All AT commands ignored, including
+++
PC modem 0 0 0 0 Dial-up connection. Enable AT commands.
SW2: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description
ILS modem 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Enable SW2:2 to 7. Asynchronous.
DTR/DSR disconnected.
PC modem 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Enable SW2:2 to 7. Asynchronous.
DTR/DSR not disconnected.
ILS and PC 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2-wire connection.
ILS and PC 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 9600 bps. 8 data bits. No extra stop bits.
ILS and PC 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 Auto detect line parameters.
* - This is the DIP switch setting after the modem has been initialised.
D.3.5.2.2 Initialising the ILS modem
The ILS modem must be initialised before connecting it to the cabinet. This is done by
connecting it to a standard PC that has communication or terminal software installed (for
example HyperTerminal in Windows).
1 Make sure SW1 position 4 is set to OFF (power off the modem if the switch needs to
be changed)
2 Connect the modem to a PC, and use for example HyperTerminal in Windows to
send the following init string to the modem: ATS0=1&C1&D2&W
3 Check that the modem responds with OK to the init string
4 Power off the modem and set switch SW1 position 4 to ON (this makes the modem
ignore all AT-commands). Connect the modem to the cabinet as described below and
power on the modem
D.3.5.2.3 Connecting the modem to the cabinet.
The modem must be connected to Remote Port 1 or Remote Port 2 on the connection
interface board in the ILS cabinet. The bit rate for this port must be 9600 bps (this is the
default setting). There is no need to configure any modem init strings in the ILS.
It is recommended to use Remote Port 2 on the ILS, because this port has a 16 byte FIFO
that reduces the CPU load caused by the serial communication handling. RMS version 12 or
later should be installed when remote port 1 is used (earlier RMS versions does not drive
RTS active so this signal must be strapped to DSR on the modem side.) Also note that the
ILS does not drive DTR active on remote port 1, but the modem is set up to ignore this
signal.
D.3.5.2.4 Connecting the modem to the PC
The modem must be connected to a serial port between COM1 and COM16. The "Connect
method" in the RMM software must be set to "Dial up", the bit rate to 9600 bps and the init
string should be:
ATX3&C1&D2\N5&W

D.3.5.3 Dial-up using Westermo TD-35

This description applies to Westermo TD-35HV / TD-35LV modems.
ILS and PC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Dial-up connection
ILS and PC 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 9600 bps.8 data bit. No extra stop bits.
ILS modem 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 RTS/CTS, DTR disconnected, ATX3, +++
ignored
PC modem 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 RTS/CTS
ILS and PC 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 Automatic line speed
*- This is the DIP switch setting after the modem has been initialised.

The ILS modem must be initialised before connecting it to the cabinet. This is done by
example HyperTerminal in Windows).
1 Make sure SW3 position 6 is set to OFF (power off the modem if the switch needs to
be changed)
2 Connect the modem to a PC, and use for example HyperTerminal in Windows to
send the following init string to the modem: ATS0=1&C1&D2&W
3 Check that the modem responds with OK to the init string
4 Power off the modem and set switch SW3 position 6 to ON (this makes the modem
ignore all AT-commands). Connect the modem to the cabinet as described below and
power on the modem
signal.
method" in the RMM software must be set to "Dial up", the bit rate to 9600 bps and the init
string should be:
AT&C1&D2\N5&W
D.3.5.4 Dial-up using US Robotics Courier

Applies to USRobotics Courier Dual Standard V.34+ modems

D.3.5.4.1 Configuring the ILS modem

D.3.5.4.2 Set DIP switches on the ILS modem.
• Switch 1 must be set to the DTR ALWAYS ON position
• Switch 4 must be set to the ON position - Do not echo off-line commands
• Switch 5 must be set to the AUTO ANSWER ON RING position
• The remaining switches should be left in their factory default positions
• The remote modem must be connected to Remote Port 2 on the connection interface
board in the ILS cabinet
D.3.5.4.4 Configure ILS modem init string.
• With a PC running NM7000 RMM software, log in with MASTER access on the Local Port
• Select "Port setup" in the "General settings" window
• Set the Remote port 2 modem configuration as follows (All ‘0’ letters are zeroes.):
AT&F1E0&D0&R1S0=1&W
D.3.5.4.5 Initialising the ILS modem.
Press the «Send init» button in the ILS modem settings window to make the ILS send the
initialisation string on the port selected in the port list. Do this on remote port 2. (The ILS will
also send the these init strings each time the ILS is powered on.)
D.3.5.4.6 Configuring the PC modem
1 1. All modem DIP switches should be left in their factory default positions.
2 2. Configure the Station for this connection as follows:
• Bitrate 9600
• Connect method set to Dial up and modem init string: AT&F1 (Select modem
USRobotics)
The modem will automatically dial and connect to the remote ILS when the user selects a
connection with this channel.
D.3.5.5 Dial-up using Westermo TD-36
This description applies to Westermo TD-36-AV modems.
The TD-36-AV modem is intended for use in pairs and may not be compatible with other
modems.
ILS and PC 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 9600 bps, 8 databits, 1 stop bit
ILS and PC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PSTN, RS-232, 2-wire
ILS and PC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Termination disabled, use stored values for flow control
ILS 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 V32bis, 9600
PC 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Automatic line speed

D.3.5.5.2 Initializing the ILS modem

The ILS modem must be initialized before connecting it to the cabinet. This is done by
example HyperTerminal in Windows XP).
1. Connect the modem to a PC, and use for example HyperTerminal in Windows to
send the following init string to the modem: ATS0=1E0&C1&D2&W
2. Check that the modem responds with OK to the init string.
3. Connect the modem to the cabinet as described below and power on the modem.

signal.
The modem must be connected to a RS-232 serial port on the PC. The "Connect method" in
the RMM software must be set to "Dial up", the bit rate to 9600 bps and the init string should
be:
ATX3&C1&D2\N5&W
D.3.5.6 Leased line using Westermo TD-32 / TD-32B
This description applies to Westermo TD-32 AC, TD-32 DC, TD-32B AC and TD-32B DC
modems.
SW1: 1 2 3 4 Description
ILS modem 0 1 0 1 Leased line, switch off echo and result code. All AT
commands ignored, including +++
PC modem 1 1 0 1 Leased line, originate mode. All AT commands ignored,
including +++
ILS and PC 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Enable SW2:2 to 7. Asynchronous.
modem DTR/DSR disconnected.
ILS and PC 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2-wire connection.
modem
ILS and PC 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 9600 bps. 8 data bits. No extra stop bits.
modem
ILS and PC 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 V.32 bis 9600 bps

D.3.5.6.2 Connecting the modem to the cabinet

ILS does not drive DTR active on remote port 1, therefore the modem is set up to ignore this
signal.
method" in the RMM software must be set to "Direct", and the bit rate to 9600 bps. There is
no need to configure any initialisation strings.
D.3.5.6.4 Notes on modem combinations
The TD-32 may not work properly when used as the answering modem (connected to ILS) in
leased line setups. This applies when other modems than a TD-32 is used as the origin, i.e.
TD-32B or TD-35. A fix for this problem is to swap the modems, so that the TD-32 becomes
the originate modem.
D.3.5.7 Leased line using Westermo TD-35
This description applies to Westermo TD-35 modem.
ILS modem 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Leased line, answering mode
PC modem 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Leased line, originate mode
ILS and PC 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 9600 bps.8 data bit. No extra stop bits.
ILS and PC 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 RTS/CTS, DTR disconnected, +++ ignored
ILS and PC 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 V.32 bis 9600 bps

signal.
method" in the RMM software must be set to "Direct", and the bit rate to 9600 bps. There is
no need to configure any initialisation strings.

D.3.5.8 Leased line using US Robotics Courier

Applies to USRobotics Courier Dual Standard V.34+ modems.
D.3.5.8.1 Configuring the ILS modem
D.3.5.8.2 Set DIP switches on the ILS modem.
• Switch 1 must be set to the DTR ALWAYS ON position
• Switch 4 must be set to the ON position - Do not echo off-line commands
• Switch 5 must be set to the AUTO ANSWER ON RING position
• The remaining switches should be left in their factory default positions
• The remote modem must be connected to Remote Port 2 on the connection interface
• board in the ILS cabinet
D.3.5.8.4 Configure ILS modem init string
• With a PC running NM7000 RMM software, log in with MASTER access on the Local
Port.
• Select the "Port setup" tab in the "General settings" window.
• Set the Remote port 2 modem configuration as follows (all ‘0’ letters are zeroes):
AT&F1E0&L1S0=1&W
• Clicking the «Init modem» button in the Port setup tab makes the ILS send the
initialisation string on the port selected in the port list.
• The ILS will also send these init strings when the ILS is powered on.
D.3.5.8.6 Configuring the local modem
All modem DIP switches should be left in their factory default positions.
Configure the «Port Setup» as follows:
• Bitrate 9600
• Connect method set to Leased line and modem init string: AT&F1&D0&L1D (the “0” letter
is zero) (Select modem USRobotics)

D.3.5.9 Optical fibre line using Westermo ODW-621

This description applies to Westermo ODW-621 modems.
Dip switch settings are the same in both ends of the optical fibre.
D.3.5.9.1 DIP switch settings for use with remote control
ILS and 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 300bps, 8data bit, 1 parity, 1 stop bit, no
Remote handshake
control
ILS and 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Start bit controlled, error port any link error
Remote
control
D.3.5.9.2 DIP switch settings for use with RMM
ILS and PC 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 9600bps, 8data bit, no parity, 1 stop bit,
RTS/CTS control
ILS and PC 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Start bit controlled, error port any link error
D.3.5.10 Leased line using Westermo TD-36

This description applies to Westermo TD-36-AV modems.
The TD-36-AV modem is intended for use in pairs and may not be compatible with other
modems.
ILS and PC 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 9600 bps, 8 databits, 1 stop bit
ILS 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Leased line, answering
PC 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Leased line, calling
ILS and PC 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Term transceiver/receiver, RTS/CTS flow control
ILS and PC 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 V32bis, 9600 bps
D.3.5.10.2 Initializing the PC modem
The PC modem must be initialized once before connecting it to the cabinet. This is done by
example HyperTerminal in Windows XP).

1. Connect the modem to a PC, and use for example HyperTerminal in Windows to
send the following init string to the modem: ATS7=40&W
2. Check that the modem responds with OK to the init string.

signal.
The modem must be connected to a RS-232 serial port. The "Connect method" in the RMM
software must be set to "Direct", and the bit rate to 9600 bps. There is no need to configure
any initialization strings in the RMM.
D.3.6 Date and time formats

The RMM software uses the regional settings set up in the Windows Control Panel to format
dates shown on the screen and on printed reports. The format used is the "Short Date"
format. This will make the displayed dates match the convention used in the user's country.
The time format is not retrieved from the regional settings. The 24-hour format HH:MM:SS.S
is used instead. This shows hours, minutes, seconds and tenths of seconds.
In exported data (Continuous data logging) and in default filenames the date and time format
used is according to the international standard (ISO 8601), i.e. YYYY-MM-DD for dates and
HH:MM:SS.S for the time of day.
D.3.7 Built-in Simulator

This version of the RMM software has a built-in simulator that allows the user to operate
most functions of the software without being connected to a real ILS.
The simulator simulates only basic RMS functions. It is not guarantied that all operations that
are possible on an ILS will work on the simulator. The simulator does, for example, not
simulate feedback of transmitted ILS signals to the monitors. The measurements and
parameters are preset values, that are not necessarily logical correct. The simulator always
simulates a Two-freq. LLZ, Hot standby TX, w/FFM & Voice.
The simulator is automatically started if the user connects to a station which has "SIM"
selected as its port.
Any user name and password(s) can be used for logging on the Simulator, as the Simulator
does not check these fields. But note that to log on as Master the user name "master" must
be used, and the number of passwords entered determines the access level (as described in
the Access levels chapter).

D.4 Viewing ILS data

D.4.1 Monitor measurements
Selecting the ILS-Data | Monitor menu item opens the monitor measurements window,
which is shown below. This window shows the executive monitor measurements that are
valid for the current ILS.
The individual measurements and groups are formatted with special characters and colours
according to the "measurement status" of each measurement.
Note that this window shows the defined monitor measurements for the current ILS, unless
the "Display all monitor and tx parameters independent of ILS type" option is checked in the
Preferences window.
D.4.2 Maintenance measurements

Selecting the ILS-Data | Maintenance menu item opens the maintenance measurements
window, which is shown below. This window shows the "maintenance" measurements that
are valid for the current ILS.

The individual measurements and groups are formatted with special characters and colours
according to the "measurement status" of each measurement.
From this window it is also possible to toggle the state of digital user I/O ports that has been
configured as outputs. To toggle the output state double-click the text shown in the Meas
column.
Note that this window shows the defined maintenance measurements for the current ILS,
unless the "Display all monitor and tx parameters independent of ILS type" option is checked
in the Preferences window.
D.4.3 Front panel

The front panel shows the system status for the ILS cabinet. The front panel is opened with
the ILS-Data | Front panel menu item.

The front panel shows the same information as the physical front panel on the ILS.
The user must be logged on with Access level 2 or higher to be able operate the controls in
the window.
D.4.3.1 Monitor indicators
The "monitoring related" indicators are the following:
• SERVICE: Indicates that the ILS is under service. This may be caused by any of the
switches on the ILS is in service position
• ALARM: Indicates that one or more of the monitor parameters in the ILS is in alarm state.
• WARNING: Indicates that one or more of the sub-warning LEDs at the left side of the
front panels is activated, and the sub-warning is configured for generating main
WARNING
• NORMAL: Indicates that there are no alarms present among the monitor parameters in
the ILS. This indicator will always be the opposite of the ALARM indicator
Note that the ALARM, WARNING and NORMAL indicators for the STANDBY transmitter are
only visible if the ILS is configured for hot standby transmitter operation.
The sub-warning indicators are as following:
• PARAM: Indicates that one or more of the monitor parameters is in warning state. Note: If
the "Signal integrity test failure on Param LED" system option is enabled, the label for this
warning will be "INTGRT"
• DISAGR: Indicates that one of the two monitors detect an alarm while the other monitor
sees a normal signal
• BATT: Indicates that the ILS is currently operating on battery
• IDENT: Indicates that the IDENT is faulty. Valid for LLZ equipment only
• MAINT: Indicates that one or more of the maintenance parameters are in warning state.
Note: If the "Signal integrity test failure on Param LED" system option is enabled, this
warning will also be activated if a monitor parameter is in warning state
• STBY: Indicates that the ILS is currently operating on the standby transmitter
These sub-warnings may be configured to generate a main WARNING.
D.4.3.2 Transmitter indicators and controls
The "transmitter related" combined indicators and controls are the following:
• COU and CLR transmitters ON/OFF status: Shows which transmitters are currently
turned on. When the equipment is in MANUAL (and the user has access level 2 or
higher), these lamps can be clicked to turn the transmitters on or off
• TX TO AIR status: Shows the position of the coax relay
Main select: Shows the transmitter that is selected to be the main transmitter.

• NORMAL: Indicates that there are no alarms present among the monitor parameters in
the ILS. This indicator will always be the opposite of the ALARM indicator
• ON/OFF button: Clicking this will turn the transmitters on/off
• CHANGEOVER button: Clicking this performs a changeover between TX1 and TX2
• MAIN select button: Clicking this toggles between selecting TX1 and TX2 as the main
transmitter
• MANUAL/AUTO switch: When the manual/auto switch on the ILS cabinet is in the AUTO
position, this switch can be clicked to set the equipment in manual mode
• INTERLOCK switch: This is an indicator showing the current state of the interlock switch
on the ILS cabinet. It can not be operated from the RMM
• LOCAL/REMOTE switch: This is an indicator showing the current state of the
local/remote switch on the ILS cabinet. It can not be operated from the RMM
• WRITE PROTECT switch: This is an indicator showing the current state of the write
protect switch on the ILS cabinet. It can not be operated from the RMM
D.4.3.3 Other indicators
The following text labels can also appear in this window:
• "INTERLOCK-DESELECTED": Indicates that the ILS is currently turned off with the
interlock switch
• "REMOTE ACCESS GRANTED": Indicates that the Remote RMM Grant/Deny switch on
the Remote Control is in the grant position
• "RMS ACCESS ACTIVE": Indicates that the RMS is operating at access level 2 or higher
This may be caused by a user logged on to a serial port at access level 2 or higher or
with the use of the LCD menu at access level 2 or higher
D.4.4 Event list

Selecting ILS-Data|Event list will bring up the window shown below. This window displays
events that have been downloaded from the ILS. This includes log-in/out, configuration
operations, alarms- and warning notifications.
The displayed fields are:

• The date and time when the event occurred
• The user who caused the event, or System or Remote.
• The event description
The event list is downloaded and stored in the database each time a user logs on the ILS.
The RMM software will place the event "Possible loss of events" in the event list if it is
detected that there is no time overlap between already downloaded events and the events
available from the ILS.

D.4.5 Operational history

Selecting ILS-Data|Operational history will bring up the window shown below. This window
displays operational history entries that have been downloaded from the ILS and stored in
the database on the PC. All new entries are downloaded on each login to the ILS. The last
100 entries are stored in the ILS, while the last 2500 events may be viewed in the RMM. The
database file on the PC may contain several thousands of entries for each ILS station.
There are 3 types of entries that may be downloaded. These are:

1 "Clear history". This entry is placed in the history list after a user has selected to clear
all operational history and if the RMS detect that the data stored in the battery backed
RAM is not valid. The last case may be the case after an upgrade to a new RMS
version of the layout the RAM has changed between RMS versions
2 "Monthly report". The RMS stores this entry on the first day of each month. Since the
operational time counter (hours) is also stored, this gives the user information about
the usage of the ILS the last month
3 "Alarm shutdown". This entry indicated that the ILS has performed a transmitter
shutdown due to an alarm condition detected by the executive monitors
In addition to the above types, a "<Data loss>" entry will be stored in the database by the
RMM software if it detects that there is no overlap of entries stored in the database on the
PC and in the ILS. This informs the user that over 100 entries have been generated in ILS
since the last time the operational history was downloaded.
Each entry has an "Outage" field. This field indicates whether the entry shall count as an
outage in MTBO calculations. Only entries of type "Alarm shutdown" may have this field set
to "Yes". This can be changed by the user to "No". Note that if this is done, a comment
should also be written to describe why the shutdown should not count as an outage.
Use the "Clear history..." button to reset the operational time counter and to clear the
operational history stored in the ILS. This operation requires the user to logged on to an ILS
and a login at the master access level. A confirmation from the user is required before the
operation is executed. If desired, the user can also select to clear the operational history
stored in the database on the PC.
Use the "Edit entry..." button to change the Outage (on alarm shutdown entries only) and
Comment fields. The Edit entry function is enabled on all access levels, and also while
viewing downloaded medium time or long time data in the database. Note that the changed
data is stored in the database only; it is not uploaded back to the ILS.

D.4.6 Measurement status description

All measurements retrieved from the ILS are tagged with a status code. These codes are
displayed by using special characters and colours, according to the table below.
Code Colour Description
N/A (or # in The measurement is not applicable for the current equipment
Cont. log type or current equipment state (for example some
files) maintenance measurements are not applicable when the
transmitters are turned off).
Normal. No code or special character displayed.
w (lower Yellow Raw warning. The measurement is currently outside the
case) defined warning limits.
W (upper Yellow Delayed warning. Same as raw warning but the measurement
case) has been in this state for longer than the configured delay for
the parameter group.
a (lower Red Raw alarm. The measurement is currently outside the defined
case) alarm limits.
A (upper Red Delayed alarm. Same as raw alarm but the measurement has
case) been in this state for longer than the configured delay for the
parameter group.
****** The RMS subsystem in the ILS is unable to provide the data.
This can be caused by a faulty MO1212 board or an IIC-bus
error in the ILS.
????? The RMM software has no connection to the ILS or the data is
not stored in the database or log file. This will also be displayed
before the RMM software gets an updated monitor or
maintenance data set from the ILS.
D.5 Configuring the ILS

D.5.1 Configuration upload and download
The RMM software can save ILS configuration data to a file on the user's hard disk and
reconfigure the ILS with the saved configuration data when required.
The Configuration download and upload window are opened by selecting the File |
Configuration download and upload menu item. The window is shown below.
Access level 3 is required for using the Upload function. Download can be done at all access
levels.
When the Download or Upload buttons are clicked, first a file selection window will be
shown. The user must select a filename for downloading or uploading configuration data
to/from.

If Upload was clicked the user must also select which boards in the ILS configuration data
should be uploaded for. This is done in the Configuration upload window shown below. When
the OK button is clicked the upload process starts. Uploading may take several minutes.
D.5.2 Monitor settings

D.5.2.1 Monitor limits
The Monitor tab in the Monitor settings windows shows the alarm and warning limits for the
monitor parameters. The list also shows the nominal value for each parameter. The
displayed limit values are relative to the nominal value. There are 32 parameters on each
monitor board. Depending on the monitor board and equipment type (e.g. one/two frequency,
cold/hot standby, etc) some of the parameters will be disabled (i.e. have limits set to OFF)
and not shown in the list. The user can select to display all parameters by enabling the
"Display all monitor and tx parameters independent of ILS type" Preferences option. This
option has been turned on to produce the image of the Monitor settings window below. This
sample is from an ILS without a standby monitor; standby parameter limits are therefore not
shown.
If the limits for a parameter on monitor 1, 2 and for the standby monitor (for hot standby
equipment) are equal, the limits for the parameter will be shown on a single line in the list.

Note: The values shown this window are arbitrary sample values. The complete list and
description of all monitors parameters can be found in Chapter 7.7 in the NORMARC 7000B
Instruction Manual.
D.5.2.1.1 Changing monitor limits
In order to change monitor limits the user must be logged on at access level 3 or as master.
In these access levels the user can click the Edit button to open the Monitor limits edit
window, which is shown below.

The title of the window shows the name of the parameter selected for editing. The window
has fields for editing the low and high alarm and warning limits and the nominal value. The
nominal value can be changed only for DDM parameters. The unit (if the parameter has a
defined measurement unit) for the limits is also shown.
The Symmetric limits button is used for enabling/disabling symmetric input mode. In
symmetric input mode the user only enters the high limits, the low limits will be automatically
set so that the limits are symmetric about the nominal value. Symmetric input mode will be
enabled by default if the currently configured limits are symmetric when the window is
opened.
The Set limits off is used for setting all limits to OFF. This fills in the special values -9999
and 9999 in the low and high limit fields, which is the same as disabling alarm and warning
generation on the parameter. -9999 or 9999 can also be entered by the user to disable a
specific limit.
Note: For parameters where the warning limits are entered as a percentage of the alarm
limits and the alarm limit is set to 9999, it is not meaningful to use a warning limit other than
9999.
The Apply to ... drop down list is used for selecting which monitor to update with the new
values.
Note: If the nominal value has been changed the new values must be applied to both monitor
1 and 2 or to the standby monitor. The new values cannot be applied to e.g. monitor 1 and
not to monitor 2. This is because monitor 1 and 2 shares the same copy of the nominal
values.
Clicking the OK or the Apply button will send the new values to the ILS. The OK button will
in addition close the Monitor limit edit window.
Cancel will close window without sending anything to the ILS.
D.5.2.2 Maintenance limits
The Maintenance tab in the Monitor settings window shows the warning limits for the
maintenance parameters. The parameters are organized in a tree view. The board names
are at the top level. Double click a board name to see the parameters on the board.
The figure below shows the Maintenance tab with the RMS board "expanded". The complete
list and description of all maintenance parameters can be found in Chapter 7.7 in the
NORMARC 7000B Instruction Manual.

The Limit(s) column shows the configuration of the warning limits of each parameter. The
format of the displayed limits is depending on the parameter type. For analog measurements
the limits are shown as: LL/UL. Where LL is the lower limit and UL is the high limit. A
maintenance warning is generated when the measurement falls outside this interval.
Digital measurements will normally be shown as the text: "Default". This means that the limits
are configured with the default limits. If the limits are not at the default setting, the field can
show any of the following texts:
• "Normally low" The limit has been changed from the default, which is that the
measurement is a logical high level, to a logical low level
• "Normally high" The limit has been changed from the default, which is that the
measurement is a logical low level, to a logical high level
• "OFF" The limit has been set off, i.e. the measurement will not produce a warning.
• "Invalid" The limits for the parameter has been set to illegal values
• "Fixed" The limits is fixed internally in the ILS
The Edit button is used for changing the limits. Clicking the Edit button will bring up one of
the Maintenance limit Edit window shown below. Access level 3 is required to edit
maintenance limits.
Note: In order to edit digital (non-user) maintenance parameters, the "Display all monitor and
tx parameters independent of ILS type" Preferences option must be enabled. This option
must be enabled first because the user should not normally change these limits.
D.5.2.2.1 Editing non-user maintenance parameter limits
The figure below shows the window used for entering new maintenance limits. The window
has fields for the low limit, the high limit, and the defined unit for the parameter.

D.5.2.2.2 Editing analog user parameter limits

The figure below shows the window used for entering name, scale, offset and limit settings
for analog user parameters.
D.5.2.2.3 Editing digital user parameter limits

The figure below shows the window used for entering name, signal direction and limit
settings for digital user parameters.
Note that the limits of Digital user parameters 1 and 2 (which are counters) cannot be edited.
D.5.2.3 Delays
The Delays tab in the Monitor settings window shows the configured delays for the executive
monitors and for the maintenance parameters. The delay values are in seconds.

The Edit buttons can be clicked to open a window, as shown below, for editing the selected
delay. Editing delays requires access level 3.
Valid input range in this window is 0.4 to 102.3 seconds for executive monitors and 0 to 1023
for maintenance delays. The total changeover-shutdown delay will be two times the
executive monitor delay value. Refer to Chapter 7.7 in the NORMARC 7000B Instruction
Manual for the default values.
The Apply to ... drop down list is used for selecting which monitor to update with the new
values. This field is not shown for maintenance delays.
D.5.2.4 Power scaling (NORMARC 7000A only)

The scaling values in this window should only be changed on racks with the first version of
the PA module (LPA1230A/GPA1231A/GPA1232A version 1). On newer PA modules, the
power reading is pre-adjusted, and the scaling value should be set to 1.0.
The values in this window can be used to adjust the power measurements done on the
transmitters. (The measured values are displayed in the maintenance measurement
window).

The scaling values will normally be in the range 0.5-2.0.

These scaling values are stored in the RMS system in the ILS and not on the transmitters.
This means that the values will have to be changed if a PA module is replaced, and restored
if the RMS board is replaced.
D.5.2.5 Integrity test (NORMARC 7000B only)
The Integrity test tab in the Monitor settings window shows the configured delay for the
"Monitor alarm verification delay". The RMS verifies that the transmitter control has detected
alarm from the monitors after this delay after an operator turns off the transmitters.
The "Monitor Delay Verification" delay shall be set to the total changeover-shutdown time + 1
second (i.e. 2*GEN delay + 1s).
D.5.3 Transmitter settings (NORMARC 7000A)

D.5.3.1 Modulation settings
The Modulation tab in the Transmitter settings window is shown below.

In this window the LF generator 90 Hz and 150 Hz signals may be switched on or off and the
Morse code settings may be changed (LLZ only).
The following table describes the effect of each Morse code setting.
Setting Transmitted ident.
Off None (silent)
Normal The configured morse code (see the Adjustments tab)
Cont. Continuous 1020 Hz tone
TST The Morse code for TST
The CLR quadrature mod. setting controls whether the Clearance LF signal is quadrature
modulated.
The Signal modulation and Morse code requires access level 2, while the CLR quadrature
modulation option requires access level 3 to change the setting.
D.5.3.2 Transmitter adjustments
The following TX parameters can be changed for Course and Clearance (for two frequency
systems) for transmitter 1 and 2:
• 90Hz & 150Hz modulation balance (DDM)
• 90Hz & 150Hz modulation sum (SDM)
• RF power
• Ident modulation depth
• Runway Morse code identification (up to 4 letters)

To change TX adjustment values click the Edit button in this window. Access level 3 is
required. A dialog similar to the one below will be opened.
This window shows the configured adjustment values for TX1 and TX2. The label above
each input field also indicates whether the transmitter is "on air" or not.
To change the parameter values the user has the following options:
• Click on the up and down arrows to increment/decrement the value
• Press the up and down arrows on your keyboard to increment/decrement the value
Enter a new value in the numeric input field.
The ILS will be updated with new value(s) when the Enter key is pressed or the OK or Apply
buttons is clicked.
The TX-adjustment values are the positions of digital potentiometers used and stored in the
EEPROM on the LF generator boards. The values are unit-less integers in the range 0-4095.
Refer to the Operating Manual for a list of typical values used.
D.5.3.3 DME interface
The fields on this tab specifies the operation of the DME interface (LLZ only). Access level 3
is required to change any of these settings.
The following tables describe each selection.
Keying master selections:
LLZ LLZ is the keying master
DME DME is the keying master
DME active selections:

Open Open circuit indicates active DME (enables colocation)
Closed Closed circuit indicates active DME (enables colocation)

D.5.4 Transmitter settings (NORMARC 7000B)

D.5.4.1 Modulation tab (NORMARC 7000B)
The Modulation tab has controls for turning the 90 and 150 Hz signals on/off, selecting the
Morse code type, and whether the Voice shall be transmitted or muted.
The settings are read only at access level 1 and read/write at higher access levels. Default
settings will be restored when the user logs out.
Note 1: The "Morse signal" fields are visible only on LLZ equipment.
Note 2: The "Voice signal" fields are visible only when the "Voice generator installed" system
option is enabled.
D.5.4.2 Signal adjustments tab (NORMARC 7000B)
The Signal adjustments tab displays a list of the current LF generator adjustments. These
values are stored in an EEPROM on each LF generator board.
The settings are read only at access level 1 and 2 and read/write at higher access levels.

Allowable range and typical values for each adjustment value are shown in the Edit dialog for
each parameter. Some parameters do not have a specific typical range.
The following signal adjustment parameters are available:

Parameter Unit Description Range Typical values
COU RF level dBV Sets COU CSB power LLZ:-100 to 15 LLZ: 10 to 15
level GP:-100 to 15 GP: 10 to 15
COU DDM Sets DDM on COU LLZ: -40 to 40 LLZ: -1 to 1
GP: -80 to 80 GP: -1 to 1
COU SDM Sets SDM on COU LLZ: 15 to 50 LLZ: 38 to 42
GP: 30 to 90 GP: 76 to 84
COU IDENT % Sets ident modulation LLZ: 0 to 18 LLZ: 5 to 15
level depth. GP: 0 GP: 0
COU VOICE % Sets voice level. LLZ: 0 to 100 0 (normally not
level GP: 0 used, use
requires other
installed
options)
COU SBO level dB Sets SBO level relative to LLZ: -10 to 3 Depending on
CSB level. GP: -10 to 0 antenna system
and runway
length.
COU SBO º Sets SBO phase relative -180 to 180 LLZ: -10 to 10
phase to CSB phase. GP: -30 to 30
(when phase
offset is
correctly
adjusted)

COU SBO º When COU SBO phase -180 to 180 No typical

phase offset is set to zero, this value is values
used for setting the SBO
phase equal to the CSB
phase at the output of the
cabinet.
Only visible in factory
mode.
COU 90 Hz º Sets COU 90 Hz phase -1 to 1 -1 to 1
phase relative to 150 Hz.
mode.
COU/CLR LF º Sets 30 Hz phase LLZ: 0 to 40 No typical
phase between COU and CLR GP: 0 to 0 values
LF signals.
CLR RF level dBV Sets CLR CSB power LLZ:-100 to 15 No typical
level. GP:-100 to 15 values
CLR DDM level Sets DDM on CLR. LLZ: -40 to 40 LLZ: -1 to 1
GP: 40 to 95 GP: 55 to 60
CLR SDM level Sets SDM on CLR. LLZ: 15 to 50 LLZ: 38 to 42
GP: 30 to 95 GP: 76 to 84
CLR IDENT % Sets ident modulation LLZ: 0 to 18 LLZ: 5 to 15
level depth. GP: 0 GP: 0
CLR VOICE % Sets voice level. LLZ: 0 to 100 0 (normally not
level GP: 0 used, use
requires other
installed
options)
CLR SBO level dB Sets SBO level relative to LLZ: -10 to 3 No typical range
CSB level. GP: N/A
CLR SBO º Sets SBO phase relative LLZ: -180 to No typical range
phase to CSB phase. 180
GP: N/A
CLR SBO º When CLR SBO phase is LLZ: -180 to No typical range
phase offset set to zero, this value is 180
used for setting the SBO GP: N/A
phase equal to the CSB
phase at the output of the
cabinet.
mode.
CLR 90 Hz º Sets COU 90 Hz phase LLZ: -1 to 1 LLZ: -1 to 1
phase relative to 150 Hz. GP: N/A GP: N/A
mode.
Morse code Sets the Morse code to
be transmitted as
identification. This is a 0
to 4-character string (A-Z
and space are allowed).

By enabling factory mode in the Preferences window, the following test signal parameters will
also be displayed. The recommended way of changing these values is to use the Flight
check window.

COU DDM test This value is added to the LLZ: -1.5 to 1.5 No typical
value 1 COU DDM value when GP: -4.5 to 4.5 values
CL test signal 1 is
activated in the Flight
check window.
COU DDM test This value is added to the Same as COU No typical
value 2 COU DDM value when DDM test value values
CL test signal 2 is 1
check window.
COU SDM test Currently not in use.
value 1 Should be zero.
COU SDM test Currently not in use.
value 2 Should be zero.
COU SBO level dB This value is added to the LLZ: 0 to 4 dB No typical
test value 1 COU SBO level when DS GP: 0 to 4 dB values
test is set to Narrow in
the Flight check window.
COU SBO level dB This value is added to the LLZ: -4 dB to 0
test value 2 COU SBO level when DS GP: -4 dB to 0
test is set to Wide in the
Flight check window.


COU SBO º This value is added to the LLZ: -95° to - LLZ: -90°
phase test value COU SBO phase when 85° GP: -90°
1 the 90° stub is activated GP: -125° to -
in the Flight check 85°
window. The value
should be -90.
This value can be
changed only by enabling
factory mode and
changing it in this
window.
Note that, since the
signal generation is
digital, it should not be
necessary to adjust this
value. If a 90° phase shift
is not observed when the
90° stub is activated,
check gain/offset
adjustment values in the
SBO PA.
COU SBO º Currently not in use.
phase test value Should be zero.
2
COU RF test dB This value is added to the LLZ: -6 to 0 LLZ: -1 dB
value COU RF level when Test GP: -6 to 0 GP: -1 dB
RF attenuation is
check window.
CLR SBO level dB Currently not in use.
test value 1 Should be zero.
CLR SBO level dB This value is added to the LLZ: -5 to 0
test value 2 CLR SBO level when GP: N/A
CLR test is set to Wide in
the Flight check window.
CLR SBO º This is the same as COU LLZ: -95° to - LLZ: -90°
phase test value SBO phase test value 1, 85° GP: -90°
1 but used for CLR SBO GP: -125° to -
instead. 85°
CLR SBO º Currently not in use.
phase test value Should be zero.
2
CLR RF test dB This value is added to the LLZ: -6 to 0 LLZ: -1 dB
value CLR RF level when Test GP: -6 to 0 GP: -1 dB
RF attenuation is
check window.

D.5.4.3 DME interface tab (NORMARC 7000B)

The DME interface tab provides options for the DME interface.
• "Keying master": The options are "LLZ" and "DME"
• "DME active signal": The options are "Open" and "Closed"
• "Ident type": The options are "Code" and "Pulse"
D.5.4.4 Voice tab (NORMARC 7000B)

The Voice tab provides voice configuration settings.
• "Enable voice slot" option: Voice will be transmitted in two of 8 ident slots when checked
• "Gate voice signal" option: Voice will be muted in Morse code slots when checked
Note 1: The "Voice" tab is only visible when the "Voice generator installed" system option is
enabled.
Note 2: Voice will only be sent if the keying master is set to "LLZ".

D.5.4.5 PA adjustments tab (NORMARC 7000B)

The PA adjustments tab provides options for adjusting/calibrating offsets, loop phase, power
and temperature measurements in the power amplifier assemblies. In factory mode, an
additional tab, gain is displayed. Gain should only be adjusted by specially trained personnel.
The transmitter to work with must be selected in the transmitter drop-down list.
The range of the potentiometer values is from 0 to 255.
D.5.4.5.1 Offset tab
The "Offset" tab is used for adjusting digital potentiometers that controls offsets in the PA-
assembly.
When "Enable test mode" is checked a test mode is activated on the LF generator and in the
PA- assembly that result in the following signals being fed to either the I-input or Q-input on
the amplifier:
• CSB: 150 Hz sinus with 1.0 V amplitude. No DC offset
• SBO: SBO signal with 1.5 V amplitude on each tone
The text "Q off" or "I off" in blue colour denotes that either the Q or I input signals is disabled
by test modes in PA-assembly.
D.5.4.5.2 Loop phase tab

The "Loop phase" tab is used for adjusting digital potentiometers that controls the I and Q
loop delays in the PA. When "Enable test mode" is checked a test mode is activated on the
LF generator that result in the following signals begin fed to the inputs on the amplifier:
• CSB: 3.5 V DC (no modulation signals)
• SBO: 1.5 V DC (no modulation signals) on the I and Q outputs
A test mode that makes the PA operate in open loop mode is activated on the selected PA
(the text "Open loop" in blue colour denotes that this mode on the PA is active).
The "Demodulator meas." frame shows the I and Q demodulator measurements converted to
polar representation. The actual I and Q voltage measurements can be displayed as pop-up
text by resting the mouse pointer over the value or angle fields.
D.5.4.5.3 Cal pwr meas tab
The "Cal power meas" tab is used for calibrating the forward power measurements. The
reverse power measurements cannot be calibrated.
There is no test mode for adjusting these potentiometers, so the "Enable test mode" and the
"I-signal" and "Q-signal" radio buttons are always disabled.
D.5.4.5.4 Overtemp. tab
The "Overtemp" tab is used for adjusting the temperature levels of the automatic shutdown
function in the PA-assemblies.

The "Overtemp. turnoff limit" sets the temperature level in degrees Celsius at which the RF
output from the PA will be turned off. The "Overtemp. reset limit" sets the temperature at
which the RF output will be enabled again after the turnoff limit has been exceeded (this
allows the hysteresis to be configured).
Recommended turnoff limit is 110 degrees Celsius. Recommended reset limit is 85 degrees
Celsius.
D.5.4.5.5 Gain tab (requires Factory-mode)
Note: Changing the Gain adjustments requires special measurement equipment, and must
only be done at the factory or by specially trained personnel.
The "Gain" tab is used for adjusting digital potentiometers that controls gain in the I and Q
signals path in the demodulator in PA.
When "Enable test mode" is checked a test mode is activated on the LF generator and in the
PA- assembly that result in the following signals being fed to either the I-input or Q-input on
the amplifier:
• CSB: 3.5 V DC (no modulation signals)
• SBO: 2 V DC (no modulation signals) on either the SBO I or SBO Q outputs
The text "Q off" or "I off" in blue colour denotes that either the Q or I input signals is disabled
by test modes in PA-assembly.
D.5.5 Test DDM (NORMARC 7000A)

The ILS-Settings | Test DDM function is for use when a DDM flight test is performed on the
system. The Test DDM window is shown in the figure below.

The window has the following fields and controls:

• Graphical readout of the current CL DDM and NF DDM measurement, and the low
and high alarm limits
• Buttons for quick access to the monitor alarm/warning configuration dialog (only when
enabled in the Preferences window). Clicking one of these buttons will open the
Monitor limits edit window, which will have the currently measured DDM value
suggested as new alarm limit
• Controls for activating the test signals
• DDM adjustment "sliders" for adjusting dominance levels
• Read only field that shows the position of the "sliders" relative to the CL modulation
balance value (see Transmitter adjustments and settings)
The required access levels for the fields in this dialog is as follows:
• To change monitor limits requires access level 3
• All other settings require access level 2
The test DDM values are unit-less integers in the range 0-4095.
D.5.6 Flight check (NORMARC 7000B)

The Flight check window provides test modes and settings used during flight checks.
The test modes are read only at access level 1; can be activated at level 2 and the test mode
values can be changed at higher access levels.
The upper half of the window displays the CL, DS and NF monitor measurements relative to
the configured alarm limits. There are "Set limits" buttons for setting the limits equal to the
current monitor measurement.
The lower half of the window has tabs for selecting the transmitter and whether to work with
"Alignment" or "Alarm limit check" functions. See the screen dumps below.
All test signals will be reset if the window is closed or communication between computer and
ILS is lost.

D.5.6.1 Alignment tab
The Alignment tab provides the following functions:

• Buttons for turning off the COU or CLR SBO signals (normally used during Modulation
Level and Modulation Equality flight checks). The text label left of the button will indicate
whether the SBO is on or off. Adjustment fields for modulation balance (DDM) and
modulation sum (SDM). These adjustments will normally be carried out to comply with
flight measurement feedback
• Buttons for inserting a 90° stub into the COU or CLR SBO RF signal paths (calibration of
these 90° stubs is done from the Transmitter settings - Signal adj. when RMM program is
in Factory Mode) (The stub is normally used for overall phasing). The SBO phase
adjustment to the right is then used for calibrating the phase for the system. Text above
the button indicates whether the 90° stub is inserted or not
• Input fields are provided for setting course-sector/sector-width (COU SBO level) and CLR
SBO level relative to the CSB level is provided. If reported course sector width is too
wide: increase COU SBO level by corresponding value. If reported course sector width is
too narrow: decrease COU SBO level by corresponding value

D.5.6.2 Alarm limit check tab
For setting and testing of alarm limits special controls are provided. One or more of the
different test signals can be applied simultaneously. The test signal types are described
below.
D.5.6.2.1 CL test signals
Two test signals can be preset/adjusted. One will normally be offset to provide an alignment
alarm on 90 Hz side (GP: low angle) while the other will be offset to alignment alarm 150 Hz
side (GP: high angle). Fine-tuning of the presets can be done by pulling the sliders, clicking
on the arrows at each end of the sliders or clicking the up/down arrow to the side of the value
fields.
The visual indication in the upper half of the Flight check window will indicate the change in
CL and NF DDM readings and will also indicate how close to the alarm limits the signals are
(alarm limit is indicated by a red line in the graphical readout for each parameter).
If the alarm limit shows not to be correct when the alarm point is found, a new alarm limit for
the monitors can be set by clicking on the Set limits button between the Mon1 and Mon2
indication for the relevant parameter.
The monitored value for that parameter will then be suggested as a new alarm limit but can
of course be manually overwritten.
The "Set limits" buttons will only be shown if the option "Enable alarm limit setting in level 3
from Flight check window" under the menu option File - Preferences is activated. Note:
Activate CL test signal 1 or 2 in order to enable the Set limits buttons.
D.5.6.2.2 DS test signals

For testing Narrow / Wide alarm limits, two settings can be preset/adjusted. Select either
Narrow or Wide test signals and adjust the SBO level until the correct alarm point is found.

The visual indication in the upper half of the Flight check window will indicate the change in
DS DDM reading and will also indicate how close to the alarm limits the signal is (alarm limit
is indicated by a red line in the graphical readout for each parameter).
If the alarm limit shows not to be correct when the alarm point is found, a new alarm limit for
the monitors can be set by clicking on the Set limits button between the Mon1 and Mon2
indication for the relevant parameter.
The monitored value for that parameter will then be suggested as a new alarm limit, but this
value can be manually overridden.
The "Set limits" button will only be shown if the option "Enable alarm limit setting in level 3
from Flight check window" under the menu option File | Preferences is activated.
D.5.6.2.3 CLR test signals
For testing of CLR wide alarm a test setting is provided. By activating this, the CLR SBO will
be reduced. Fine-tuning of the setting can be done by clicking the up/down arrows to the side
of the value field.
Changes in the CLR DDM value can be observed in the ILS-Data | Monitor window.
If the alarm limit has to be corrected this can be done via the ILS-Settings | Monitoring
window.
D.5.6.2.4 RF power alarm
For testing of the RF power alarm, test settings for both Course and CLR power have been
implemented.
By activating the test, the output level of the selected transmitter will be reduced with the
level selected.
Changes in the RF value can be observed in the ILS-Data | Monitor window.
If the alarm limit has to be corrected this can be done via the ILS-Settings | Monitoring
window.
D.5.7 General settings

D.5.7.1 About general settings
The "General settings" window is used for configuring the operation of the RMS subsystem
(board RMA1215) in the ILS. These settings do not affect the executive monitoring of the ILS
signals or the transmitted ILS signals.
D.5.7.2 ILS date and time
The Date/time tab in the General settings window is used for displaying and setting the
current date and time of the real time clock on the RMS board in the ILS. Master access level
is required to set the date and/or time.

D.5.7.3 User administration

The User adm tab in the General settings window is used for administration of the users and
passwords.
When logged in as a master user this window allows configuring of existing and new users,
which shall be granted access to the RMM system. When logged in as an ordinary user, this
window only displays the last time each user was logged on.
The LCD MENU and MASTER users are always set up, and cannot be deleted. The LCD
MENU entry is used for setting the four-letter password required for entering access level 3
from the LCD menu on RMA1215.
Notes:
• Passwords must be 6-8 characters in length (the LCD MENU must be 4 characters). Both
the username and passwords can only consist of characters in the ranges A-Z, a-z or 0-9
• The usernames for LCD MENU and MASTER cannot be changed
• For the LCD MENU user only an access level 3 password is entered
• For the MASTER user, no password field can be empty

D.5.7.4 Lamp mappings

At access level 3 the user may configure which of the small warning LED's that are "mapped"
to the main (big) warning LED on the remote control panel (and slave panel) and on the local
panel.
An "X"-mark to the left of the warning type indicates that an active warning of that type will
cause the main warning lamp to be activated.
If the configuration is changed, the Apply button must be clicked to send the new settings to
the ILS.
D.5.7.5 Medium storage sample interval
The sample intervals for the medium time storage in the ILS may be selected on the Medium
storage tab in the General settings window.
Access level 3 is required for changing the sample interval.
The following intervals way be selected:

Storage interval Total medium storage time
15 Minutes 24 Hours
30 Minutes 48 Hours
60 Minutes 4 Days
120 Minutes 8 Days
If the configuration is changed, the Apply button must be clicked to send the new settings to
the ILS.

D.5.7.6 Port setup

When the user selects "Port setup" in the General settings window the tab shown below is
displayed.
The window displays the currently configured bit rates and init strings. Pressing the Edit
button brings up a dialog where you can change the bit rate and/or the init string for the
selected port. Note that it is no init string for the local port, since a modem is not supported
for this port.
Pressing the Init modem makes the ILS send the modem initiation at the selected port.
If the init-string is left blank or the word "default" is written, the ILS will use a default init-string
that shall work on standard Hayes compatible modems under normal conditions.
Please consult the modem manual for further information about modem commands and
initialisation.
D.5.7.7 Cabinet name
When the user selects "Cabinet name" in the General settings window the tab shown below
is displayed.
The cabinet is displayed in the first row of the LCD panel. It is also used in the RMM system
for identifying the ILS. The cabinet name can only be configured in ILS cabinets with RMS
software version 13 or later.

The Master access level is required for changing the cabinet name.
D.5.7.8 System options
When the user selects "System options" in the General settings window the tab shown below
is displayed.
The user must be logged on as Master to make any changes to these settings.
Note: If any of these options are changed the RMS must be restarted (power the cabinet off
and on).
Note 2: Factory mode must be selected in the File | Preferences window to enable the
hardware configuration options.
The following sections describe each option.
D.5.7.8.1 Hardware configuration
D.5.7.8.1.1 Dual battery installed (NORMARC 7000B only)
Enable this option on racks which have dual battery banks. When enabled the RMM and
RMS software will show the maintenance measurements done on battery 2 and power
supply 2: BATTERY CURR 2, POWER CURR 2, BATTERY VOLT 2.
D.5.7.8.1.2 Near Field Monitor not installed
This option is to be enabled when no NF monitor is installed on the ILS. It will hide all the NF
readings in the Monitor measurements window, hide all readings of Maintenance parameters
from monitor 1 MO and MF boards and remove the options for readout and setting of NF
alarm limits/warning limits/delay from the LCD menu.
Note: In addition to enabling this option the NF alarm/warning limits must manually be set
OFF from the RMM software in factory mode to inhibit generation of NF alarm and warnings.
Use the Preferences window to turn on factory mode.
D.5.7.8.1.3 Tilt sensor installed
This option is to be enabled when the tilt sensor is installed. When enabled, the RMS and
RMM software will display the tilt sensor measurements and limits. Note: This option should
only be used on GP equipment. RMS version 13.3 or later is required to use this feature.

D.5.7.8.2 Voice generator installed

This option is to be enabled when the ILS is equipped with the voice module on the LF
generator boards (NORMARC 7000A) or an external voice generator (NORMARC 7000B). It
is used for enabling voice measurements and options in the RMS and RMM software.
D.5.7.8.2.1 High power GP CLR (NORMARC 7000B only)
Enable this option if COU transmitters (GPA 1581A) are used to generate CLR signals
(normally generated by GPA 1582A). Note: Using GPA 1581A transmitters this way, requires
the 27V supply line for CLR SBO to be disconnected.
D.5.7.8.2.2 Single Monitor system
This option is to be enabled in cabinets with one monitor. When enabled the RMS ignores IIC
read errors from monitor 2 and monitor 2 RF frontend and sets these measurements to N/A.
(The warning limits are ignored for any maintenance measurement that is N/A, so there is no
need to set the limits "off"). Monitor disagree warning (LED and event) is suppressed.
D.5.7.8.2.3 Single Transmitter system
This option is to be enabled in cabinets with one transmitter chain. When enabled the RMS
will ignore IIC read errors from TX2: OS,LF, and LPA/GPA COU/CLR, and sets the
measurements to N/A. (The warning limits are ignored for any maintenance measurement
that is N/A, so there is no need to set the limits "off".)
D.5.7.8.3 User system options
D.5.7.8.3.1 Manual mode turns off ident
When enabled, the RMS will automatically turn off the ident (and voice, if present) when the
system enters "manual" mode. The ident will also be turned off about 1 second after start up
if the system is in manual mode when powered on. Also, the ident warning LED will not be
activated while in manual mode. The ident will also be turned on when the system enters
"auto" mode.
Note: The RMS automatically sets the ident mode back to "Normal" when logging out from
access level 2 or higher. On equipment with LF 1223 boards (used in NORMARC 7000A),
the NMP110B.02 FPGA is required for setting Normal ident if the RMS looses its access as a
result of Grant/Deny switch change or Local/Remote switch change.
D.5.7.8.3.2 Manual mode turns off tx for 20 s (NORMARC 7000B only)
Enable this option to make the RMS automatically turn the transmitters off when Manual
mode is activated. After 20 seconds the RMS will turn the transmitters on again.
D.5.7.8.3.3 Integrity test failure on Param LED (NORMARC 7000B only)
Enable this option to activate the Param LED if any of the integrity checks fails. When
enabled, any monitor parameter warnings will not activate this LED, instead any monitor
parameter warning will be indicated by the Maint LED. Refer to the handbooks for a
description of the integrity checks performed by the RMS.
D.5.7.8.3.4 uA DDM unit on LCD panel
When enabled, selects µA instead of %DDM as the DDM measurement unit on the LCD.

D.6 Historical data
D.6.1 About historical data
D.6.1.1 Historical data storage in the ILS
The ILS has battery backed RAM in the RMS subsystem (RMA1215) board that is used to
store historical data. Four different types of historical data is stored:
• Medium time periodic storage: One sample of all monitor and maintenance
parameters stored periodically at user specified intervals (see Medium time periodic
settings). The storage contains the last 96 samples
• Long time periodic storage: For every day through a 180 days period, the mean value
and standard deviation of all monitor and analog maintenance parameters are stored.
• Warning storage: One sample of all monitor and maintenance parameters at the
instant when a warning LED is activated. The 25 last warnings are stored
• Alarm storage: Samples of all monitor and maintenance parameters for a period
starting from 30s before an alarm occurred and ending with the actual alarm sample.
The last seven alarms are stored in the ILS. Two alarms will be stored in the ILS for
each alarm condition that results in a transmitter changeover, which is followed by a
shutdown
In addition the ILS stores an event list in the battery backed RAM. See Viewing events for
more information about the event list.
The historical data stored in the ILS can be cleared from the LCD menu on the front of the
ILS cabinet. (This should always be done just before a system is set operative).
D.6.1.2 Historical data storage in the RMM software
The RMM software allows the user to download the historical data from the ILS. The different
storage types are saved in the following ways on the PC:
• Medium time and Long time periodic data: When downloaded, this data is stored in a
database on the user's hard disk. Storing the data in a database allows the user to
browse through data measured over a longer period than is stored inside the ILS. The
data can also imported into third party software (for example Microsoft Excel) with the
use of ODBC database access (option)
• Warning and Alarm storage: When downloaded, this data is stored as files on the
users hard disk. Storing the data as files simplifies the task of moving the data from
one computer to another, sending the data as e-mail, etc.
• Event storage: The event list is downloaded and stored in the database each time a
user logs on to an ILS
The following sections describe how to download historical data and how to view the data
once it has been downloaded.
To delete historical data stored for a station in the database, requires the user to delete the
station from the station list. There is no option to delete historical data only.
D.6.2 Downloading historical data
Selecting the menu item File|Storage download opens the "Storage download" window
shown below. This window is used to select a historical storage and start downloading it from
the ILS.

If there is no data in a historical storage it will not be possible to select it for download.
As it can be stored historical data for up seven alarms in the ILS, the user must select which
alarms to download. The time stamps shown in the window are the time of the last data set in
each storage (this time will be the same as the time of the changeover or shutdown of the
transmitters plus a few tenths of a second).
When a warning or alarm storage data is selected for download, a window will be opened in
which the user can select a folder and filename for saving the data to. When medium time or
long time period storage data is selected the data will be stored in the database.
D.6.3 Historical data
The menu item File | Open downloaded data is used to open and view downloaded historical
data. The window shown below is opened when this menu item is selected.
The user must select the type of historical storage to open and the station name (for medium
time and long time periodic data) or filename (for warning and alarm storage).
When the user clicks "Open" the historical data is opened. The main program window will
then change, and become similar to the window below.

There are panels placed at the top and the bottom of the program window. The top panel
shows the station name and the station type along with a "Close" button to stop viewing the
historical data. The bottom panel contains browse controls for selecting the currently
displayed data set among the data available in the storage.

The following ILS-Data menu items can be used to view data from the selected historical
storage:
• Monitor
• Maintenance
• Event list (only when viewing medium time periodic or long time periodic historical
data)
• Diagnostics
When viewing alarm storage data, the bottom panel will also have a drop-down list for
selecting the alarm storage to be browsed. Also shown is a text field that shows the result of
the automatically performed diagnose result for the selected alarm storage.
D.6.4 Continuous logging
The RMM program can be used to save the monitor and maintenance measurements that is
currently being received from an ILS directly to a file. This function is referred to as
"Continuous logging".
Continuous logging should not be confused with historical data stored in the ILS. The
following points describe the major differences:
• Data is logged real-time, i.e. only as long as the user is logged on to the ILS
• Monitor and maintenance measurements must be saved to separate files
• The user has complete control of the interval between saved data sets (specifying a
data set interval = zero seconds causes all received data to be saved)
• Data that has been saved with Continuous logging cannot be viewed from within the
RMM program. A text editor (for example Windows Notepad) or other third party
software (for example Microsoft Excel) must be used for opening and viewing the
contents Continuous log files
A typical utilization of the Continuous logging feature can be to find the cause of problems
that are not logged (or sufficiently logged) in the internal historical storages.
D.7 Fault diagnostics
D.7.1 About fault diagnostics
The RMM software has two algorithms to isolate a failure in the ILS. The algorithms are the
Current data diagnostics and the Alarm diagnostics.
D.7.2 Current data diagnostics
Current data diagnostics is invoked by selecting the menu item ILS-Data|Diagnostics. Based
upon the currently displayed data, which can originate from a live ILS connection or from
historical data storage, the program will suggest the faulty module(s), if any.
Refer to chapter 5.4 in the NORMARC 7000B Instruction Manual for a detailed description of
the algorithm used to isolate faults.
D.7.3 Alarm diagnostics
This diagnostic function are automatically performed when an alarm storage is downloaded
from the ILS. The diagnose result is shown on the screen when historical alarm data is
viewed.

Note that the alarm diagnostics algorithm works on alarms that causes a changeover to
standby transmitter. If the changeover is followed by shutdown, this information is used in the
algorithm for diagnosing the changeover alarm. It does not diagnose shutdown alarms as
standalone alarms.
Refer to chapter 5.4 in the NORMARC 7000B Instruction Manual for a detailed description of
the algorithm used to isolate faults.


7013B-14B - Im - 23136-0110 LLZ-min PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

7013B-14B - Im - 23136-0110 LLZ-min PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Commercial - in - Confidence

Instrument Landing System

Park Air Systems AS Name Signature Date

NORMARC 7013B-7014B Instruction Manual

Document part/Chapter Number Rev

© Copyright 2007 Park Air Systems AS

NORMARC 7013B-7014B Instruction Manual

Chapter Description Remove pages Insert pages

Instruction Manual NORMARC 7013B-7014B

NORMARC 7013B-7014B Instruction Manual

- Page intentionally blank -

Instruction Manual NORMARC 7013B-7014B

REQUESTS OR ERRATA TO PARK AIR SYSTEMS

Park Air Systems AS

Document title | NORMARC 7013B-7014B Instruction Manual

Reservation: Park Air Systems AS reserves the right to make design

NORMARC 7013B-7014B Instruction Manual

- Page intentionally blank -

Instruction Manual NORMARC 7013B-7014B

1. SECTION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION ........................................................ 1-1

2. SECTION 2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................................... 2-1

3. SECTION 3 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS .................................................... 3-1

NORMARC 7013B-7014B Instruction Manual

3.1 Main Cabinet................................................................................................... 3-1

4. SECTION 4 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ....................................................... 4-1

5. SECTION 5 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE .................................................. 5-1

Instruction Manual NORMARC 7013B-7014B

5.3.2 MF 1211/MF 1219 replacement...................................................................... 5-3

6. SECTION 6 PARTS LIST .......................................................................... 6-1

7. SECTION 7 INSTALLATION AND INITIAL SET-UP ......................................... 7-1

NORMARC 7013B-7014B Instruction Manual

7.3.3 Remote Ports Access Level Configuration ..................................................... 7-37

8. SECTION 8 DETAILED TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................... 8-1

Instruction Manual NORMARC 7013B-7014B

8.2 Tower Equipment............................................................................................ 8-44

SECTION 9 APPENDIXES .......................................................................................... A-1

APPENDIX A.MONITOR AND MAINTENANCE PARAMETERS .......................................... A-1

APPENDIX B.FAR FIELD MONITOR ............................................................................ B-1

APPENDIX C.POWER SUPPLY .................................................................................. C-1

APPENDIX D.WINDOWS RMM PROGRAM ................................................................. D-1

NORMARC 7013B-7014B Instruction Manual

Instruction Manual NORMARC 7013B-7014B

Figure 1-1 Typical ILS installation ............................................................................... 1-3

NORMARC 7013B-7014B Instruction Manual

Instruction Manual NORMARC 7013B-7014B

Figure 8-5 LF 1576A Block Diagram ........................................................................... 8-21

NORMARC 7013B-7014B Instruction Manual

Instruction Manual NORMARC 7013B-7014B

Table 2-1 RMS Events List......................................................................................... 2-14

NORMARC 7013B-7014B Instruction Manual

Instruction Manual NORMARC 7013B-7014B

NORMARC 7013B-7014B Instruction Manual

RMS Remote Monitoring System

Instruction Manual NORMARC 7013B-7014B

FIRST AID IN CASE OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

Send for medical assistance if possible.

NORMARC 7013B-7014B Instruction Manual

Avoid mouth-to-mouth resuscitation if there is possibility of transmission of infection between

Instruction Manual NORMARC 7013B-7014B

WARNING - HEALTH HAZARD

Symptoms of poisoning, indicated by respiratory troubles or cyanosis (grey or blue discolora-

Components must not be:

Defective and broken components must not be: